1971

mamooma
CONTROL HANDBOOK

produced by the Control Products Group

Digital Equipment Corporation, Maynard. Massachusetts

Copyright 1968, 1969, 1970 by

Digital Equipment Corporation

Digital Equipment Corporation makes no representation that the interconnection of its modular circuits
in the manner described herein will not infringe on
existing or future patent rights. Nor do the descriptions contained herein imply the granting of licenses
to make, use, or sell equipment constructed in accordance therewith.

FLIP CH IP-."il\ is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation

II

INTRODUCTION TO SOLID STATE

K SERIES CONTROL LOGIC MODULES

A SERIES LOGIC MODULES

UNIVERSAL HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

K SERIES APPlIC"TIONS

CONTROL PRODUCTS

NUMERICAL CONTROL PRODUCTS

PDP-14 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

CONTROL SYSTEMS

TRAINING AND DESIGN AIDS

ABOUT DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION

III

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The production of a publication of this size and complexity can be achieved
only through the efforts and cooperation of dozens of people. These include
engineers, writers, artists, and production personnel. While it is impossible
to cite all, a few individuals deserve special mention. Among these are: John
Bloem of the Control Products Group engineering staff who prepared and
assembled most of the technical material for this Handbook; Elliott Hendrick
son and his staff for their art direction and production assistance; and
Joseph Codispoti for his editorial assistance. The cover of this Control Handbook was conceived and executed for Digital by Chris Murphy of Boston.
September, 1970

IV

FOREWORD
The DIGITAL Control Handbook is presented by Digital Equipment Corporation as a practical guide to solid state control logic. It is written for those
who specify, design, manufacture or use electronic or mechanical logic for
control of equipment ranging from basic stand alone machines, to complex
transfer and processing equipment, to sensitive laboratory instrumentation.
This fourth edition contains information on the latest developments in Digital's products for control and documentation on current techniques of their
application.
For readers investigating solid state control logiC for the first time, this book
is especially appropriate as it contains a meaningful orientation to solid state,
showing its relationship to older forms of electromechanical control. Part of
this orientation is comprised of a straightforward presentation on how to
convert from relay to solid state logic. Several practical examples are given
on how the conversion is executed.

Of particular interest to machine tool builders and users, is the introductory

documentation contained in this handbook on the new PDP-S based sys~
tem for direct numerical control. This edition also contains data on our substantially expanded line of analog logic modules, designed for a variety of
industrial and other applications which require analog data handling with
digital techniques. A brief description of the Corporation and its other products is also presented.
Our staff of control products specialists in over 60 offices around the world
and our home office applications engineering staff are ready to assist you
in developing solid state controls for your needs. If you have such an application, contact us. If you don't-think you have an application, look over the
material presented in this Control Handbook. It might change your mind.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Thumb Index

III

Foreword

INTRODUCTION TO SOLID STATE.

K SERIES CONTROL LOGIC

MODU~ES

Logic Symbology

18

Logic Module Data Sheets:

Gating Modules, KOXX and KIXX .
Flip-Flops and Memories, K2XX ..
Timers, K3XX " ...................... .
Manual Control Modules, K4XX .

55

Interface Module Data Sheets:

Inputs, K5XX
Outputs, K6XX .

28
77

91
103
124

K Series Hardware and Accessories:

Accessories Containing Electronics, K7XX .
Mounting Hardware, K9XX ..

150
173

--182

A SERIES ANALOG MODULES

UNIVERSAL HARDWARE and ACCESSORIES

232

K SERIES APPLICATIONS

260

Construction Recommendations
Relay Logic to K Series Conversion ."
Sequencers, Introduction .... .
Timer Sequencers. . ........~ .. .
Counter Sequencers ..
Shifter Sequencers .....
Polyflop Sequencers ..
Using K303 Timers for Frequency Setpoint ..
Estimating K303 Time Jitter ....
Combining K with M Series Modules.
Combining K with A Series Modules .
Combining K with R Series Modules
Pulse Generator From NAND Gates
K531 Quadrature Decoder.
Sensor Converters .............. .
DC Drivers.
Using K210s for Long Odd-Modulus Courtters .

VI

262
268
286
288

289
291
292
293
294

295
297
299
300

301
303
307

309

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Con't)

K SERIES APPLICATIONS (con't.)
Parallel Counters
Annunciators
~ultiplexing Thumbwheel Registers with K581
Fixed Memory Using K281 ,
Pulse Rate Multiplier,
Pulse Rate Squarer,
Digital Integrator
Serial Adder
Stepping Motors, Introduction
Basic Two Way Shift Register
SLO-SYN Bifilar Motor Drive
Responsyn Motor Drive
Fujitus Motor Drive
ElectrohydrauJic Servo Motor ,
Voltage to Frequency Converter Using A207
Current to Frequency Converter Using K303
Using K604, K614 with 240 V

,310

311
313
315
316
317
318
320
321
324
324
325
326
328
329
330
331
334

CONTROL PRODUCTS
Numerical Control Products,
Quickpoint-8 NC Tape Preparation System
Direct Numerical Control

336
338
, 352

PDP-14 Programmable Controller

360

Control Systems

380

Training and Design Aids:

K Series Logic Lab
Computer Lab

382
392

ABOUT DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION

394

Warranty Statement and Discount Schedule

400

Price List and Numerical Index

401

Index

405

VII

Introduction
toS61id State
Control system complexity and demands on reliability are rising with everincreasing automation. More and more, control system designers are looking
to solid state electronics for new answers to the old problems of reliability,
complexity, and economy. Some of the answers are provided by solid-state
digital logic deSigned for the industrial environment, and solid state analogdigital conversion to link analog sensors and actuators to digital control.

Why Solid State?

The time-honored way to do control logic is with the deceptively simplelooking relay. The metal-to-metal contact area sees physical and chemical
actions of remarkable complexity. Even the mechanical-magnetic interactions
are involved enough to cause problems now and then. Still, relays sometimes
respond beautifully to simple maintenance. If the contacts stick, force them
apart; if they are dirty, clean them.
Railway signaling relays, operating perhaps a hundred times a day,' accumulate 25 years and a million operations without failure. And modern sealedcontact relays can do 10 billion operations under the right conditions without
wearing out. So why abandon well-proven, reliable components? Don't,
unless it is necessary! But it is becoming necessary in a growing number of
applications.
Reliability
As profit margins grow tighter, and maximum process efficiency becomes a
neCessity rather than an ideal, control system reliability assumes greater
importance. Faulty operation and machine downtime can swiftly and disas-

trously cut into the profit picture. With a highly complex control system,
check-out can easily become a very costly and time consuming operation.
Many factors affect the reliability of a control system. A major consideration
is the speed at which. the logic control elements must operate. At 1 KHz, near
the maximum rate for dry reed delays, 100 million operations accumulate in
about 30 hours. Longerlived mercurywetted contacts, operating 100 times
per second, accumulate 10 billion operations in about four years. Even if a
four year component life is enough, there are applications where 100 operations per second are not. Solid state logic, with nothing to wear out, stick, or
corrode, can operate almost indefinitely at 100,000 operations per second.
Complexity is another factor. Demands for more automation, more efficiency,
more safety, more accuracy all result in increased control system complexity.
As a result, the sheer numbers of logical decisions demand component
reliability far greater than that acceptable in a small system. Solid state logic
provides the degree of reliability needed in a large system, at reasonable
cost.
Size
Even the tiniest-contact reed relay coil is enormous alongside a transistor, or
a complete integrated circuit, and most small control systems are not built
with reed relays: to get the advantage of ruggedness or standardization,
usually all the relays used are built to 300 volt or even 600 volt specifications
whether they drive external loads or just relay coils. But a single small
printed circuit board can easily accommodate a half dozen or more relay
equivalents in logic capability, in a small fraction of the space of one 300
volt relay.
Computer Tie-In
There are several levels of computer involvement possible, extending from
incorporation of a computer as a part of an individual control system to the
use of a central computer to monitor the performance of many independent
control systems. Regardless of the level at which the computer interacts, its
presence demands an interface between solid-state Circuitry and the controlled machine or process. If such an interface is forced into existence by
the present or projected future use of a computer, why not put solid state
control logic behind it and gain the benefits of solid state speed, compact
ness, and reliability throughout the entire system?
Also, solid-state logic can communicate with existing analog sensors and
actuators through solid-state analog-to-digital (AI D) and digital-to-analog
(01 A) converters.
All of these factors tend to make solid state control systems increasingly
attractive, particularly as their costs come down.
Who Should Be Designing For Solid State Controls?
Broadly speaking, the decision between conventional relay controls and the
new solid state controls, like most engineering deCisions, hinges on comparative overall costs. Where three or four or a half dozen relays can do the
whole job, the cost of a solid-state interface will seldom be justified unless
high speeds are required .. Very large or computer-oriented systems leave
little justification for the use of relays.
For intermediate systems, the comparison is more complicated. The tabulation below can serve as a framework for a systematic review of factors you
should consider before you specify your next control system.
2

! Factors Suggesting
I Solid State

Considerations

FactO,rs Suggesting Relays

Reliability

Control system failure causes

no panic. Temporary manual
control acceptable. Simple
system, easy to trouble
shoot.

Downtime cuts quickly into

process profitability. Quick
check-out of entire system
in case of trouble desirable,
instead of on-the-spot checking. Lives and property might
be endangered by failure.

Cost

low cost relays acceptable.

Maintenance costs need not
be considered-. Personnel
training costs important. Systern failures will not cause
significant secondary costs.

High quality relays used for

comparison. Costs of failure
high. Installation space costIy. Cost of future modifications must be considered.
Maintenance costs over life
could be important.

Complexity

Small systems" perhaps a Complicated systems, which

half dozen relays or fewer. would require fifteen or more
relays to implement.

Sophistication
\

Traditional performance still New levels of performance

acceptable.
are needed, calling for increased control system coml plexity to remain competitive.

Familiarity

Controls must be serviced Environments already inby electricians who can not clude other solid-state combe retrained.
ponents or they will soon be
added. Also, mUlti-system
installations where a few
controls
technicians
will
cover a lot of equipment.

Growth

No foreseeable use of com- Added perfo'rmance or safeputers. little likelihood of ty features may be wanted
important modifications.
later without tearing the
system down. Computer tiein might become' desirable
or is planned already.

Size

Plenty of space available.

Relay equipment might require separate balconies, restrict maintenance of machinery, or block aisles.
Features added later must
fit original enclosu~e.

Speed

Control system delays of

tens of milliseconds acceptable. Operating rate is low,
relay wearout no problem.

Compatibility
with
pulse
tachometers,
photoelectric
pickups, electronic instruments l"equired. Closed-loop
stability demands quick response. High repetition rate
that would cause wearout of
moving parts.

Why Digital?
Relays, solenoids, switches, fuses, locks, counters, annunciators, panel lights
and panic buttons all have one thing in common: they are digital. All these
devices (when working properly) are up, down, on, off, in, out; but never inbetween. Strictly speaking, of course, you cannot get from on to off without
passing through in-between. But digital devices pass through in-between at
maximum speed, and without waiting around for doubt to creep in.
Non-digital devices like panel meters, potentiometers, and slide rules work in
the "in-between" area, producing outputs that are proportiona~ to the input.
The angular position of a panel meter pointer is the analog of the magnitude
of the electrical input. A potentiometer's voltage output is the analog of
mechanical shaft position. In a slide rule, position is the analog of magnitude.
In a slide rule, accuracy is limited by the thickness of the calibrating marks
and the difficulty of estimating values between them. Each space is an area
of uncertainty. The same kind of uncertainty exists in every proportional
electrical system, in the form of noise. In all but the most expensive analog
equipment, the amount of noise, like Slide rule error, limits accuracy to two
or three significant figures.
Noise taken in this broad sense affects every proportional device. Noise is a
major reason for the dominance of digital computers over analog computers
where complex calculations are required. Small amounts of noise contributed by each analog input or computing element add up to degrade the
accuracy of the answer. In digital circuits, the noise can be disregarded as
long as it is below an "off" or "on" threshold level.

Analog controllers and servo systems, chart recorders, panel meters, and
small analog computers are often simpler and cheaper than their digital
equivalents, and should be used wherever they can do the job. But since so
many commonly used control devices (from relays to panic buttons) are
digital anyway, all-digital control is convenient. For complex control situations, digital methods can deliver accuracy and perform types of control
beyond the ability of an analog system at any cost. And using solid state
digital control, analog and digital devices can work together through AI 0
and Of A conversion. Better still, noise-free direct digital sensors and
actuators can be used in the design of new process equipment.

Noise Immune Control Modules

Because ,of their high sensitivity and speed, solid state components can
respond to noise that relays would safely ignore. To use solid state logic with
freedom from noise problems in the neighborhood of arcing contacts,
brushes, welders, etc. requires special design considerations.

Unlike analog devices, digital circuits have a noise "threshold" above which
a noise or signal must rise to cause any change in the output of the circuit.
It is this threshold that accounts for the superiority of digital circuits in pro
cessing information through complex manipulations without loss of accuracy.
4

'In the design of solid state logic for industrial use, this basic threshold
feature of digital circuits can be exploited. By adding external capacitance,
the speed, and thus the sensitivity, of the circuit can be lowered.

Noise
Suppose that on the basis of the above, you find you should be using
solid-state digital logic. But will the system "drop bits," or otherwise go
haywire in your environment? How well can noise trouble be anticipated,
and what measures should be taken? How can you compare the noise
immunity of competing manufacturers' circuits? These questions need some
kind of answer before you can feel confidence in taking th~ step.

A logical starting point is the noise itself. What is its amplitude? Its frequency distribution? How does it vary with time? With temperature? How
many picofarads of coupling capacitance between the noise sources and the
logic wiring? 'How many nanohenries of shared inductance in the logic and
noise ground return paths?

Right away you suspect these questions are going to be difficult to answer.
You may be able to say that typical noise source voltages are "measured in
kilovoltS" and are "strongest in the Megahertz frequencies." But going
beyond such hazy estimates will require detailed knowledge of the physical
conditions that interact to produce electrical noise .. You'll need to know the
materials used in all metal-to-metal contacts, and the condition of the contact
surfaces. You'll need the inductance and capacitance of the wires connecting
them, the inductance and capacitance of the loads they drive, and the
gases in the atmosphere surrounding the contacts. Even the exact routing
of the wires will have to be examined.
Is solid-state out of the question after all, because analysing the noise
environment is impractical? No, solid-state can still be used, provided you
use circuits designed specifically for noisy environments, where the focus
is on qualitative rather than quantitative factors.

All incoming integrated circuits undergo cornputer controlled testing, with 40 de and 16 ac tests performed In 1.1 seconds. This
100% inspection speeds production by minimizing the diagnosis
of component failures in module test.

K Series
Control Logic Modules

K SERIES
CONTROL MODULES

Computer-oriented logic, by its very nature, is high speed (1 MHz and above),
and provides noise immunity far below that required in a process control
environment. The upper frequency range of the K Series modules is 100 KHz,
with provision for reduction tq 5 KHz for maximum noise immunity. These
modules incorporate all silicon diodes, transistors, and integrated circuits,
deliberately slowed through the use of descrete components.
Either English (non-inverting) logic or NANDI NOR logic is compatible with
K Series. The hardware for this series is specifically designed for standard
mounting hardware can likewise be used for
NEMA enclosures. FLIP CHIP
rack-mounting, inasmuch as K Series ":,odules fit standard DEC sockets.
connectors, used for years in applications from steel
Proven FLIP CHIP
mills to lathe controls, provide modularity. Even the connection between
terminal strips and electronics can be plugged for installing the logic after
field wiring is complete, and removing it quickly for modifications or additions.
Checkout and trouble shooting is easy with K Series logic. Wherever possible,
every system input and output has an indicator light at its screw terminal.
A special test probe provides its own local illumination and built-in indication
of transients. as well as steady states. Every point in the system is a test
point, and consistent pin assignments reduce the need to consult prints.
Construction materials and methods are the same as for other high",odules, including a computer-controlled operating
production FLIP CHIP
test of each complete module. K Series modules further offer the size
reduction, reliability, flexibility, and low cost of solid state logic, with an
added bonus of easy interconoection. FLIP CHIP
industrial modules are
ideal for interfacing high speed M Series or computer-systems to machinery
and processes. Sensing and output circuits can operate at 120 vac for full
electromechanical capability. Inputs from contact devices see a 1110derate
reactive load to assure normal cont~ct life. Solid state ac switches are fully
protected against false triggering. Voltages from the external environment are
excluded from the wirewrap connections within the logic.

K SERIES SPECIFICATIONS
SUMMARY
Frequency range: ~ to 100 KHz. Control points on the modules allow reduction to 5 KHz for maximum noise immunity for critical functions.
Signal levels: Ov and +5v, regardless of fanout used.
Fan-out: 15 rna available from all outputs; typical inputs 1-4 mao
Waveforms: Trapezoidjil. No fast transients to cause cross talk. External
capacitive loading affects speed only; no risetime dependence.
Temperature range: -20C to +65C, using all-silicon diodes, transistors,
and monolithic integrated circuits (0 to 150F). (limited to OC on the
module types: K201, K202, K210, K211, K220, K230, K596).
8

Noise immunity: false "1":30 rna at 1.6v for 1.5 p.sec typical. false "0":3
rna at 3v for 1.5 p'sec typical. Time thresholds can be increased by a factor
of 20 for critical points by wiring the slowdown control pins.
Simple power requirements: Single voltage supply, +5v 10%. Dissipation
typically 200 mw per counting or shifting flip-flop, 30 mw per control flip-flop,
10 mw per two-stage diode gate.
Control system voltage: 120 VAC, 50 or 60 hertz.
Mounting provisions: Standard NEMA industrial enclosures. May also be used
in 19" electronics cabinets.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Construction Features
K-Series modules include the quality features of older lines of FLIP CHIP
modules: flame-resistant epoxy-glass laminates, all-silicon semiconductors,
gold plated fingers and solid gold connector contacts. Thorough testing of
each module is by computer operated automatic tester for most modules, or
_by specialized equipment for those which are not amenable to automatic test.
A test specification sheet or data sheet is packaged with each module, including a circuit schematic for that type. Monolithic or hybrid integrated circuits
are included wherever they can improve the performance-cost ratio. Versatile
mounting hardware imposes as few physical constraints as practicable.
Outline drawings below show nominal module dimensions.
STANDARD MODULE SIZES
SINGLE -WIDTH FLIP CHIP MODULE
CONDUCTIVE COMPONENT LIMIT 11/32

0.056

NONCONDUCTIVE COMPONENTS 3/8 mox.

~------------------------~

~l-=;~===~==D=-P=L=~=E=D=CON==T~==T=S~~====~~3lJL~
1/16 MAXIMUM HEIGHT
OF SOLDERED
COMPONENT LEADS

ETCHED WIRING SURF~E

SINGLE - HEIGHT FLIP CHIP MODULE

DOUBLE-WIDTH FLIP CHIP MODULE

CONDUCTIVE COMPONENT LIMIT 13/16

O.OM

-r----i

~-

NONCONDUCTIVE COMPONENTS 27132 max.

GOLD-PLATED CONTACTS

DOU8LE - HEIGHT FLIP CHIP MODULE

':~ITEg
r-=~ . ,
FI==F g

T
1
2 '40

.370

53116

AH

.140

AV

AU

T
L=1-1----.
IA
INI

ec

8D

If:
IIf
8M
8J

2.240

8K

8l
8M
lIN

8P

8111

IS
BT

8U

BV

3/32

812

5'/'6

1.. : - - - - - - -

------......-(.1
---------404

5 1/2

Logic Signals
There are no ultra-fast transients at any K Series output. Logic signal -1"
and "0" levels are essentially independent of fanout. Rise and fall transitions
have controlled slopes which are not strongly influenced by normal changes
in fanout, lead length, temperature, or repetition rate. The fastest K Series
trapezoidal logic signal can be fully analyzed with a 500KC oscilloscope.
Logic "I" or "true" is +5 volts and lokic "0" or "false" is zero volts except
where redefined by logic designer. Counters and shift "registers advance at
the "I" to "0" transition and are cleared by a "0" level Any unused input
may be left open.
M Series Compatibility
M S~ries outputs can drive K Series logic gates and output converters directly,
and any K Series input after passing through a K Series gate, provided they
meet timing requirements. See Applications Notes.

10

Loading
Input Loading (Fanin)-Each K Series input requires a certain amount of
drive to operate, thus imposing a load on the output driving it: The amount
of load imposed by an input is defined in terms of the amount of current
required to pull that input to ground. Logic gate inputs consume 1 milliampere per input. Other loadings range from 1 to 4 milliamperes as indicated
by the loading numbers enclosed in squares on each specification diagram.

INPUT LOADING:

DRIVING CAPABILITY

1 MA PER INPUT

EACH OUTPUT DRIYEN

IN A "WIRED AND" IS
A 3 MA LOAD

FANIN AND FANOUT

Output Loading (Fanout)-Each K Series output is capable of sinking a
certain maximum amount of current to ground in the low state. The standard
K Series output can sink 15 milliamperes to ground and can therefore handle
a maximum of 15 inputs, each requiring 1 milliampere of drive.
If K Series outputs are paralleled to obtain the wired AND logic function,
each gate output is effectively driving the other and therefore, each output
must be considered as a load on the others. To pull a typical output to
ground requires 3 milliamperes of drive. When two or more K Series outputs
are tied together, they produce a 3 milliampere load on each other. If, for
example, the outputs of th.ree K123 gates are connected, the combined
fanout is' reduced by 6 milliamperes, leaving 9 milliamperes of drive capability. A maximum limit of five outputs can be tied together reducing the
fanout capability to three milliamperes.
Operating Temperature
.
K Series modules are designed for operation in free-air ambient temperatures
between -20C and +65C (OF to 150F) except. the following types which
are restFicted to OC (32F) minimum: K201. K202. K210. K21l, K220,
K230, K596.

Speed
Many applications for K Series modules involve operation at rates lower than
relay speeds. Even at speeds many times faster than relay capabilities, timing
need not be considered unless the logic includes a "loop". fA flip-flop constructed of logic gates is such a loop, in which the output at a given point
feeds back to influence itself, thus demanping input durations longer than
total loop delay. Proper operation of such loops should be verified by calcu
lation using the specifications below. For a complex loop an experiment
should be made if possible to look for flaws in the calculations.
When anticipated repetition rates will be of the same order of magnitude as
rated logic frequency, more care is required in timing design. K Series circuits
are intentionally slowed to the maximum extent practicable for 100 KHz
operation, and the resulting propagation delays can limit complex logic
systems to 50 KHz or 30 KHz repetition rates. Timing loops must be ex11

amined just as carefully in slow logic as in fast logic. If K Series speed ap

pears marginal or insufficient for the job at hand, use M Series high speed
logic modules.

OK SERIES TIMING
Timing Characteristics for K113, K123, K124,
K202, K210, K211, K220, K230

Min.

Logic Gate Propagation Delay, Time Delay for

output to rise to 2.5v after input is sensed.
Output D only, when connected to pin B

0.5

Logic Gate Propagation Delay. Time Delay for

output to fall to 2.5v after input is sensed.
Output D only, when connected to pin B

0.3

Countl Shift input Propagation Delay, Output

Rise.
As above, but pin B grounded to pin C

2.0

Count/Shift Input Propagation Delay, Output

Fall
As above, but pin B grounded to pin C
Rise time, all unslowed outputs, Kl13, K123,
K124. (Ov to +5v)
Pin 0 output only, when connected to pin B
Falltime, all unslowed outputs, Kl13, K123,
K124 (+5v to Ov)
Pin D outputs only, when connected to pin B
Minimum time between successive input transitions on any module which has one or more
Countl Shift inputs.
As above, but pin B grounded to pin C

7.5

4.5

10

Time (,usec)
Typ.
2.0
40
1.0
20
5.0
30

1.0
10

4.0
30

2.0
30

7.0
140

.5
7.5

1.5
30

Max.
3.0

ISO
6.0
180
9.0
100
9.0
100
12.0
240
4.0
120

10

ExceptIons:
Input transitions at pins J and K may follow other input transitions with delays down
to zero; For characteristics not listed above, see timing information on individual data
pages.
NOTE: Count/Shift inputs are included in types K202, K210, K21l, K220, and K230

Noise Immunity
Until recently. most industrial control designers were very skeptical of using
logic modules in their control circuits. It was originally thought that these
low logic level modules would be very susceptible to the large noise spikes
which are so common in this industry. K Series modules, however, were
specifically designed to work in noisey surroundings. Several noise rejection
techniques were incorporated in their design, and operation in the field has
proven that they can operate almost indefinitely under such conditions.
Two properties of electrical interference often overlooked in evaluating logic
noise immunity are its source impedance and its frequency distribution.
Unless the digital logic is spread over several feet or yards so that high
potentials can be induced in the ground system, most noise will be injected
via very small stray capaCitances and hence will have a high source impedance. The voltages at the noise source itself are usually measured in thou-

12

sands of vorts. Consequently, voltage thresholds alone cannot provide ade_ quate noise rejection. The noise appears to come from a current source, so
that logic circuit current thresholds are' also an important measure of noise
. immunity.
Another means of controlling noise is by timing thresholds. Capactive-coupled interference is strongest at high frequencies. Logic circuits whicti
respond slowly can reject high frequency interference peaks that exceed the
current and voltage thresholds.
Noise immunity in K Series modules is provided by a balanced combination
of voltage, current, and timing thresholds. Techniques for increasing these
noise reje~tion thresholds will be discussed in the remainder of this article.
, Typical K Series noise thresholds are as follows:

1. To be falsely interpreted as a high (+5) level, a low (zero volts)

K Series logic level must be raised 1.6 volts and held there for 1.5
microseconds. To do this would require 30 milliamperes to be supplied
somehow from the noise source to the K Series output in question for
this period of time.
2.

To be falsely interpreted as low level. a high (+5) K Series logic

level would have to be reduced 3.4 volts and held there for 1.5 microseconds, to do this would require 3 milliamperes to be supplied somehow from the noise source to the K Series output in question for this
period of time.

Voltage threshold: The typical K Series circuit is a single voltage threshold

device. This means that the circuit will turn on (low to high) at the same
voltage threshold as it will turn off (high to low).

!.U~!!!}.y ________ ~~~~F

INPUT

OUTPUT - - _....

Some K Series modules, however, have a built-in feedback network which

increases the voltage threshold necessary to switch from a low to a high
output and decrease the voltage threshold needed to switch from a high to
a low output. This results in a voltage gap between the turn on level and
the turn off level, which is known as the hysteresis of the circuit.

TURN ON

5V'

HYSTERESIS

::JDJj.11JZ7.DnlF.ZF.Rtfi!~URN OFF

INPUT:

;----

5V
OUTPUT _ _ _...1

----ov
13

Those K Series modules which contain hysteresis have voltage gaps from .5
to 1 volt in width, resulting in a higher voltage threshold necessary to turn
the circuit on. As an example: suppose a circuit turns on at 2.4 volts and
turns off at 1.4 volts, then it would require a noise spike 2.4 volts high and
1.5 microseconds wide to trigger a false high level. To be falsely interpreted
as a low level, a high level (+5) would now have to drop 3.6 volts for 1.5
microseconds.
Current thresholds: Current thresholds change with each variation in a
circuit's voltage threshold. If a circuit has hysteresis, the noise source will
need to supply the K Series output with even more current in order to
cause a low level to be falsely interpreted as a high level, or a high level to
be falsely interpreted as a low level. As an example: suppose a circuit has
1 volt hystersis; if the turn on voltage threshold is 2.4 volts, then the noise
source will need to supply 60 ma to the K Series output for 1.5 microseconds to obtain a falsely interpreted high output. The current threshold
necessary to falsely interpret a low (0 v) level will increase to 3.2 mao
Timing thresholds: All critical K Series outputs contain a slowdown, which
prevents operation at frequencies above 100KHz. Many modules also provide pin connections for further slowdown to 5KHz. As discussed apove most
noise occurs at high frequencies, therefore the slower the logic circuits the
more noise immunity. A typical example of slowdown in K Series:

- - -'5V

----ov

INPUT - - _...

------f.~

UNSLOWED
OUTPUT

~7p.S~
5V

I
I

SLOWED

OUTPUT ----~

I--

14010'$

-.f
I

3010'5

OV

With 5KHz slowdown connected, 'a noise spike must now maintain the
necessary voltage and current threshold levels for 30 microseconds instead
of the typical 1.5 microseconds at 100KHz.
If a particular point in a logic system is exceptionally noisy, a, capacitor can
be hung to ground from that point. This method of noise reduction can be
used because K Series logic does not care what rise time you feed it.
One trap often encountered by users of slowdown circuits occurs when
control flip-flop (sealed AND) circuits are implemented. All control flip-flops
should be slowed and any output of another gate wire ANDed to the output
of a control flip-flop should also be slowed.
14

RESET

I
I

SET A

SET B

L-o
I

I
I

DOTTED LINE
SHOWS WIRE
AND

This precaution prevents noise problems in the system.

Up to this point, only those methods which can be used to' minimize the
influence of noise that has already entered a logic system have been
discussed. Keeping noise out of a system, however, is far cheaper than
electrically rejecting it. In this section, several methods of keeping noise ou.t
of a system will be discussed.
1.

Segregate logic wiring from field wiring. Never design input converters
and output drivers so field wiring goes through the same connectors
used to carry logic signals. Arrange to use opposite ends of printed
boards for logic and field wiring connections, and never allow the two
kinds of wiring to be side-by-side or be bundled together.

2.

Never mix, logic ground with field ground. This does not mean that
logic ground should float. Heavy currents should not pass through the
logic ground system on their way back to a power supply. AC and DC
isolation techniques used in K Series are as fololws:
PC IsolatiOn-AC ,Input Converters and AC Isolated Switches use
transformers to isolate AC voltages from the logic. The inductance
of the transformer windings prevents AC noise spikes from penetrating the logic circuit.

'~

AC
VOLTAGE

--+

TO LOGIC

AC ISOLATION

DC Isolation-DC Switch Filters and DC Drivers segregate high DC

currents from the logic system ground by, separating the supply and
logic ground with a small resistor. With this resistor isolation, any

15

heavy currents in th~DC ground level will be forced to flow t~rough

the ground return wire and not through the logic ground (path of
least resistance.) The isolation resistor looks like a very high reo
sistance compared to the ground return wire of the load supply.

+
INTERNAL DC ISOLATION
IN DC DRIVER MODUr

LOAD SUPPLY
GROUND RETURN

LOAD
SUPPLY

r-.. -.. .-.. ..,.------------+----I

~--~

CHASSIS GROUND

3.

Use highdensity packaging. Computer type modular construction

minimizes lead lengths in the logic, minimizing the capacitive coupling
between logic wiring and nearby field wiring. Dense packaging also
cuts resistance and inductance'jn the logic grounding system, minimizing interference from any residual noise currents that may flow there.

4.

Where logic 'and power circuits must be adjacent, us~ shielding. For
example: a group of printed boards carring field circuits can be
shielded from general purpose logic modules simply by inserting unetched copper clad boards in the sockets that separate the two groups.
(Logic power must skip these sockets to avoid shorting the'supply.)
A single ground connection to the shield board is perfectly adequate,
since the noise currents it carries will be limited by the small capaci
tance involved. (W993 electrostatic shields may be used.)

5.

Filter the line voltage where it enters

supply output terminals. Supplies for
filtered, if their wiring approaches logic
for any other function or carry supply
any reason.

the logic power supply, or at'

panel lamps should also be
wiring. Do not use logic power
output wires into the field for

Power Requirements
A simple 5 volt supply operates any K Series system. Tolerance at room
temperature: 10%. K Series regulators K731 and K732 have a built'in
temperature coefficient of approximately minus 1 % for 3C(5F) to obtain
full logic fanout over' a wide temperature range and to minimize the temperature coefficient of K303 timers. Both regulators run from a nominal 12.6
volt centertapped transformer secondary, with hash removed. See Construction Recommendations for information about alternate sources of logic power.
Logic power is not used for contact sensing; 120 VAC is specified to provide
full compatibility with silver contacts and noisy environments.

16

DEC engineer checks out part of a K Series control system.

17

K SERIES LOGIC SYMBOLS

Symbols used in K Series diagrams are based on standard ICl-1965-158 for
industrial controls issued by the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association ("NEMA"). For those not familiar. with this standard, the basic symbols
are defined below, along with equivalent symbols from U.S. Military Standard
Mil STD-806B. K Series modules are designed to allow a logical "1" to be.
identified with the positive voltage level, and logical "0" with zero volts. The
diagrams shown below follow this convention. Notice that except for tfm-ers,
the two symbol standards are one-for-one interchangeable. For relay logic
symbol conversion, see second Applications Note.
C;ERIES SYMBOL

A 8
(A AND II

A AND a

0
0

o(FAL!E1
o(I"ALSEI
o(I"ALKI

,, ,

, (TMlEI

, ,
0

o(I"ALSE)

I (TMlE)
, (TAUE)

I (TlltU[)

0
0

~
A.a

NOTE: OVERSAR MEANS

NEGATION If' A
IS FALSE lIS
TRUE. AND VICEVERSA

'D----c'V.

1..1

NOT

AORa

A.,
(A Ollt a)

'N-

AND

OR

(A AND I)

Aa

DVI

...

.~ A.I

AND

MIL SYMBOL

LOGIC FUNCTION

(A Ollt I)

OR

I
-

[ill]
o

18

AV

K SERIES SYMBOL

. MIL SYMBOL

LOGIC FUNCTION

1111111111111111

~
~,
z

BINARY COUNTER

'z

BINARY COUNTE"R

1111111111

BCD COUNTER
(BINARY-CODED DECIMAL)

BCD COUNTER
~BINARY-CODED DECIMAL)

~
I

0:L
~
DELAY~

OFF DELAY
(WITH GATED INPUT)

OFF DELAY
(WITH GATED INPUT)

-1

CONVERTS AC, DC,

OR RESISTANCE TO
LOGIC LEVELS AND
VICE-VERSA

CONVERTER

CONVERTER

CONVERTER

--

.-

19

K SERIES lOGIC
K Series is organized by groups according to ,the first number after the K.

KNXX
These groups are as follows:
N==O
N==l
N==2
N==3

N=4
N==5

N=6
N==7
N==9

Gate Expanders
Gating
Memory (flip-flops, counters, etc.)
Timing
External Controls
Input Converters
Output Converters
Power
Hardware

WHAT IT DOES.

A.

GATING-KIOO GROUP

K Series gating modules combined with K Series gate expanders provide an

extremely versatile method of implementing logic functions. Functions of
high complexity can be implemented inexpensively using these gates and
expanders.
The basic K Series gates are the Kl13 Inverting gate and the K123 Noninverting gate.
K113
K123

A
INPUTS

The K1l3 performs the NAND function

F
(A7B)

The K123 performs the AND function

F
(A 8)

Notice that each basic K Series gate shows two inputs with dotted lines.
These are the expansion inputs, which allow functions other than NAND or
- AND to be implemented.
AN)

I EXPANSION
IINPlJT

20.

The "AND" expansion input is used with the K003 AND Expander, to provide
the AND or NAND function for more than 2 inputs. For example, with one
K003 AND Expander connected to a K123 Non-inverting gate we create a
five input AND gate.

A
B
C

o
E

Up to

lob inputs may be connected to the AND Expansion input.

The "OR" expansion input is used with the K026 "AND/OR" expansion
gate, or the K028 "AND/OR" expansion gate. Used with the K012, the K123
(or Kl13) becomes a 4 input "OR" (or Nor) gate.

F=A+B+C+O

Up to 9 "OR" inputs can be connected to the_ OR expansion input.

When the OR expansion input is used, and the AND inputs are also used,
the output of the AND gate is "ORed" .with the OR expansion input.

Ga(AeB)+C+O+E+F

21

The K003 can be connected to the OR expansion input as follows:

o
We can now begin to see the power of K Series gating. For instance, the
function (A B C 0 E)
(F G)
H
I
J
K can be simply
implemented with I KI23, 2 K003, I KOI2 as follows:

+ + + +

B
C

OUTPUT

G
H

I
J
K

Producing functions with K Series logic takes some practice and ingenuity
on the part of the logic designer, but once mastered will save money and
time.
'
Some of the other functions available in the"KIOO series are
Binary_ to Octal Decoder
Equality and Digital Comparators
Rate Multiplier
The Binary to Octal Decoder (KI61) takes a 3 bit binary number and produces one out of eight lines high.
The fquality Comparator (K171) tells if two binary numbers are equal.
The Digital Comparator (KI74) tells which of two binary numbers is greater.
The Rate Multiplier (K184) multiplexes inputs of different frequency.

22

B.

MEMORY...;...I(2QO GROUP

K Series contains a full line of flip-flops, counters, shift

memory accessories.

reciStetS, and

In flip-flops, there are set reset types (K201, K206) and Data (K202) flipflops.
The K202 Data flip-flop looks as follows:

CLEAR

OUTPUT

OUTPUT
(INVERTED)

The 0 type flip-flop output goes to the state of the D input when the clock
input falls from high to low. Notice the built in gates with expansion inputs
on the clock and Data inputs. These allow simple input conditioning.
K Series has two counter modules. The K210 is a binary or BCD up counter
(4 bits). Using expansion gates, it can be connected to count anywhere
from 2 to 16.
BINARY/BCD

The K220 is a binary or BCD up/ down counter which can be parallel loaded.
With these two counters, virtually any counting function can be easily
implemented.
The K230 4 bit shift register can be used in many shifting applications. Like
the K220 counter, the K230 shift register can be parallel loaded.
DATA IN

23

DATA
LOAD

Several very useful memory accessories are the K271 and K273 retentive
memories. These modules contain mercury wetted relays which can follow
important data in a system, and retain' that data should a power failure occur.
The K273 for example contains 3 relays which can follow 3 bits of information. The retentive memories are an example, of the wide versatility of
K Series logic.
C. TIMING-K300 GROUP
The K300 series contains modules used for clocks, delays, and one-shots.
The K301, and K303 are delay modules with a range of 10 us to 30 seconds.

113

K003

To -OFF DELAY

The K303 contains 3 delays, and when 2 of these delays are connected in
the proper manner, they become a clock. The K323 is a oneshot, which
converts an input transition (Hi to Lo) to an output pulse from 10 us to 30
seconds. The K333 provides three pulser circuits which produce variable
output pulse widths.
The K300 series also contains a full compliment of timing component boards,
which bolt directly on the timing modures. These timing component boards
contain convenient controls for setting to exact time required.

TIMING

M)OULE

BLOCK
HSOO

D. EXTERNAL CONTROLS-K400 GROUP

The K400 series contains modules for controlling K Series systems from
switches, thumbwheels, Nixies and indicator lights. They are physically designed to be mounted using a K950 control panel.(optional) to provide a'
neat external control panel.
24

The modules in the K400 series are

K410 Indicator Lights
5 Indicator Lights

K415

Nixie Display

K420

Switches
3 switches with built in switch filters

K422

Thumbwheel Encoder
2 Thumbwheels (0-9) with circuitry to produce BCD outputs

K424

Thumbwheel Decoder
2 Thumbwheels with circuitry to detect any BCD digit.

K432

Timer Control
Various timing components to ~e useQ with K300 series
modules.

E. INPUT CONVERTERS-K500 GROUP

K500 series modules are used to convert various input signals to K Series
. logic levels.
'Some of these are as follows:

25

K501 Sch m itt trigger

This is used to change a sloppy wave shape to a good wave shape.

tVO~---~Off

INPUT

I
I
I

TIME

1 V________~__..._j.~

OUTPUT .._ _ _...

TIME

K522 and K524 Sensor Converters

The K522 and K524 are basically operational amplifiers (high gain) used to
convert resistance changes to logic levels. They can be used with variable
resistance devices such as photo'conductive cells.
K578 120 VAC Input Converter
This module is used to convert 120 VAC Inputs to logic levels.
The inputs to the converters are thru transformers which provide sufficient
reactive load to keep contacts clean.
K580 and K581 Dry Contact Filters
These filters are used with wiping type switches, and provide a voltage
divider t9 change a high DC voltage to K Series levels.

SWITCHl
OUTPUT
WITHOUT

r~~NTACT:

FILTERS ..._ _ _"--_ _ _ _

BO_U_N_C_E_ _....
-

SWITCHl

OUTPUT
WITH

FILTERS

TIME

~--~------------~.~TIME

F. OUTPUT CONVERTERS-K600 GROUP

The K600 series modules are used to convert logic levels to various voltages
used external to the logic system. Some of these are as follows:
K604 Isolated AC Switch
These are used to turn on and off AC devices such as solenoids, AC valves,
small motors, motor starters, from logiC levels. The K604 has 4 switches,
each of which can handle 200 volt-amperes. Other Isolated AC switches
(K614, K615) can handle up to 500 volt-amperes.
K644 DC Driver
The K644 is used as a switch to drive stepping motors, DC solenoids, and
similar devices rated up to 2.5 amperes at 48 volts. Other DC drivers are
available for up' to 4 amps or 250 volts. (K650, K652, K656, and K658).
26

K671 Dec i ill a I Decoder and Nixie Display

The K67.l contains a side viewing Burroughs type nixie ,glow tube, and a
decimal decoder. The glow tube is mounted at .the end of a 12 inch flexprint
cable for easy mounting. One type K771 power supply is needed for each 6
nixie displays.
G. POWER-K700 GROUP
Power is supplied to a K Series system by K Series power supply modules.
K730

Rectifier for 10vdc and approx. 16vdc and sensing logic for
5vdc
K731 Rectifier
Regulator tor 5vdc
K732 Slave Regulator
K741, K743 Power transformer

A K Series power supply is made up of a K731- and some number of K732,

and K741 or K743's depending on the current requirement of the system.
For example, 1 to 3 amp load requires 1 K731, 1 K732, 2 K741 or 1 K743.
H. MOUNTING HARDWARE
The hardware available for K Series is very convenient.
The basic system is built from HSOO sockets (8 slots per socket) mounted
on a K941 m,ounting bar, mounted on a K940 bracket, mounted on the equipment mounting panel. Also 19" rack assemblies are atailable with power
supply (16 sockets) or without power supply (64 sockets). Also module
drawers are available.
A complete line of tools is available for wire wrapping the system, along
with jumpers and bus strips.

27

\KI

GATE EXPANDERS
t

'--_______K_OO_3_,_K_Ol_2_,_KO_2_6_K_O_2_8_ _ _
NEMA

~~
MIL

I
I
I

1'

.E

I H

I
I

:P
M

I N
I P

I
I

~
T

ffi=b
ffiTI
1

M
N

K003

I V

L.

I U

FE.
. H

KOO3 AND expander: May be connected to the AND expansion node of any
K Series module.
NEMA

MIL
E

mw-

:=D

---

P
T"

J __

I M

__ _

p.. -

__ _

tS,003

:=b
1

V __

KOO3 AND/OR expander: May r,e connected to the OR expansion node of any
K Series module.

KOO3-$5
KO 12-$8
K026-$8

K028-$8
28

Mil

NEMA

K012
K012 OR expander: May be connected to the OR expansion node of any K
Series module.

Mil

NEMA

K026
K026 AND/OR expander: May be connected to the OR expansion node of any
K Series module.
29

NEMA

MIL

K028
K028 AND/OR expander: May be connected to the OR expansion node of any
K Series Gate.
These inexpensive gate expanders. offer great logic flexibility and versatility
without a proliferation of module types. Logic functions performed byexpanders are illustrated in combination with the K113 and K123 gates in several
pages that follow the data sheet for the gates themselves.
It 'must be clearly understood that the gate expanders above are merely expansions for other K Series gates and can never be used as separate AND or
OR functions.
Each K003 expander module has a .01 uf capacitor avaitable at pin B which
may be used to implement logic delays as shown in the Application notes or
to further reduce the speed of a K Series output.
Caution: Pin C on K028 expanders should not be' bussed to ground unless
function 8-C is not used.

30

II SE~ES I

CABLE CONNECTOR
KOSO

KOSO

FLEXPRINT
CABLE
CONNECTION

oA

oB

oC

00

oE

OF

oH

OJ

OK

OL

OM

ON

op

OR

oS

OT

ou

ov

"

The KOSO cable connector consists of a single height, single thickness board
on which can be mounted a 19 conductor fJexprint cable. Each module comes
with a cable clamp for customer convenience.

K080-$3
31

iKI

LOGIC GATES
'--_ _ _K_l_12_,_Kl_l_3_,K_l_22_,_K_12_3_,_Kl_2_4_ _----'

IL

NEMA

Kl12 and Kl13

INVERTING GATE

MIL

NEMA

Kl22 and Kl23

NON-INVERTING GATE

K112-$12
Kll~$11

K122-$13
K123-$12
K124-$14

32

NEMA

Mil

K124
AND/OR GATE
Together with the KOO3, K012, K026 or K028 expanders, these gates perform
any desired logic function, including AND, OR, AND/OR, NAND, NOR, exclusive OR, and wired AND.
logic gate type K123 is an AND/OR non-inverting gate subject to expansion
at either the AND or the OR node. logic symbols and equivalent schematics
are compared in the following illustrations. Typical pin connections are shown.
The AND input can be expanded up to 100 AND inputs total using pins E,l,
and S. Up to 9 OR expansion inputs can be connected to the OR expansion
pin (J,P, V). More OR expansion inputs can be added if faster fall times are
acceptable. Both AND and OR functions can be expanded at the same time.
Examples of gate expansion are shown in following pages.
Expansion of the K113 inverting gate is identical. The equivalent circuit is
the same except for inversion in the output amplifier.
The K124 provides a convenient way to imptement noninverting gate control
flip-flops, exctusive ORs, and two term OR logic equations without the need
for expanders. The module is electrically the same as a K123 gate with a
K003 expander.
Of the three circuits on each module only one has a slowdown capacitor

that c.-n be connected to the output to increase noise rejection when the
gates are interconnected to make control flip-flops. Use of this capacitor increases rise and fall time by approximately a factor of 20. The maximum
speed of each unslowed gate is 100KHz and the maximum speed of a slowed
.gat~i is 5KHz.

33

The K112 and K122 modules are logically identical to the K113 and K123
respectively. They feature maximum speeds of 1KHz with a single connection
on one circuit for slowdown to 50 Hz. This added slowdown feature gives
these two modules an even greater level of noise immunity.

34

 SLO~DOWN AND DELAY

To show the effects of slowdown and delay-connections on K-Series outputs,
suppose a pulse entered a K123 Non-Inverting Gate: the following outputs
would be reaHzed.

INPUT---~

CONNECT

FOR

SLOWDOWN

J CONNECT .01~ f
FOR DELAY

'J

CONNECT

FOR
SLOWDOWN

J
\

CONNECT .01~ f

T FOR DELAY

Time shown above are typical values and should not be considered exact.
Delay times are increased by 10",5 for each .01",f capacitor connected to
pin J.

\.

35

SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC

LOGIC SYMBOL

r-----------,
NEMA

+v

F ,

K123 I
I

HI

,..-._......:1_0
I

ID

. OR
EXPANSION

INPUT

MIL

L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ...l

BASIC GATE

F; - - - - - -;oo,l
+v

:~ ----A.- -j

NEMA
o

r - - -

HI

MIL

ID
I

L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

...l

K003 AND EXPANSION

Fr

- - - - - - - -

~K;;3""

+v

HI

NEMA

_ _-....:.,_8
0

10'
H

L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ...l

r - - - - - - - F I

MIL

~003'

+v

HI

L _ _

_____ J

o
K003 OR EXPANSION

36

LOGIC SYMBOL

SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC
E

r - - - -------...,
1 -1O--+--A,/\/Y-o-F.....

+v

K 123 I

HI

I
,8
I

10

NEMA

1
I

L __

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ .J

r--- -------...,
I
F,

+V

K003 I

HI

L __________ ..J
F
H - -___~

. F; - _E_ - _je: -- -;0031

MIL
H

::; :1

.f

+V

L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ...J

F
H

K003 AND/OR EXPANSION

(K026 MAY ALSO BE USED)
E

r-----------,
+v

F,

HI

K123

I
I
,8 0

F
H

NEMA

o
I

L _______ . ___ .J

E
F
~j

r----------:-,

0,

KO'2 I

,
F--~-"'"

H ----,~_._~

MIL

I +1/
FI

I +V

HI

F
H

1+1/
L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .J

K012 OR 'EXPANSION

37

The basic types of logic functions obtainable by expansion are shown below
for the K123 non-inverting gate. Logic functions for the expanded K113 inverting gate are identical except for inversion of the output. Letters refer to logic
signal names rather than module pin numbers.

A~

B~AB
~

AB+CD+EF

BASIC NON . INVERTING GATE

I UP TO 9
Olt ElCPANSIOIU

ABcDEFGH

0
E

....- - -..... -

F
G
H

I UP TO 100 INPUTS

OR EXPANSION

LOGIC FUNCTIONS WITH GATE EXPANSION

/

~8

UP TO 100 AND
INPUTS

UP TO tOO
AND INPUTS
I
I

A
B
C---,,_~------,

o
E
F

G
(ABCOEfGH..... )+
(IJ~.... .).

(RSTUVWXYl. ... )+

t .................. .)+

o
P-"""""1L . ~---'
UP TO~OO
ANOINPUTS

I
I

UP TO 9 .
OR EXPANSIONS

w
X
Y ~--''---_--''

1otoo

UP
AND INPUTS

39

NAND, NOR, EXCLUSIVE OR

The Kl13 inverting gate performs the NAND function directly, and performs
the NOR function when combined with a K003 expander.
With proper input connections, the K124 non-inverting gate performs the
exclusive OR function.

AB-o-B

113

K113.

AS

8
0

AS

0
0

NAND FUNCTION OF BASIC INVERTING GATE

A

A+8

UNtJSEO INPUTS
ACT AS ONES

'R

0
0

NOR FUNCTION OF BASIC INVERTING GATE

WITH EXPANDER

A<!)B

EXCLUSIVE OR CONNECTION OF BASIC

NON-INVERTING GATE WITH EXPANDER

40

WIRED AND
Wired AND functions can be obtained by connecting K123 outputs to -other
K124, K123 or K113 outputs as shown below. Any K Series output with a
fanout of 15 may be wired ANDed.

A8(CO+EF)

A8(C5'+EF)

WIRED AND EXAMPLES

SUMMARY Of GATE-EXPANDER
LOGIC COMBINATIONS

FOR ZERO VOLTS DEFINED AS

lOGIC ZERO
standard definition

FOR ZERO VOLTS DEFINED AS

LOGIC ONE
(inverted definition)

No.

of
lo~e
Fune on Inputs

AND

OR

Expanders

2
none
35 1/3 KOO3
6-8 2/3 KOO3
2

1/3 KOO3

No.
logic
of
Function Inputs

Gates

AND

1/3 K123
1/3 K123
1/3 K123
1/3 K123

or

Expanders

Gates

1/3 KOO3 1/3

or
69 1/3 K012
1/3
none
1/3 K012 1/3
2/3 K012 '1/3
2
35

K123
K124
K123
K123

1/3 K012
none
35 1/3 K012
69 2/3 K012

1/3 K124
1/3 K123
1/3 K123

OR

2
35

none
1/3 KOO3
6-8 2/3 KOO3

1/3 K123
1/3 K123
1/3 K123

NAND

none
2
35 1/3 KOO3
68 2/3 KOO3

1/3 K1l3
1/3 K113
1/3 K113

NAND

1/3 K113

NOR

1/3 KOO3
or
1/3 K012
35 1/3 K(H2
69 2/3 K012

1/3 K113

2 1/3 KOO3
or
3-5
6-9 1/3 K012
1/3 K012
2/3 K012

1/3 K113
1/3 K113

none
2
3-5 1/3 KOO3
6-8 2/3 KOO3

1/3 K113
1/3 K113
1/3 K113

NOR
1/3 K113
1/3 K113
41

CONTROL FLlpFLOP FROM GATES

Control flip-flops can be formed by the interconnection of gates as shown

below. For applications in systems where speeds are below 5KHz or where
noisy environments exist, these flip-flops should always be slowed. When
these control flipflops are slowed, any gate output wire ANDED to them
should also be slowed.

........--+- I OUTPUT

t 0lm'UT~

SET A

SET B

SET A

SET B

NONINVERTING GATE CONTROL FlIPFlOP

The output of the flipf1op above is set to a ONE when the two SET inputs
are both ONEs. A ZERO at the RESET input returns the output to ZERO,
provided at least one of the SET inputs is also ZERO.

I-----=-"I.....:~

0 OUTPUT

* USE SLOWOOWN
CONNECTION IN

FI..IP - FLOPS IF
SPEED PERMITS

INVERTING GATE CONTROL FlIPFlOP

The flipflop above, made from two inverting gates, provides complementary
1 and 0 outputs. A truth table is shown below.
TRUTH TABLE
1 OUTPUT

o OUTPUT

SET

RESET

0
0

1
NO CHANGE

42

11K!

~NVERTERS

/""'-_ _ _ _ _
Kl_34_ _ _ _---'

MIL

NEMA

o
N ...--_.

t-----t

R r - -......

~-+---I

T r - -......

t---+--t

K134 INVERTERS
Four flip-flop functional modules such as K210, K220, K230 can conveniently
be augmented by a K134 to get "0" as well as "1" outputs. The KI34 is
also provided with expansion and inhibit inputs for use 8S the readout element of ready-only memories using K281 diode memories (See Applications
Notes). A common input at pin K can force all four outputs high, a helpful
feature for building large K281 memories or very large K161 decoders.
Kl34 inverters may also be AND expanded by K003 gate expanders, providing an efficient way to obtain 4-input NAND or inverted NOR gates.

Kl34-$13.

43

I~

INVERTERS

'---_ _ _ _ _K_l_35_ _ _ _ _......

NEMA

I;

MIL

K135 INVERTERS
The K135 module was designed primarily for use in applications that require
inverters with "OR" expandability. A common input at pin K can force all
four outputs high regardless of the "OR" gate inputs. This feature is useful
if a K161 decoder is used for multiplexing K135 modules, since all outputs
for the same bit can be wire "AND"ed together.
The loading on pin K is initially 6 with no "OR" expansions and increases by
"I" unit load for each "OR" input that is added to the module. For example,
if a K012 expander was added to each of the four inverters, the total pin K.
load would be 22 unit loads.
"KOO3 expanders can be used for AND/OR expandability. The number of AND
inputs on a given OR input does not affect the loading of ,pin K.

K135-$13

44

II S~ES I

INVERTERS
K138

NEMA

MIL

~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~

~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
2

15

t5

The K138 has eight inverter circuits on each module. These

used to invert other K Series outputs to obtain both a high
well as a low (ov) level. The K138 is pin compatable with
K135 and m8 be substituted for. them if a higher density
desired.

t5

circuits can be
(+5V) level as
the Kl34 and
of inverters is

Kl38-$24
45

BINARY TO OCTAL DECODER

K161

CONN.ECT TO SLOW
DOWN ZERO OUTPUT

I /

B
0

3
2
4
4

5
6
INH

I SE~ES I

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

K161 DECODER
Three-bit binary numbers at the input to the K161 will be decoded into eight
one-at-a-time outputs. Both inputs and outputs are high for assertion. The
inhibit input allows BCD to ten line decoders to be built, or permits several
decoders to be interconnected for sixteen, twenty-four, thirty-two outputs, etc.
The inhibit may be left open if unused, even though high is the inhibit state.
When the K161 is being used with M series, all input signals must be buffered
with K series gates. ",:his is necessary due to the 3 volt thresholds in the KI61.
Standard K Series slowdown circuits on each output minimize and for most
purposes nullify the splinter pulses that all decoders emit during input transitions. Additional slowdown available on the zero output can usually suppress
the larger splinter that may occur there. But since splinter size is ultimately
determined by input timing tolerances, it is cleanest to avoid logic designs in
which a decoder output is used as a source of pulses.
The diagrams below show how to connect decoders for 8, 10, 16 and 32 outputs. Much larger decoders are possible, and in fact up to 256 outputs or
even more can be obtained by inhibiting all but one of several decoders.

K161-$25
46

8 STATE DECODER

6- 5

BINARY-COOED-DECIMAL (BCD) DECODER

1~ 14

13 12 11 10

16 STATE DECODER
47

!5

:3

2
M

4
5
6

7
8

'6

10
M

11

12
13

14
U

15
16
17
18

f9

20

21
22

23

24

16

25
26
M

P
S

27
28
29
30,

32 STATE DECODER
48

31

EQUALITY COMPARATOR
""--'_ _ _ _ _ _
K_17_1_ _ _ _ _----'

~
MIL

NEMA

oJ

The K171 is a four bit equality comparator whose output at pin J is high if
the two numbers being compared are equal. Pins N, R, T, and V are compared
with pins M, P, S, and U. The output, Pin J, has no drive capability and must
be connected to the AND expansion node of either a Kl13 or K123 logic gate.
More than 4 bits can be compared using any number of K171 's, by tying all
K171, pin J, outputs together at the same AND expansion node.

K210

This module- can be used. in conjunction with the K174 to obtain the three
independent outputs for greater-than, less-than, and equal-to.
K171~$13

49

DIGITAL COMPARATOR
""--_ _ _ _ _ _
K_17_4_ _ _ _ _- - '

NEMA

OUTPUT TO
COMPARATORS
OF GREATER
SIGNIFICANCE
OR TO K113 OR
K123"OR"
EXPANSION NODE

INPUT FROM
COMPARATORS
OF LESSER
SIGNIFICANCE
OR FROM K003
MIL

OUTPUTS TO
COMPARATORS
OF GREATER
SIGNIFICANCE
OR TO K113 OR
K123 "OR"
EXPANSION NODE

J
INPUT FROM
COMPARATORS
OF LESSER
SIGNIFICANCE
OR FROM K003

K174 DIGITAL

C~PARATOR

Numerical comparisons such as those required in digital positioning controls

are faCilitated by the K174. Performing the same function as the comparator
in closed-loop analog systems, the K174 tells which of two quantities is
larger.
Fundamentally, the K174 performs a subtra~ion to determine whether a
"borrow" would be needed to obtain a positive result. The magnitude of the
difference is not available; only the sign.
Note in the example below that the output on pin K will be low only if the
magnitude of the number in the K210's is less than the! thumt>wheels.
If more than four bi.ts are to be compared, several compara~ors may be
cascaded as shown below. Note use of K003 as if expanding an "OR" to
control the state of the output for the case of equal input numbers.

be

The output at Pin K would normally

low for equality without the K003
connected to Pin J, but with it connected, Pin K is high for equality as shown
below.
K174-$24

50

TWO DIGIT COMPARISON OF THUMBWHEELS AGAINST K210, ETC .

..-Jo.;....~--.I..:..;,...~~_ _ _ _~~-'=-...J.;~.D:..

THUMBWHEEL
SWITCH

THUMBWHEEL
SWITCH

WITHOUT

:6~~1PUT
LOW FOR

EQUALITY

If the numbers being compared are not multiples of 4 bits then one of the
inputs on each unused comparitor position must be connected to +5 and
the other one to the ground.
The K174 can also be used to obtain three independent outputs for fUll
greater-than, equal-to, less-than capability. The application below takes advantage of the fact that if A is equal to B, K will go high if J goes high and
K will go low if J goes low.

A<8---A-------------------~

A>B------------------------------------------~

In certain applications, it is possible to make a single K174 oscillate if A=8.

This is done by inverting the output at pin K and feeding it back to pin J.

51

IrKl

RATE MULTIPLIER
' -_ _ _ _ _K_l_84_ _ _ _ _
NEMA

~~

MIL

The K184 Rate Multiplier is basically a frequency multiplexer, although it

has been used in several other applications. Pulse inputs of specific frequencies are wired to the FF inputs and a four bit binary fraction is presented
in re,llerse order to the corresponding G inputs of the K184. Both sets of
inputs produce an output pulse train which is a multiplexed combination of
the pulse inputs provided. Each transition from "0" to "I" at an FF input
produces a 51-1 sec output pulse to ground if the corresponding G input has
been high for 51-! sec or more.
Inputs are not rise-time sensitive and outputs from several rate multipliers
may be combined to give any desired preCision, pulse widths may be increased by connecting additional capacitors to pin J of the KI84. Resistors
must not be connected to this point.
Rate multipliers are primarily useful in numerical control applications, such
as those described in the following magazine articles:

"linear Interpolation" Control Engineering, June '64 p. 79

"Curvilinear Interpolation" Control Engineering, April '68, p. 81
"Many Digital Functions Can Be Generated With A Rate Multiplier" Electronic
Design, Feb. 1, '68, p. 82.
In addition, the KI84 can provide several other useful functions that take
advantage of its internal complexities, shown below. Examples of both classes
of use can be found among the applications notes.

. Kl84-$25
52

~see

PULSER
ADO 3600pf
PER EXTRA
5 Jlsec PULSE WIDTH
DESIRED

J
- 1_

".r.'

~:-

PL-003S

LOGICAL EQUIVALENT OF KI84 RATE MULTIPLIER

The following is an example of how the KI84 operates using a K2IO counter
as a pulses input source.
The pin N output of a K2I0 will make a low to high transition for every other
clock pulse the counter input makes. This means that its frequency will be
~ that of the count input f,. The pin R output of the K2I0 pulses once for
every four count inputs, giving it a frequency of Y.t the count input f,. The
pin T and V frequencies are Ys and K6 of the count input frequency f,.

10

11

12

13

14

15

f,

PIN N

-,
_ PIN R

L
L

PIN T

PIN V.

K2I0 BINARYCLOCK COUNTER OUTPUTS GENERATED BY f,

53

If these K210 outputs are connected to a Kl84 as shown below, the frequency of the output of that Kl84, Pin 0, can be programmed by selecting
which G inputs will be high.

r - - -.......-~t---....--Q+V

SWITCH SUPPLY

SET BINARY FRACTION, F

(0000 ... 11 to

AVERAGE,
OUTPUT
FREOUENCY

to = f,

xF

INPUT
PULSE
FREOUENCY
f,
.

If just pin' U is high then the output frequency fo of the Kl84 will be Y2 that
of the K210 count input f,. If pins U a.nd S of the Kl84 are high then the
output frequency fa will be ~ (1'2
% ~) that of the K210 count input f,.
The maximum frequency output fo of a single Kl84 is 1~, (1'2
~
Va Ji',
IX,) that of the K210 counter input. This maximum frequency occures when
all Ginputs of the Kl84 are high (Pins U;S,P,M).

+ =

54

+ + +

IIKl

FLIPFLOP

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _K_2_01_ _ _ _ _......

MIL

NEMA

This superslow memory simplifies sequencing of machine motions, and finds.

other applications where the ultimate in noise isolation is needed and speed
is no problem. ~Its 1 KHz maximum repetition rate makes this flip-flop noticeably more resistant to extremely noisy surroundings than faster types like
K202, K210, etc. So noise immune, in fact, that several yards of wire may be
connected to K201 outputs even in severely noisy areas without errors.
The K201 flip-flop input gating is designed to respond to the time sequence of
two inputs rather than to their simple AND function. Level inputs E, H, M, and
P must be high at least 400 ~s before the pulse inputs D, F, L, and N- make
a high to low transition. The flip-flop will compliment if the Sand R inputs are
pulsed at the same time. The input minimum noise rejecting time thresholds
are 100 ~s. Successive input transitions must not be closer than 400 ~s.
Grounding pin J causes pins T and V to go high and pins Sand U to go low,
regardless of the state of any other input except clear inputs.
Each flip-flop circuit on this module has. a separate clear input (pin K and
R). If either of these inputs is grounded the ZERO output of that specific
flip-flop will go high and the ONE output will go low unless the set input is
grounded.
There is also a common clear, Pin B, which when grounded, forces pins S
and U high and pins T and V low, except when pin J is grounded.
If any clear input and the SET input pin J are grounded at the same time,
the outputs will be undefined.
.
K201-$39

55

IIKl

FLIPFLOP

......_ _ _ _ _K_2_02_'_ _ _ _----'

NEMA

~
Mil

CLOCK

CLOCK

CLEAR

K202 flip-flops do shifting, complementing, counting, and other functions

beyond the capabilities of simple set-reset flip-flops built up from logic gates.
They also may be used to extend K210 counters or K230 shift registers.
When the output of the clock gate falls from high to low, the information at
the OR input (pins O-J, loP) is transferred into the flip-flop. Pin J (or P) is
ORed with the pin 0 (or l) input. Like pins J and P of a logic gate, these pins
can be driven' only from a KOO3, K012, K028, or K026 expander.
Time is required for flip-flops and delayed inputs to adjust to new signals.
The clock gate output must not fall to zero s,ooner than 4 jA.sec after its own
rise, the end of a clear signal, or a change on associated data input pins.
A K202 flip-flop is cleared by grounding the clear input pin. The flip-flop is
held in the zero state as long as the clear input is zero volts, regardless of
other inputs.
When using a K202 flip-flop to extend the length of a K230 shift register,
pins B on both modules must be left open (unslowed). Pin B slows the clock
hiputs of the K202 for complementing correctly at slow speeds in very noisy
surroundings; but the data inputs are not affected by pin B.

K202-$27

56

Complementinc: Below is shown a complementing application. Here th.e information stored at the data input is the opposite of the flip-flop'S present
state. Each time the clock gate output changes from "1" to "0". the opposite of the current state is read in.
COMPLEMENTING PULSES

I
I

I
I

~
OUTPUT

I
---1

~_:----iL

K202 COMPLEMENTING

Shift Register: The diagram below shows two flip-flops connected as a twostage shift register. At each step the incoming signal, whether high or .ow, is
set into the first stage of the register, and' the original content of the first
stage is set into the sec,ond stage. The input to each flip-flop must be stable
for at least 4 microseconds before another shift pulse occurs, for reliable
shifting.
SHIFT PULSES

I
I

L
K202 2-STAGE SHIFT REGISTER
Note: In older systems of logic, most flip-flop functions had to be performed
by ge.neral-purpose flip-flops like the K202. The K Series, however. includes
functional types K210, K211, K220, and K230 which are both less expensive
and easier to use than the K202 for most applications. Think of the K202 pri- .
marily as a complementing control flip-flop and register extender.

57

IKI

FLlpFLOP REGISTER
_ _ _ _ _ _K_2_06_ _ _ _ _ _

NEMA

8 READIN
ENABLE

K206 FLIP-FLOP REGISTER

Mil

REAOIN

ENABLE

K206 FLIP-FLOP REGISTER

The four set-reset flip-flops in the K206 are arranged for convenient addressing from the. outputs of a KI61 Binary to Octal Decoder. The flip-flop outputs can then be wired to control and maintain the state of corresponding
output drivers, providing addressable output conditioning from teletypes,
computers, or fixed-memory sequence controllers.
In addition, the same decoder may be used to address a particular K578
input sampler by grounding the K206 enable input when flip-flop changes
are not desired. Pin E enable fanin on the K206 is reduced to 2 milliamperes
when K161 addressing is used.
Since most control systems have about half as many digital outputs as inputs,
it is convenient to use the least significant bit of the K161 address to determine which flip-flop state is wanted. Odd addresses allow for setting; even
addresses, resetting. All flip-flops may be reset together by grounding the
clear input, pin K. This clear input takes precedence over all other inputs.
When pin E is high, a logic "I" at an S input will set the output to a logiC "1"
and a logic "1" at an R input will reset the output to a logic "0." Sand R
tnputs should not be allowed to go high at the same time while the flip-flop is
enabled _ _ Anyone or all flip-flops may be changed when pin E is high.

K206-$20

58

11K!

COUNTER

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _K2_10_ _ _ _ _-...I

NEMA

_-----f

COUNT
3

MIL

COUNT
PL-0235

The K210 is a binary or BCD counter that can be wired to return to zero after
any number of input cycles from 2 to 16. Count-up occurs when the COUNT
gate output steps to zero. Decimal counting logic is built in; when pin D is unused, the counter resets to zero on the next count after nine. When pin D is
grounded, the counter overflows to zero, after a count of 15. (Pin D is not
intended for dynamiC switching between binary and BCD counting.)
The counter is reset by grounding the clear input for 4 microseconds or more.
A positive level at the J input from a KOO3 expander also resets the counter
on the next high to low transition of the COUNT gate output. Counts of 10 or
16 DO NOT require the use of a KOO3 expander since they can be obtained
with pin D.
Wire the KOO3 as a decoder to detect one count less than the desired modulus. (Detect 5 for a countof-6 counter, etc.). Use the K424 Thumbwheef
Decoder if manual reset control is desired.

K210-$27
59

COUNT

, 0'

DETECTS

COUNT OF 5

+6 ...- - - - K210 CONNECTED FOR COUNT OF 6

To count .above 10, around pin D. Combine two Ko03 expanders as Ihown
below, where three counter outputs must be lenled (to divide by 8, 12, 14
or 15).

INPUT
~t5

OUTPUT

K210 CONNECTED

FOR COUNT OF 15

Time is required for flipflops and pin J reset logic to adjust to new inputs.
The count ,ate output must not step to zero sooner than 4.0 t'S8C after its
own rise, a change at pin J, or the end of a clearing sianal at pin K. When pin
8 II sroundedfor Ilowdown, allow 50 t'MC.
Larger counters are obtained by caseadin, K210'I or addin, K202 flipflops.
To cascade K210 modules, wire the most significant output of one counter
to the input gate of the next. Inputl to the least significant stale can be
either pulses or logic transitions to ground; risetime is not important.
Any transducer such as a switch, photocell, pulse tachometer, thermistor
probe, or other compatible with K508, K522 or K524 input converters can

60

I.n.rate the silnal which is to be counted. The lack of Input risetime restrictions may allow transducer outputs to drive K210 counters directly if damaging transients can be avoided, as when the transducer shares the Ioaic
system environment.
For visual readout of binary-coded decimal counters, the four outputs from
each K210 may be connected to corresponding input pins on a K671 decodin,
driver an~ display_

INPUT

K210 AUGMENTED WITH K202 FOR COUNT OF 32

61

IKI

PROGRAMABlE DIVIDER
________
K_21_1_ _ _ _ _- - '

NEMA

SLOW

.E

8_-----_

..----....

COUNT
L

MIL

The K211 is a binary counter that can be wired to produce a high to low..
output transition on pin V after any number of input cycles from 2 to 16.
Countup occurs on the high to low transition of the count gate output.
The counter is programmed by connecting pin L to pins M,P,S, and U to
select the binary number that is one count less than the desired modulus.
(Detect 2 for a count-ot-3 counter, etc).

COUNT
GATE

OUTPUT
PIN V

OUTPUT
Modulo 3 counter
rin L is connected to pin P only.

K211-$20
62

The counter is reset by grounding pin K for 4 microseconds or more.

Time is required for flip-flops to adjust to new inputs. The count gate output
must not step to zero sooner than 4.0 JA.sec after its own rise or at the end
of a clearing signal at pin K. When pin B is grounded for slowdown, allow
SO JA.sec.
Larger dividers can be obtained by cascading K210's, K211's or adding K202
flip-flops. To cascade K211 modules, wire pin V to the input gate of the next
module. Inputs to the least significant stage can be either pulses or logic
transitions to ground; risetime is not important. Any transducer such as a
switch, photocell, pulse tachometer, thermistor probe, or others compatible
with KS08, KS22, or I<S24 input converters can generate the signal which is
to be counted. The lack of .input risetime restrictions may allow transducer
outputs to drive K211 modules diretly if damaging transients can be avoided,
as when the transducer shares the logic system en ,ironment.
K211 modules can be used to build real time clocks and frequency dividers
when only the most significant output is required.

I HR.

10M....

I MIN.

IOSC

ISC.

.1 SEC.

REAL- TIME CLOCK

63

1Il10 SEC.

IIKl

UP/DOWN COUNTER_

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _K_22_0_ _ _ _ _ _ _

NEMA
READ

ONES

MIL

READ

ONES
3

(DOUBLE HEIGHT BOARD)

The K220 Counter module provides all the circuitry necessary for binary
and binary coded decimal up counting, down counting, presetting and clearing. This module is useful in many digital position readout and feedback
applications.
K220-$55

64

The K220 is a double height module with all but two pin connections made
on the upper connector (pins 0 and E on the lower connector must be
grounded for binary UP/DOWN counting).
The direction of counting is established by the signal at pin L, high for up
counting and low for down counting. Pin L count direction changes should
finish no later than 4.0 J,A.sec. before the next count input. Up counts occur
when the count (AND) gate output makes a transition from high to low
(+5v to Ov). Down counts take place on the count gates output transition
from low to high (Ov to 5v).
To preset the outputs of a K220, four read-in flip-flops with a common
enable have been provided in the circuit. High logic levels (+5v) present
at the read-in gate pins (U,S,P, or M) are read into their respective flip-flops
when the common enable pin 0, makes a low to high transition (Ov to 5v).
These preset flip-flops will not read low levels (Ov) into the K220. All unused
read-in gate inputs should be grounded to prevent the read-in of undesired
ONE's.
The K220 outputs can be cleared to zero by grounding pin J or K. During
this clearing process, no count or preset input can be read into the module;
clearing inputs take precedence over all others.
With the exception of the clear inputs, time is required for flip-flops, counting
logic, and read-in gates to adjust to new inputs. To prevent counting errors,
neither the count gate output nor any other counter input should change
within 4.0 microseconds of a transition at any other input.
For slowdown operation, pin B of the K220 must be grounded. If slowdown
is used, 50 microseconds must be allowed between one counter input transition and an input transition at any other input.
When K220 counters are cascaded, a single connection from pin V of one
K220 to the count input gate of the next, establishes both carry and borrow
propagation.

TO
NEXT STAGE

UP.+5V

ONOV

TO NEXT
STAGE

Shown below is a means of acception up and down pulse-trains from two

separate sources. For this application, input pulse spacing should be at least
20 microseconds and input pulse widths should beat least 10 microseconds.

65

UP~

DOWN~

NE~~[

STAGE

---_

.......

UPI DOW~ COUNTER

FOR SEPARATE PULSE SOURCES TO 50Kc
The "clear" and "read ones" inputs on the K220 module may be combined
to transfer completely new data into the module j'n a single operation. Timing
requirements in the K220 demand that a low to high transition on the
"read ones" (PIN BY input wait until at least 4 microseconds after the clear
input rises. A simple method of~accomplishing this delay follows.

This circuit gives approximately 10 microseconds of rise delay. The delay

may be reduced to about 5 micro.seconds if desire~, by connection another
one milliampere pull-up (pin 0 to pin E on the K003).

66

Several "read ones" inputs may be driven from a single K003 section, provided the capacitance ;s multiplied by the number of inputs driven. Heavy
capactive( loading may cause slow fal/times on the transfer input line. Pin
inputs on the K220 may be regarded as 1 milliampere loads in this
application.
The transfer input rise time must be from an unslowed K Series output.
Slow signals from K580, K581 or K578 modules must be accelerated by a
K501. Schmitt Trigger.

K220 UPi DOWN COUNTER

67

SHIFT REGISTER
' - -_ _ _ _ _
K2_30_ _ _ _ _

11K!

~~

NEMA

CONNCT FOR
SLOWDOWN

CUf ,
9

,t---~

MIL

(DOUBLE HEIGHT BOARD)

Information presented at pin L of this four stage flip-flop reSister is shifted

toward pin V with each high to low transition (5v to Ov) at the shift input gate_
To preset the outputs of a K230, four read-in flip-flops with a common enable
have been provided in the circuit. High logic levels (+5v) present at the
read-in gate pins (U,S,P, or M) are read into their respective flip-flops when
the common enable pin D, makes a low to high transition (Ov to 5v). These
preset flip-flops will not read low logic levels (Ov) into the K230. All unused
read-in gate inputs should be grounded to prevent the read-in of undesired
ONE's.
K23o-$40

68

TheK230 outputs can be cleared to zero by grounding ,pin J or K. Durinl

this clearing process, no count or preset input can be read into the module;
clearing inputs take precedence over al\ others.
Shift registers of any length can be formed by tying pin V of one K230 to pin
L of the next, and operating all shift gates together. Supply all shift pulses
from the same device to maintain synchronism. The propagation delay of even
one gate is too large a difference between two shift inputs on the same
register. For every 20 bits that are required, duplicate the last stage of the
shift-generating logic and tie the outputs in paralfel to aI/ K230 shift gate
inputs.
Time is required for flip-flops, shifting logic, or read-in gates to adjust to new
inputs. Except clear inputs, neither the shift gate output nor any other regiSter input may be changed within 4J.1.sec. after a transition at any other input.
When pin B is grounded for slowdown, allow 50 J.l.sec.

69

SET-RESET RETENTIVE MEMORY

r--KI

~_ _ _ _ _ _K_27_1_ _ _ _ _ _ ~
NEMA
CONNECT FOR
SLOWDOWN

~~~____~orR----~5

MIL

DOUBLE THICKNESS

The K271 is a magnetically latched mercury wetted contact relay flip-flop

A logic one output from the SET gate will set the flip-flop. and a logic one
output from the RESET gate will reset the flip-flop. The state of the memory

K271-$40
70

will be -unknown if ttle SET and RESET ,ate outputs are both lo,ic one at
the same time. Since time is required for the relay to chan,e state, inputs
must be high for at least five milliseconds.
Pin K must be held low or the memory can not be set or reset. Normally, the
OK level output from a K731 or K730 source module drives pin K. When a
line voltage failure is detected, pin K rises and the relay mechanically stores
the last valid data until full power returns. Logic design must be provided
for pin K to ensure that it remains high after power is restored until the system has returned to its proper state.
The maximum angle from the vertical, shock, and vibration specifications
for the bistable mercury wetted contact relay are as follows:
SHOCK:

30 G's for 11 1 milliseconds du.ration

VIBRATION:

0.6" Double Amplitude or 10 G's peak acceleratioh,

whichever is less, 10-500 Hz.

Maximum angle from vertical of 30.

71

RETENTIVE MEMORY

IrKI

K273
L...-_ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

NEMA

(DOUBLE THICICNESS MODULE)

Mil

MEM

MEM

DOUBLE THICKNESS

Three magnetically latched mercury wetted contact relays in the K273 follow
logic-level input information at rates up to 100 Hz, when pin E is grounded.
Normally the OK level outputs from either a K730 or a K731 source module
drive pin E. When a line voltage failure is detected, pin E rises and each relay

K273-$85
72

mechanically stores the last valid input data until full power returns. Logic
design must,be provided for pin E to ensure it will remain high after power
is restored until the system has been returned to its proper state.
The maximum angle from the vertical for which the K273 will operate properly is 30. Shock and vibration specifications for the bistable mercury
wetted contact relays are as follows:
SHOCK:

30 G's for 11 1 milliseconds duration

VIBRATION:

0.06" Double Amplitude or 10 G's peak acceleration,

whichever is less, 10500 Hz

73

I
~I

IIKl

FIXED MEMORY

K2_81_ _ _ _---...

_ _ _ _ _

, . . - -__ E

K281 FIXED MEMORY

The K281 is designed to be used with the K161 (Binary to Octal Decoder).
the K681 (8-30 rna drivers) and the KI34 (4 inverters). to build a read-only
memory. Each K281 initially contains eight four-bit words conSisting of only
"ls". The user selects the codes he desires by cutting out diodes in the bit
positions that are to be "0'5". Additionaf K281 and KI34 modules may be
added to the system to generate more words and longer words. See Applica
tion Notes for diagram of memory configuration.

K281-$10

74

CODING THE 1<281 DIODE MEMORY

When the K281 is used to build a K Series Read Only Memory, the codes are
stored by cutting out diodes where zeros are desired. The diode map below
shows the physical location of the diodes on the K281 and how they are con
nected to the module pins.

EHKM

Nllli
vllli
Rllli
Tllli
EHKM

EHKM

EHKM

MKHE

illiD
illiL
illiF
illiJ
MKHE

MKHE

E, H, K, Mar. the 'our

output pins.

D,F,J,L,N.R.T,V. are
the .iQht drive lines.

MKHE

Component side

75

DIODE MEMORY

I\Kl

~_ _ _ _ _K2_8_2_ _ _ _- . . ~

DIODE
MATRIX

K282

The K282 is a diode matrix module which initially contains eilht, labit
words. This matrix was designed to be used with K134 modules to obtain
read-only memories. The user selects the codes he desires by cutting out
diodes in the bit positions. More bits may be added by using additional
K281 or k282 modules.

K282-$40
76

IIKl

BASIC TIMER

""---_ _ _ _ _K_30_1_ _ _ _ _.......

NEMA

~I(1-,
----,

L-....~ ___ ~

?
MIL

The K301 Basic Timer can be used as an OFF DELAY (like the K303), ON
DELAY or ONE SHOT (like the K323). Time delays from ten microseconds to
30 seconds can be obtained with either fixed or adjustable delays. Calibrated
controls are available (K374. K376 and 1(378) for mounting directly on the
K301. Remote controls can be added if desired. Mounting holes are provided
on the module for different size timing capacitors and a trimpot or fixed
resistor.
The output delay is controlled by the value of Rand C connected to pin J.
The timer recovery begins when either pin M or N is low or both F and Hare

1<301-$15
77

high. Allow a recovery time cif at least 3DDC (C in farads), in order to guarantee 95% repeat accuracy in timing. The timer delay period is equal to .7 RC.
Any value of C may be used as Iong as R remains between 1 K and 250 K
ohms. The following diagrams demonstrate how the K301 may be used to
provide different types of timing. Pins P and C must be connected together
to form the one shot circuit.

j..-

RECOIIERY TIME.I

~L
!-- =fl. . ____
07RC

u
R
(4.7K TO

250kl

OFF DELAY (like K(03)

_---.J,

~E~------. --,"""=,7 RC --J......

D
CONNECT PINS P

AND S TO FORM
ONE SHOT

ONE SHOT (like K323)

, A positive pulse at the input will not terminate the time out if the inverted
output is connected to one input of the one shot. Pins M and N should be
left open.

78

+-----u,
:,
II

!
I

ON DELAY -

K301

The K301 circuit IS srmilar to the K303 Timer and uses the same techniques
of noise rejection. For further information on resistors, capacttors and con
struction recommendations for external pulse width controls, please refer to
the K303 module and K371K378 timer controls.

K301 TIMER

79

I. . _____T~_~O_~R

II

_ _ _ _ _......

NEMA

SE:'ES

MIL

.,

,-

~----I"'----.

,,

I"

- --....,<I..<I--..--~

ff

K303 timers provide time delays from 10 microseconds to 30 seconds and

can be i"nterconnected to form clocks with periods covering the same intervals. Fixed or adjustable delays and frequencies are obtainable. Calibrated
controls-are available (K371 through K378) for mounting directly on the
K303. Remote controls can be added, if desired. A simplified schematic of
the K303 is shown below. Note that the comparator has hysteresis, increasing
the rejection of false "1" noise peaks at the input.

-----E'
J_-"1---4

/,~2nf

~(CONNECTIONS
-=FOR"K374. ETC.

K303 TIMER SIMPIdFIED SCHEMATIC

80

K303-$27

I K303 input gate steps to zero, the uRinve,,~ output falls after I
controlled interval, while the inverted output rises. The interval can be as little
as 101'S8C or as long as 30 seconds depending on the size of the Rand C
connected to pin J, P, or V. Recovery begins when the input gate output rises
to a logic "I". In order to guarantee 95% repeat accuracy in the delay time,
a recovery time of at least 300 C should be used, (C is in Farads, Time is in
seconds). Be sure to include the 2.2 nf capacitor as part of the value for C.
The delay interval in seconds is equal to .7RC (R in ohms, C in farads).

When

Any value of C may be used as long as R remains between 1 K and 250 K

ohms.
RECOVERY T1ME---i

rL

r---------.I,

iO.7RC~

:
I

u,

t-- DELAY TIME ~

NOTE:
K374.K376. K378 PROVIDE

TIMING COMPONENTS FOR

THIS 'CIRCUIT

1/3 K303 AS OFF DELAY

A positive step at the input gate output resets the K303 timer outputs. If the
step occurs before a timeout is complete, the timeout is terminated and no
change appears at the outputs. This property is sometimes convenient for
establishing a pulse repetition rate threshold (Frequency Setpoint) .
A built-in 2.2 nanofarad timing capacitor assures adequate noise rejection
when external capacitors are mounted several inches from the timer. Time
threshold for resetting is always several percent of rated recovery time, so
that noise rejection time increases in proportion to the size of the timing
capacitor. Remote rheostats and timing capacitors may be used, but noise
rejection will be degraded. If several timing capacitors will be switch selected,
_wire in the smallest near the module and switch the others in parallel with it.
Variable or fixed timing resistors used with K303 timers may be any carbon
composition, film, or wirewound rheostat or potentiometer. Delay time is
linearly proportioned to resistance from 250KO down to a few thousand
ohms, failing to zero (reset inhibited) below a few hundred ohms. Momentary
shorting to ground of control pins will not cause damage, but a padding resistor of at least 3000 in series with variable controls is advisable both to
prevent continuous grounding and to avoid confusion which may arise if resetting in inhibited.
Timing capacitors may be any ordinary mica, paper, ceramic, or low leakage
electrolytic type. For delays above a few seconds, wet slug tantalum electrolytic capacitors are advisable to avoid leakage-induced drift at high temperatures. Temperature coefficient of delay has been optimized for the carbon
composition potentiometers and tantalUm electrolytic capacitors used in the
controls described below, and is typically less than 1% in SoC (9F) using
K731 and K732 regulators for power.

81

ONE SHOTS

IIKl

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _1<3_2_3_ _ _ _-...
NEMA

MIL

K323 one shots provide output pulse widths from 10 microseconds to 30

seconds with either fixed or adjustable delays. Calibrated controls are avail
able (K374, K376 and K378) for mounting directly on the K323. Remote
controls can be added, if desired.
When either input to the K323 gate steps to zero the uninverted output rises
and stays positive for a time equal to .7 RC. The pulse width is controlled
by the value of Rand C connected to pin J, P, or V. C can be any value, but
R should be between 1 K and 250 K ohms. The one shot recovery begins when
both signals at the input gate rise to logic 1. A recovery time of at least 300 C
should be allowed to ensure 95% repeat accuracy in the output pulse width.
(C is in farads, R is in- ohms, time is in seconds).

1<323-$35
82

When both signals at the input gate are high, the uninverted output is
forced low~ If this occurs before a timeout is complete, the timeout is terminated and the pulse width will be unknown. This premature resetting can
be eliminated by connecting the inverted output (pins D,K, and R) of the one
shot to one of its inputs. This will make the one shot insensitive to input
transitions during the timeout period.

INPUT

RECOVERY TIME

--i

L-..JL.r'L-

o
os

(4.7K n. TO R
250Kn.)

A positive pulse at the input will not terminate the timeout if one input is
connected to the oneshot inverted output (either pin D,K, or R).
The K323 circuit is similar to the K303 Timer and uses the same techniques
of noise rejection. For further information on resistors, capacitors and construction recommendations for external pulses width controls, please refer
to the K303 module.

K303 TIMER

83

I~

PULSERS

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _K33_3_ _ _ _'---'

NEMA

MIL

The K333 Pulser circuits are desilned to produce pulses from low to hilh
level transitions. The length of a pulse is determined by the capacitance
-connected to split lUIs conveniently mounted on the module.

1<333-$23
84

Without capacitor connected to the split lUIS, the K333 Pulser circuits live
a 10 to 15 microsecond pulse. For each .001 ,,1 capacitor connected to the
split lup, the pulse width increases by approximately 10 microseconds. A
minimum recovery time (T.)01 2000c seconds, where C is the value of the
capacitance used, should be allowed to ensure 95% repeat accuracy in the
output pulse width. All inputs to' these circuits must be longer in duration
than the output pulse widths desired. Complimenting outputs are also pro
vided on each circuit.
Typical outputs for a given input are shown below:

PIN F

'!---~r
f
f

----1,
I

t-TR-t

I
I

PIN E

~I

--+1-.. .1

t-

Je-Tp""'"
I
I
I
I

PIND-j

I
f
I

I
I
I

Tp. PULSE WIDTH

TR 2000 C

HystereSiS at the inputs makes it possible to use the outputs of the K578,
K580 and K581 modules as inputs. The AND expansion node may be used
with. KOO3 to lenerate pulses from a counter. Even thouah each puller
'may have a different timing capacitor, it is recommendec:Tlhat all circuits be
given the same width on all modules so that modules may be interchanpd
without creating logic timin. problems.

85

IKI

TIMER CONTROLS

K_3_7_8_~ ~

____K3_7_1,_K_37_3_,_K3_7_4,_K_3_75_,_K3_7_6_,

r------ ---- - - ----,I

r:-.J

~303
~-l

c 1-,'
I

:
I

1(311

'

0v
0p
OJ ~\
_______________
J

r---------------,

r.-.1
IA

I "

C I...

11C!03
I

!v

~-l

I
I

0p
OJ r\
_______________
J

r..r-'---' .---.. . . . r---"""""

ri

TIllERS WITH THREE

MOUNTED CICNTROI..S CAN I

AT

T1MIN8 COWONENTS
FOR INDMOUALCtnlK!05
DELAYS:
1<374; 0.01 TO o.3SEC.
1<376: 0.' TO 3.0SEC.
K378 '.OTO ::so SEe.
Pft(MI)E

OlE TO EXTRUSION I
011 TIllER CONTROL I

op
L-_ __-, L.._____' - - '
_______________ J

n:'-~~~:: ~,-:-_o_v_.....
~

Calibrated controls for timers, one-shots. and clocks are available in several'
ranges_ They mount to the K301, K303, or K323 module on the side opposite
the components by two screws per circuit. providing both mechanical and
electrical connections. Each control includes a logarithmic potentiometer for
easy setting over the full 30;1 calibrated range. Calibrations are approximate,
meant for quick setup and easy control identification. Accurate time settings
require the use of an oscilloscope, stopwatch, or other reliable time standard.
These controls are intended for use at the end of K941 mounting bars. When
three timer controls are mounted on a single timer board, the module cannot be mount in any connector block except one at the end of a K941
mounting bar. This is due to the extrusion of one timer control over the
connector pins.
Note: Time deray jitter is proportional to supply voltage ripple if times of the
order of 1 msec are selected. For critical applications, use light loading on
separate K731 or use i'-I710 supply.

K371-$11
K373-$11
K374-$15
K375-$11
K376-$15

K378-$15
86

nllER KIOI
Two K303 sections can be interconnected to make a free-runninl oscillator
If one of the timing capacitors is about 100 times smaller than the other. The
circuit with the larger capacitor will predominantly control the frequency. The
diagram below shows the interconnections.

1 to:~

JLJL

(CONTROLS

I
I

I
I
I

PULSE WIDTH)

NOTE:
K373.375 PROVIDE
TIMING COMPONENTS
fOR THIS CI~CUIT.
PINS MUST BE WIRED
AT SOCKET.

2/3 K303 AS CLOCK BELOW 1 KHz

The 100 to 1 ratio of timing capacitors required limits this methQCI to freqLiencies to 1 KHz or less. due to the 2.2 nanofarad capacitor built into eech
circuit. Three K303 circuits may be connected together for higher frequencies.
as shown on next page.

87

OUTPUT
NOTE:
CONTROL K371 PROIlOES

TIMING COMPONENTS

FOR THIS CIRCUIT. PINS

MUST BE WIRED AT

SOCKET.

I I

---t ....-- to"S

I I

_----'rl:-- --{L
0 .7RC

OUTPUT

. 3/3 K303 AS CLOCK ABOVE 500 Hz

LONG DELAYS
Longer delays than 30 seconds using large electrolytic capacitors would
suffer from increased drift due to capacitor leakage. Moreover, there are some
applications in which moisture and coptamination cannot reliably be excluded
from the electronics environment, making 250KO timing resistance impractical due to leakage along board surfaces. For either situation, 'two techniques
are available: either cascade several timer circuits, or combine a clockconnected K303 with one or more K210 counters. The crock may be gated
off at an unused input to avoid synchronizing errors. The diagram below
shows both techniques combined, using one K210 and all three sections of
a K303 to obtain a 22-minute delay.

88

INPUT~

,'-------

OUTPUT~
t
I
..... 30RC .....

-!'"

TIMER

FOR UP TO 22 MINUTES

89

K303 WITH K373 AND K378

SMALL K-SERIES CONTROL INSTALLED IN NEMA 12 ENCLOSURE.

90

MANUAL CONTROL MODULES

IKl

~__K_4_1_0'_K_4_15_,_1(4_2_0_,_K4_2_2,_K_4_24_,_K_43_2_ _.... ~

KSeries, in addition to providing a wide range of versatile logic and AC or DC

interface modules, also contains in the K4XX module grouping a series of
manual control modul~s. The modules may be used with or without the K950
fTlodular panei 'hardware to enter data into or to display data from a logic
control system.
The module types and general characteristics are listed in the following table.
Module
K410
K415
K420
K422
K424
K432

Use
Indicator lights
NIXIE display
Toggle or push button switches
Thumbwheel encoder
Thumbwheel decoder
Timer Controls

No. of
Circuits

5
1
3
2
2
2-3

Can Be Used Directly

With M Series
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes

USING THE K4XX MODULES

All of the K4XX modules are double height single thickness modules. The
manual controls are mounted where the A connector pins are normally located and all pin connections are made on the B conRector half of the
module. The modules, however, are always inserted in the A socket locations
(upper row) in the logic mounting panel.
A minimum of 3% inches of space must be left directly above the logic socket
mounting panel (K943, etc.) to allow enough room for the manual controls.
A K950 modular hardware panel may be used to cover the 3% inch space,
if a neat, closedfront panel is desired for the controls.
Any module can be plugged into the socket adjacent to any K4XX module
except in t"'e following two cases:

1. No two K415 or K432 modules can be plugged into adjacent sockets.

2. The socket location directly. to the left (faCing the controls) of a K422
or K424 thumbwheel module may only be used for another K422 or
K424 module.

The following pages expJain the operation and characteristics of the individual
module types.

91

I SE~ES I

INDICATOR LIGHTS
K410
HEMA

MIL

:tfl

:D

~
~

~
2

DOUBLE HEIGHT

The K410 indicator lamp module provides a convenient way to build binary,
decimal, octal, or bi-quinary displays. Lamps and lamp drivers receive their
supply voltage through fast-on tab connectors. Any 12.6 V c. t. transformer
may be used as a voltage supply provided the center tap is grounded.
The K410 may be used in a K943 mounting panel with or without the K950
panel hardware. Inputs are located on the B connector half of the module.
Two modules plugged side by side on Yi inch centers provide 10 lamps for
decimal, octal, orbi-quinary displays. More modules may be plugged in to
provide five horizontal binary registerS. Lamps turn on when both inputs are
high or left unconnected.
Please see the write up on the previous page before using this module.

K41o-$18
92

K410 INDICATOR

K415 NIXIE DISPLAY

93

11K!

NIXIE DISPLAY

""'---_ _ _ _ _K_4_15_ _ _ _ _......

RIGHT DE'IMAL PT. 2

LEFT DECiMAl PT. 2
(1)

BCD TO

to

L~

DECODER

WITH DRIVERS

DOUBLE HEIGHT

The K415 NIXIE display module provides a convenient method of building

decimal displays.
This unit is a double height module which may be used in a K943 mounting
panel with or without the K950 panel hardware. All pin connections are made
on the B connector. half of the module. These boards may be plugged into
every other connector socket allowing for neat multi-digit displays.
The NIXIE display tube mounted on the K415 is a side-viewing Burroughs
type, B5750S, which has both right and left decimal points and numerals 0-9.
The height of each character is 0.5 inches. The tube receives its supply
voltage through fast-on tab connectors. Any 12.6v transformer may be used
as a voltage supply.
Caution: If illegal numbers (11-15) are programmed into the K41S, two
numeral filaments will be lit simultaneously.

K415-$46

94

IrK!

SWITCHES

"--_ _ _ _ _K_4_20_ _ _ _ _--'

MIL

NEMA

IL~]I

c;:

IL~]I

r;:

IL!]I c;:
DOUBLE HEIGHT

The K420 uses three 3position Toggle switches. Only when the Toggi. is in
the center position will pins 0, K, and R be high. The switch acts like a SPST
Toggle in one direction and a spring returned push button in the other direc
tion. Built in switch filters and Schmitt Triggers remove all switch contact
bounce. Both inverted and uninverted outputs for each switch can drive 15
unit loads. Outputs are unslowed and may be used to drive M Series inputs
directly.
The K420 may be used in a K943 mounting panel with or without the K950
modular panel hardware. All connections are made on the B connector half
of the module.
Please see the write up preceding the K410 before using this module.

K420-$33

95

~
'

THUMBWHEEL ENCODER

SERIES

K422

~------------------------------------~

V 8

DOUBLE HEIGHT

The K422 dual thumbwheel encoder used with the KI34 inverter allows BCD
data to be entered into the logic system from a K950 control panel.
K422 modules can be plugged in adjacent socket locations to build dual
registers. of up to 30 digits in width. Because of the width of the K422 , the
socket poSition directly to the left of the thumbwheel'register may not be
used for any module except a K422 or K424.
The four outputs D, F, J and L or N, R, T and V may be considered as AND
expanders. These outputs should be connected to the four AND expansion
nodes of a KI34. Switch outputs have no noise filters and should never be
used as a source of pulses.
Switches may be multiplexed by wiring the I, 2, 4, and 8 outputs from the
K422 to the KI34 "AND" expansion nodes and connecting pins E and P to
the outputs of separate gates. The desired thumbwheel is selected by causing
a logic "0" at pin E or P. Logic "1" must be supplied to pins E and P of all
the unselected switches. Groups of thumbwheels may be' selected by con
necting pins P and E to the same gate.
The K422 may be used in a K943 mounting panel with or without the K950
modular panel hardware. All connections are made on the B connector h'alf of
the module.
The K422 may be used directly with the KI74 comparator without the KI34
ilwerters. Connect the output pins D, F, J, Lor N, R, T, V directly to the KI74
pins M, P, S, and U. As before, since the K422 has no noise filters, the comparitor output should only be a sensed logic level and not a source of pulses.

K422-$27

96

Pins U and K provide a convenient way to design an automatic defective

switch detector. These pins have tow outputs only when the thumbwheet
switch is in the zero position. For all other switch positions U and K have
high outputs. In the circuit above, the K301 "ON" delay should be set for
about .5 seconds. If the thumbwheel switch does not make contact, the
inverted timer output will go high after .5 seconds.
Please see the write-up preceding the K410 before using ths module.

97

THUMBWHEEL DECODER
K424

DOUBLE HEIGHT

The K424 thumbwheel decoder module is designed to be used with the K210
BCD up counter to allow the counter modulus to be selected manually from
1 through 10. For this application the decoder output is connected to pin
J of the K210. The counter will reset to zero on the next high to low clock
transition following the number that is manually selected.
-

K210

F
""'""H

""'""-

pi:l
N

1
PINS P AND M ARE
WIRED TOGETHER

4 T,W,

V 8

If the thumbwheel is set to the number 4, the counter will count 0, I, 2, 3, 4,

0, 1,2, etc.
K424-$27

98

Pins E and P of the K424 are AND expander connection points. If pins E and
B or P and Mare jumpered, pins Hand S may be connected to the OR
expansion node of any K-Series module in the same fashion as the KOO3
AND/OR Expander_
Since the K424 is designed to be used only with up counters starting from a
count of zere, the K422 must be used with the K174 comparator if specific
numbers are to be decoded.
Up counters of more than one decade in length may also be manually controlled. The one-shot pulse width should be long enough to allow all carry
pulses to propagate to the end of the counter. Pins 8, E and P, M are not
wired together for this application.

The K424 may be used with or without the K950 modular hardware panel. All
pin connections are made on the B connector half of the module. Please see
the write-up preceding the K410 before using this module.

99

IIKl

TIMER CONTROL

"--_ _ _ _ _K_43_2_ _ _ _ _

OPTIONAL
CONTI!OL
CONNECTIONS

v
UK

d1. 1. 1. 1. .

1. 1..1. 1nfJ ~+:

tCNOe
I'OT.

_-J __

KNOB

TRIM
POT

POT.

c
DOUBLE HEIGHT

The K432 Timer Control modul. used with a K301, K303, or K323 allows timer
delays to be adjusted from a front panel by rotating a knob-pot. Timing ranges
are selected by connecting the desired capaCitor as shown in the tabl. below
either with wire wrap or 913 grip clip patch cords.
The board is predrilled and etched to provide space for a screw _driver adjustable trim pot and capacitor to be mounted to obtain a third timer control. Each
capacitor on the board may only be connected to one RC timer circuit at a
time, however, any capacitor or resistor may be connected to form an RC.
The capacitor on pin L may be used with either the upper or lower knob-pot to
obtain a range of 1 to 30 seconds.
Pins J, P, and V are connected to the ,RC time pins on the timer modules_
RC Time Range

Connect to
Pin J or V
None
o or R
E orS
ForT
H or U
L

Min.
10
100
1
10
100
1

IA.5
Pos
ms
ms
ms
sec

Max.
300
3
30
300
3
30

J.l.S

ms
ms
ms
sec
sec

Pin connections for selecting time ranges.

The K432 is designed to be used with or without the K950 modular hardware
panel. All connections are on the B connector half of the module. Please see
the write-up preceding the K410 before using this module.

K432-$33
100

MANUAL
{
CONTROLS

A HALF

K4XX
MODUlE

A
(UPPER)

HALF

B HALF

CONNECTOR

p~

(BOTTOM)

HALF

K432 CONTROL (top module) WITH K410 AND K420

101

ACCESSORIES CONTAINING ELECTRONICS'

On the following pages is a broad selection of interface modules. To help you
get acquainted with the range of capabilities they offer, here is a summary
table. Grouping by type of use to aid selection is not rigid. Maximum compatibility has been preserved to permit any combination of modules to be put
together in the same system.
Compatible
Accessories
Logic-to-Interface
Connection and Type
of Use

Module Type

Integral 30" Flat

cable connector. For
small -controls with
heavy-duty field
wiring

120 VAC input: K508

120/240 VAC output:
K604
Transducer input:
K524
2.5 Ampere DC Driver:
K644

Integral Terminals
for larger systems

Solder Lugs with

strain relief. For
indicators, control
pane's, and nearby
transducers

Integral 12" flat

cable with NIXIE@

K716
Interface
Block

120 VAC input: K578

120/240 VAC output:
K614
1 AMP 55V
DC DRIVER:
K650
2.5 AMP 55V
DC DRIVER:
K652
250 Volt DC Driver:
K656
4 Amp Driver:
K658
Transducer Input: K522
Dry circuit switch
filter: K580
Inverted switch filter:
K581
Low power indicator
driver: K681
Indicatorl Relay
driver: K683
Decimal Display: K671

tube~

102

K782 K784
Thru Diode
K724 TerTerShell minal minal

X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X

SCHMITT TRIGGERS

'

11K!

______
K5_01_ _ _ _ _ _

MIL

NEMA

{t
ID

f'

'J

2 K
{ [

o L

NI

{ [
o R I

{JJ:
TI

2 U

The K501 can be used with the K580. K581. or K578 to provide simultaneous
true and complementary signals with full K series drive. Built in hysteresis
and slowed outputs insure reliable operation in noisy signal environments.
Schmitt Triggers can also be used to speed up signals with very slow rise or
fall times for input into pulse formers or logic circuits where timing considerations are critical.
The K501 is not designed to be connected directly to unfiltered contacts or
other noisy signal sources. The Schmitt Triggers have standard K-Series outputs and their rise time is on the order of 7$.1-s. Minimum hysteresis between
upper and lower Thresholds is 1 volt.
A logic "I" level at pins E, K, P and U forces pins 0, J, N. and T high and
pins F, l. R. and V low. A logic "0" level at pins E. K. P, and U forces pins
D. J. N. and T low and pins F. l, R. and V high.
K501-$25

103

AC INPUT CONVERTER
'---_ _ _ _ _K_50_8_ _ _ _

I
fKI
~~

NEMA

SCREW
TERMINALS

SOCKET B

~-----------....,

r----l

r . . ., ~6~N.;;_RFACE-;LOCK
I
: '
II~~

30"

~9~

CASLE

IH

:.

I
I

~:
~I

: ~-+----f

K508

~:

~I:

Ir(------------~

~:
~I

,(

15

II

Ir(------------~

~I,I
:,~:

,(

I
I

I r(_U- - - - - - - - ' -

1(

I(

:.

Ir(------------~

~I
t5',

~ ___ :"',"':0:0_ ~j ___ ~

i l
,
L____ J

DOUBLE HEIGHT

K508-$44

104

MIL

SOCKET B

~--------------------------~

r----l

30"
RIBBON
"aRt ~

K508

I~I
:~;.
1
15

_______________
~

~AC/DCJ
51

I~H

~. ~I

~-.-+------~ -~~I~(--------------~
AC/DCL
~-+----........-.. ,-~--< I . .
CONV.
.
~~_ _ _ _- J ~~~I~(_K______________~

~----

........-.. ,---+-,,--< :

,.1
"
I
I:

~-.~______~ ~~~ I~(_M______________~~

I
~AC/DC
R' 15 1
CONV.
I
-I '

~------~ --r.~I(
W't-------............. ,---t-'.:~ I... ....

~-+-----........~
L..-..;~-,IL---..J

'--+,.--{

-t---------<

I(

I'
~.I
I +-(_u___________~____'
I
I C C

I(
I(

J
T

-=1- - -

L-

-1

DOUBLE HEIGHT

105

i J

L ____

I
I
I

The K508 AC input converter, operating through the ,K716 interface blOck, is
designed for use with ordinary silver contacts in Ifmit switches, pressure
switches, pushbuttons and the like. Each input terminal presents a reactive
load of 1 voltampere, which together with an external 120 volt N:, pilot circuit voltage inhibits contamination buildup at the contact surface.
Electrical noise riding on pilot circuit wiring is attenuated in the input transformers and by hash filters at the K508 module. Contact bounce filtering is
designed to respond to the -first signal, and to leave the logic output in the
"I" state in spite of skips lasting up to 100 milliseconds.

K508 output circuits have hysteresis, so that no intermediate output state

can result from an ill-defined input condition. No separate Schmitt-triggers
are required. Outputs are at ground for no input, at +5 volts when energized.
All connections use upper connector.

106

IFKl

SENSOR CONVERTER

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _K_5_22_ _ _ _ _....a
MIL

NEMA

SOLDER

wes

::

:::

~ +~
~ +~

SOLDER
LUGS

::
::

~ .~
~ .~

1<.522 SENSOR CONVERTER

Th'~

K522 Sensor Converter is basically a voltage comparator that compar~

an unknown' variable input voltage against a fixed internal threshold voltage
(+ 1.8 v). This module can also be converted to a resistance sensing device
by mounting a three prong trimpot in the predrilled holes provided in each
circuit.

Voltage Sensing-This circuit has a blfilt-in reference voltage of +1.8 volts.

programmable hysteresis and noise cancelling ability. The K522 does not.
however. provide the tolerance to high level noise or accidental application
of line voltage which is obtainable from the K524.
If the unknown voltage applied to the K522. is higher than the reference
voltage, the comparator output will be a logic 1. If this applied voltage.
however. is less than the reference (+ 1.8 v) the output will be a logic O.
The minus input to each converter is AC coupled to the internal +1.8 volt
reference to provide common mode noise rejection (CMR). In order to be
effective, it must be connected to the same ground point to which the
Transducer is connected. Twisted pair wiring should be used between the
Transducer and Converter to help insure that any noise pick up will be the
same on both wires (this is commOn mode noise).

K522-$25

107

K522

CHARACTERISTICS
Number of circuits
Module height and thickness
Input connections
Inputs accessible at module connector
DC differential mode possible
Provision for adding transducer biasing
trim pots in predrilled holes on board
Noise cancellation range (common mode)
Maximum + input range for correct output
Tolerance to overvoltage (no damage)
Minimum hysteresis
Maximum hysteresis
Minimum transducer resistance
(at threshold)
Maximum transducer resistance
(at threshold)
Noise Cancellation ratio at
line Frequency (CMR)
Noise Cancellation ratio at 1 KHz
Temperature Coefficient of Threshold
(typica!)

~
single
solder
lugs
yes
no
yes

1 volt

o to +5V
3 volts
10mv
160mv
4000
20KO
10:1

20:1
1mv/oC
(0.1 %)

RESISTANCE SENSING -

With a trimpot mounted, the K522 becomes a

resistance sensor. The circuit automatically provides a +3.6 volt bias to the
trimpot. The resistance of the trim pot can be adjusted to equal the transducer
resistance at the desired sensing point. Only when the resistance of the
transducer is greater than the resistance of the trimpot will the sensor converter output go high.

In gen~ral, the K522 is suited to laboratory and light machinery use where
transducers are nearby and there is little danger of high voltage being applied
to them accidentafly. This is especially important when low resistance transducers are used with board mounted trimpots, since the trimpot provides a
path from the transducer leads back to the logic supply. (If high voltage such
as 120 VAC) were to get to the logic supply, all modules in the system would
.
be destroyed.
The hysteresis of each K522 circuit can easily be selected in increments of
10 mv from a minimum of 10 mv (no connection) to a maximum of 160
mv by connecting one or more programming pins to the output.
Below is a table of pin connections for programming the hysteresis of each
circuit.
Table of Hysteresis Programmin, Pins
Value when wired to converter output
10mv 20mv
Circuit 1 (Pin D)
E
F
Circiut 2 (Pin K)
l
M

40mv
H

80mv
J
P

Example: To add 30 mv hysteresis to the basic 10 mv hystereSis for a total

of 40 mv hystereSiS, connect pins E and F or land M to the circuit outputs.
See application notes for further information on the use of sensor converters.

108

I~

SENSOR CONVERTER

"--_ _ _ _ _
KS_24_ _ _ _ _--'

~j

NEMA
CONNECTOR BOARD

r---- -,
I

M,N

30.
FLATCA8LE

r--;---l
II +

P,R

I
I
I

e,o

!I~
+_

S,T

E.F

u,v
H.J

K.L

~ !I

l+~
! -

I
I

I
I

L ___ ..:-J

DOUBLE HEIGHT

-1

L_':' ___ ....J

K524-$98
109

MIL
-';TI~A~81:

I I

r"',/' ADJUST

K524 - ,

POT.

BIAS SUPPLY BB
+1

SLOW I AM
~

68K

OUT IAN
68K

r WNNECTO;'
I

~~-----I

BOARD I RIBBON I K524

CABLE
. +
M
tBF AC
80
BE

I
I

BL
BJ
BK

BB
SLOW

COM
DC

K524

AM

OUT AN :5

I
1
I

+
AC

AR

COM K524 OUT

DC
.
GRD

:5

BH

88
SLOW AS

I
I
I
I
I
I
I

BM

I
:5

GRD
8S

!: : J
L__

I
I
I

l
DOUBLE HEIGHT
L ______

I
I

I
~

Basically a noise-rejecting, threshold sensing differential voltage amplifier,

the K524 is readily adapted to sensing threshold points in DC analog signals,
AC signals, and pulses. It can also be biased to sense resistance thresholds.
The differential amplifying technique permits flexible grounding and shielding
methods to accommodate floating signal generators and minimize noise.
VOLTAGE SENSING--The i<524 provides a choice of either AC or DC coupling
for voltage sensing.

110

18K

.'V

+
12K

1"f

18K

18K

1.2K

12K

-:
lit;

DC

COUPLED

COUPLED
BE
(BK, BP,IV)

IF

10

(BL, BR,IV)

(BJ,IN,IT)

K524 EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT

The following table shows the auxiliary pin connections on the lower module
connector for the various applications of the K524.
APPLICATIONS

COUPLING

As low performance analog

comparator, for comparing two
photocells etc., or wherever
reference is supplied externally.
Photocells, thermistors, pulse
tachometers, pressure transducers
or wherever it is convenient to
use the internal 2.5 volt
reference.

PIN CONNECTIONS

DC

BO to BE, BJ to BK,
BN to BP, BT to BU

AC

BO to BF, BJ to BL
BN to BR, BT to BV

. This module has an internal reference voltage of +2.5 volts. If the voltage
swings of the unknown voltage applied to the K524 at its
input do not
go above the internal reference supply voltage of the sensor, an external
reference supply will be needed. This reference is applied to the <- > input.
DC coupling should also be connected. If the unknown voltage does not go
below the internal reference voltage, voltage divider techniques will have
to be used.

<+>

Output transitions occur when input voltage differentials are within 0.3 volts
or less of the reference supply. When the
input is more positive, the
output is a ONE. When the
input is more negative than the reference,
the output is a ZERO.

"+"

"+"

Signals up to 25 KHz, suitable for counting by K210, K211 or K220 counters,

can be obtained with symmetrical input signals having at least 1 volt excursions past the switching point. Maximum output rates can be limited to
approximately 5KHz by tying together pins AM and AN, AP and AR, etc.

111

RESISTANCE SENSING - The K524 may be used to sense resistance by

mounting a trimpot in the predrilled mounting holes provided. When trim pots
are used, pin BB must be connected to an independent +5 VDC bias supply,
such as, a separate K731 operated from a separate transformer to insure
against damaging currents through the bias circuits to the logic in case of
accidental high voltages at K524 inputs. This precaution is most essential in
systems containing K604 or K644 output converters, since inadvertent use of
the wrong K716 socket is possible. This problem does not arise with selfgenerating sensors or where bias is supplied externally to variable-resistance
sensors.
When the resistance of the transducer is greater than the resistance of the
trimpot the output of the sensor converter will be high. The outputs of the
sensor converters will go low when the transducer resistance drops below
that of the trimpot.

K524

SENSOR CONVERTER

112

CHARACTERISTICS

K524

Number or circuits

4
double

Module size
Input connections

cable
connector

Inputs accessible at module connector

no

DC differential mode possible

yes

Provision for adding transducer biasing

trimpots in predrilled holes on board

yes

Noise cancellation range (common mode)

Maximum

+ input range for correct output

Tolerance to overvoltage (no damage)

Hysteresis

7.5 volts
30V
140 VAC
10mv

Maximum switching rate

25KHz

Minimum transducer resistance

(at threshold)

4000

Maximum transducer resistance

(at threshold)

l00KO

Noise Cancellation ratio at

Line Frequency (CMR)

10:1

Noice Cancellation ratio at 1 KHz

20:1

Temperature Coefficient of Threshold

(typical)

113

lmv/oC
(0.1%)

QUADRATURE DECODER
K531

BCD OR BWARV

B ......- - - - -..

OIRECTJON
15 CONTROl.

CHANNEl. 1

15 COUNT

QUADRATURE

CONTROL

CHANNEl. 2

DECODE
CONTROL
DOUBLE HEIGHT

The K531 is a quadrature decoder which can be used in conjunction with

many types of dual channel rotary pulse generators (quadrature encoders) to
measure the angular position of a rotating shaft.
This unit provides both- direction and count controls for a K220 UP/ DOWN
counter register of up to 10 decades in length~ Two or four counts per
quadrature period can easily be selected and UPI DOWN counting can be
done at frequencies up to 80KHz. Either BCD or 2's compliment binary counting can be selected. The K531 also contains the necessary logic for + and
- sign control for BCD displays. Counting can pass through zero at the full
80KHz counting rate. Sign control can be suppressed if deSired.
Quadrature inputs can be from any encoder whose logic "0" voltage is 0.5v
or less and logiC "1" voltage is between +2.4v and +15v DC. Each encoder
output must be able to sink at least 3ma in the logic "0" state. These units
are quite common and are available from companies such as Baldwin,
Trump-Ross, and Data Technology.
Rotary pulse generators are rated for a specific number of pulses per revolution. For a dual channel generator, the quadrature output would be similar to
the example below.

K531-$70

114

!.OUAORATURE

!CYCLE

QiANNEL 1

CHANNEL 2
COUNTING
UP

COUNTING
DOWN

For counting up channel 2 leads channell by 1/4 cycle and for counting
down channell lead channel 2 by 1/4 cycle. The channel which leads for
UP and DOWN counting is determined by the type of quadrature encoder
used and how it is wired to the K531. If the unit does not count properly,
the quadrature inputs to the K531 may need to be switched.
To make the K531 compatible with the K220 UP/DOWN counter, a Direction
Control output, Pin L, has been included. This output will provide a logic "1"
level for up counting and a logic "0" level for down counting. Pin J, the
Zero Detect input, is an "OR" expander pin. This expansion pin may be
connected to K012 "OR" expansion gates (shown in the application section
in the rear of this book) to complete the zero detect logic if a Sign Control
output (Pin N) is desired for BCD nixie displays. One third of a K012 is required for each K220 module in the UP/ DOWN register. The input at this
pin determines the output on PJn N, Sign Control output.
Pin B must be grounded if sign control is desired for BCD counting. Sign Control is suppressed if pin B is left floating as shown in the table below for a
3 decade counter that is counting down form 999. For 2's compliment
binary counting, Pin B must be left floating and the most significant bit in the
K220 binary UP/ DOWN register is used for the sign. The bit will be a "1"
for minus and a "0" for plus.

Open

Pin B: Open
K220 Binary
UP/DOWN Register
Sign

999

0011 11100111

K220 BCD
UP/ DOWN Register
Pin B:
Grounded

+
+

+
+
+

999

003
002
001
000
001
002

..

999

+
,+

+
+
+
+
+
+

003
002
001
000
999
998

000

115

0000
0000
0000
0000
1111
1111
1111

0000
0000
0000
0000
1111
1111
1111

0011
0010
0001
0000
1111
1110
1101

1100 0001 1001

Pins U and V are connected to pin A to provide 2 or 4 counts per quadrature

period.
Connect
To pin A

Counts
Per Period

None

U, V

Maximum
Input Freq.

Maximum Output
Count Frequency

20 KC
40 KC

80 KC
80 KC

The output on pin N denotes the sign of the number in the UP/DOWN register. It will be a logic "I" for a plus sign and a logic "0" for a minus sign.
, The number zero always causes a logic "I" at pin N so that a minus zero
can not be displayed. The K671 NIXIE display can be used with a Burroughs
B-5442 .. Tube. Pins N and V on the K671 must be grounded and Pin N
on the K531 must be connected to pin T on the K671.
II

See Application Notes for detailed information on using the K531 with NIXIE
displays and computer interfacing.

116.

120 VAC INPUT CONVERTER

K578

NEMA

DOUBLE HEIGHT
TRIPLE THICKNESS
NOTE:
PINS IN ( ) ARE USED IF MODULE
IS REVERSED IN SOCKET
'(GND=BT)
(+5=BV)

K578 AC INPUT CONVERTER

K578-$80
117

MIL

TRIPLE THICKNESS MODULE

DOUBLE HEIGHT
120-VOLT
INDICATORS

NOTE:
PINS IN ( ) ARE USED IF MOOULE IS
REVERSED IN' SOCKET.
(GNO-BT)
(+5. BV)

K578 AC INPUT CONVERTER

The K578 input converter, when mounted in a K724 interface shell, provides
logic levels from 120 VAt signals from limit switches, relays etc. The 1 VA
reactive load provided by the K578 isolation transformers insures sparking
at pilot contacts. Together with the ample circuit voltage used, this reactive
load assures maximum contact reliability.
Electrical noise riding on pilot circuit wiring is attenuated both by the input
transformer and by RC filtering. Bounce filtering is designed to pick up by
the end of the first full cycle of contact, and to drop out (return to "zero:'
output state) by the end of three full cycles after the input is removed.
(About 50 milliseconds.) This speed of response is desirable in large sequential scanning-type control systems, even though occasionally a heavy contact
may be observed to produce more than one output transition due to very
long bounce duration. If necessary, respons'e speed may be cut in half by
tying 150 mfd'from the offending logic output to ground. However, since no
Schmitt triggers are included in the K578 (unlike the K508) , a KI84 or K501
118

must be used as described in the applications notes if it is important to know

exactly how many contact closures have occurred in a given period.
Gating circuits equivalent to four K026 sections are included for contact
scanning applications using the K161, or to facilitate forming the logical OR
of many inputs. Direct outputs are from circuits similar to the K580, and
may not be wired together.
Clamp-type terminals on the K578 take two wires up to size 14. Neon indicators are included. The K578 can also be used in the K943 mounting panel;
however, some mechanical means Of support must be provided to hold the
K578 in its socket if vibration is a consideration.
The logic outputs of the K578 have low fanout capabilities and are therefore
susceptible to noise pickup. Leads wired to the outputs of this module should
be limited to six inches in length.

K578 TERMINAL STRIP CONNECTIONS FROM

LEFT TO RIGHT ARE NUMBERS 1 TO 9

119

IKI

DRY CONTACT FILTERS

~_ _ _ _ _K5_80_._K_58_1_ _ _ _ _ _ ~
220

SOLDER
LUGS

SOLDER

LUGS

1<581

K580

OUTPUT

K580-$28
K581-$20
120

These filters convert signals from dry or WIPing contacts to logic levels.
Primarily they are used with gold contacts such as the new encapsulated reed
limit switches, thumbwheel switches, and the like. Those pushbuttons or
slide switches that provide good wiping action will also ope'rate reliably with
these filters, but silver contacts designed for long life on heavy duty loads
are likely to give trouble. For them, use interfaces designed for such applicalion like K508K716 or K578, or at least switch a high voltage. (see K580
voltage table.)
Schmitt Triggers should be used on the outpu~s of both the K580 and K581
when they are used for one shot or timer inputs.
Access to K580 and K581 inputs is by solder lugs only. Strain relief holes
are provided in the board (near handle) for a g-wire cable. The avoidance of
contact connectors on the logic wiring panel combined with heavy filtering
guarantees noise isolation and protects modules by preventing accidental
short circuits. Below is a summary of other characteristics.
.
Time Delay
Output for
Contact Closed on Closure

Time Delay
on Opening

Contact
Current

Contact
Voltage

K580

22ma

See Table

high

10msec

30msec

K581

22ma

5V

low

20msec

20msec

(Time delay figures above are nominal, and assume connection to the input
of a standard gate such as K113 or KI23.)
The contact current for the K581 comes from the logic supply, making it very
important to assure freedom from accidental high voltages on K581 inputs
which could damage many logic modules by getting through to the system
power supply. This hazard is not present with the K580, which uses an external source of +10 volts or more. The table below shows how external
dropping resistors may be added to provide higher voltage operation.
TABLE OF K580 VOLTAGE DROPPING RESJSTANCES

CONTACT
SUPPLY
VOLTAGE

10

Dropping
Resistance

Dissipation

12

820

15

220n

24

28

48

90-

100

120

6200 8200 I.8KO 3.6K{] 3.9KO 4.70

0.05W O.l1W 0.3W 0.4W 0.85W 1.8W ~.OW

2.5W

When using dropping resistors and higher voltage supplies, total tolerance of
resistors and supply should be 10% to insure high levels between +4 V
and +6 V at the logic. Also observe that a handful of dropping resistors in
90 V or 120 V systems may dissipate more power than the entire logic system, and must be located so as not to cause excessive temperature rise in
the K series environment.

121

Note that these circuits may not be paralleled to obtain the wired OR or
wired AND function, and that fanout is limited to 2 milliampers in order to
maintain the low (zero) output voltage within normal K-Series specifications_
Fanout to ordinary logic gates and diode expanders may be raised to 4
milliampers if some noise and contact bounce rejection can be traded off; but
hysteresis inputs such as those at counter inputs, rate multiplier, etc., may
not switch properly if the logic zero is allowed to rise much above +0.5 V.
Looking at the component side of both the K580 and K581, the solder lug
connections are numbered 1 to 9 from pin end to handle end.

K580

K581
122

EIA INPUT CONVERTER

K596

[lAP~

EIA
OR

celTT

INPUTS

OR

celTT

INPUTS

LOGIC

OUTPUTS

so-Q-rn

Any bipolar input signals with amplitudes between 3 volts and 25 volts
will be transformed by this non-inverting converter into standard K-Series or
M-Series logic signals with driving capabilities of 5 rna or 3 unit loads, respectively. Load for paralleling (wired OR): 1 milliampere. Input impedance
stays between 3KU and 6KU for full capability with both the American EIA
and the European cCln standards for data transmission. Built-in noise filtering causes transition delays of several microseconds, limiting the maximum
baud rate that can be handled.
Open-circuit inputs will produce low (zero-volts) outputs on the lower three
circuits. The output stage of the first three circuits if inputs are open is controlled by pin S, which must be grounded for outputs low or connected to
pin A (+5 volts) for outputs high. This last provision allows type 33 or type
35 current switching teletypes to be converted and wire ORed with modern
interfaces. Pin B must be connected either to pin A or pin C: if it is left open,
there may be crosstalk between circuits.
Input

Pin B
Connection

Open

Circuit
+3 to +25V
-3 to -25V
'OV

PINS 0, F, J

Pins l. N. R

+5

A or C

+5

+5

A or C

A or C

Please observe that noise and interference can enter a digital system through
any wires that pass through a noise field. K596 modules should be located at
the edge of the system, and communication wiring should not be allowed to
lie close to logic wiring by more than a few inches.

K596-$20

123

11Kl

ISOLATED AC SWITCH

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _K_6_04_ _ _ _ _ _

NEMA

,-------------

II
I
II
I

- - - - AF

-~

-;604

30"

=~N

------ ----;;.;W~~A~

rc;.~T~I-1
BOARO

~K::T~a

::=KETAORC

i :;

K116
INTERFAcE BLOCK

I
I

I
!

LOAD

I
I,
I

I
I

i',

I
I

I
I
I

I,
SUPPLY
'lel.1
AC

DOUBLE HEIGHT

K604-$110
124

MIL

SCREW TERMINALS
SOCKET A
(SOCKET Cl

r - - -:- - - -

K60"l

AF

RIII80N
, CABlE

AC
SWITCH

I
I
I
I

fSoC~-;-~_C -

ICON-;C~ I - 1

BOARD

-\-1

K716
INTERFACE BLOCK

LOAD

I
I
I
I

AC

L ______

I
~

DOUBLE HEIGHT

Operating in conjunction with the K782 or K716 Interface Block, the K604
permits AC operated valves, solenoids, small motors, motor starters and the
like to be controlled directly from K Series logic. Each circuit can handle up
to 250 volt-ampers continuously. Total for any module, however, should not
exceed 500 volt-ampers averaged over one minute. Ratings below include
maximum horsepower based on use of Allen-Bradley type K motor starters.
Less sensitive starters or relays may have significantly reduced capacity.

125

Maximum Capacity, each K604 circuit (120 v AC lines)

Continuous
V.A.

Inrush

Condition

V.~.

Motor
Direct

Type K 208/220
Starter Max. H.P.

With Fuse

250

600

1/20 H.P.

Size 3

30

50

No Fuse

250

1800

1/10 H.P.

Size 4

50

100

480/600
Max. H.P

Littlefuse type 275005 5 amp fuses provide fault protection for the triac
output circuits .The fuses are mounted by clips on the connector board for
easy replacement. Without the fuses, short circuits will destroy the module.
The no-fuse information above is for reference only, and operation without
fuse protection cannot be recommended. Circuits cannot be paralled to
increase ratings.
AC switch turnon takes place within 500 microseconds after input logic gate
goes high. Turnoff takes place at 'zero crossings of the current. Maximum
"off" leakage: 10 rna RMS at 140 VAC. Line voltage rating: 100 to 140 VAC,
50 to 60 Hz. Each triac outPllt circuit has 400volt breakdown rating. Shunt
capacitor and shunt clipping devices inhibit false triggering on line transients.
Where very small devices such as pilot lamps, light duty relays, or AC input
converters constitute the- sole load, an auxiliary load such as a 12Kn 2 watt
resistor may be required to absorb sufficient holding current for fuJI voltage
output.
Two special precautions are made necessary by the presence of AC line
voltages on the K604 module. First, always disconnect the ribbon cable
connector before inserting or removing a K604 or an adjacent module, to
avoid shocks or component damage. Second, W993 copper-clad boards
($4 .each) should be installed between K604 modules and all other types
except K508 or K644. With the pin A connection cut away, on either the
board or the socket, the W993 copper clad board acts as an electrostatic
shield. If this added interface protection is later found to be unnecessary,
the sockets reserved for shield boards can be used to add logic features,
modifications, etc;. Refer to Construction Recommendations.
If desired, a K782 terminal board instead of the K716 may be used to obtain
connections to field wiring. No indicators are provided by the K782, however.
TERMINALS ON
K716 OR K78~

LOGIC
SIGNAL

LOAD

LAMP RETURN
TERMINALS
(K716 ONLY)

K604 CIRCUIT IN USE

126

ISOLATED AC SWITCH

IrKl

K6 14
L . - -_ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _- 4

NEMA

SUPPLY

L - - - - - - - - -.......~'\l 2
t-t--------{\\J 3

LOAD

SUPPLY

L-----~---.__{\.\J

LOAD

~-----{\\1

SUPPLY

LOAD

~-----4'~ 7

NOTES:
(GR=BT)
(+5=SV)
( ) PINS IF MODULE IS REVERSED
IN SOCKET.

L..-_ _ _ _-{~

SUPPLY

LOAD

SUPPLY
RETURN

DOUBLE HEIGHT
TRIPLE. THICKNESS

K614 AC SWITCH
This module uses the K604 circuit and behaves in most respects the same.
However, the K614 is designed to fit a K724 interface shell. Accordingly
the K614 has built-in clamp-type terminals for wires to size 14, interchangeable indicators, and output ratings boosted to 500 VA per circuit by the larger
heat sink area available in this configuration.
littlefuze type 275005 fuses provide fault protection for the triac output
circuits. The fuses are mounted by clips on the connector board for easy
replacement. Without the fuses, short circuits will destroy the module.
Circuits cannot be paralleled to increase ratings.

K614-$88

127

MIL

SUPPLY

LOAD

SUPPLY

LOAD

SUPPLY

LOAD

..,

SUPPLY

8 LOAD

NOTES:
(GR=BT)

(+5 :BY)
( ) PINS IF MODULE IS REVERSED
IN SOCKET.

SUPPLY
RETURN

DOUBLE HEIGHT
TRIPLE THICKNESS

K614 AC SWITCH
The output rating of each K614 circuit is 500 VA due to the large heat sink
area available, however: the 'maximum output rating per module should not
exceed 750 VA over a 1 minute period. Shunt capacitors and shunt devices
inhibit false triggering on line transients.
Two special precautions should be taken when using a K614 module. First,
if the inputs are not grounded, the triac outputs will turn on. The user should
be particularly careful when removing modules from a circuit which provide
the low "0" logic levels to the K614. Remember, all K-Series inputs nor- mally assume a high level when no input is connected. Second, W993 copperclad board ($4.00 each) should be installed between ~614 and all other
types except K508 or K644.' With the pin A connection cut away, on either
the board or the socket, the W933 copper-clad board acts as an electrostatic
shield. If this added interface protection is later found to be unnecessary,
the sockets reserved for shield boards can be used to add logic features,
modifications, etc. Refer to Construction Recommendations.

128

LOGIC
SIGNAL

SUPPLY

RETURN
K614 CIRCUIT IN USE

K614 TERMINALS AS VIEWED LEFT TO RIGHT ARE NUMBERED

1 THROUGH 9
129

ISOLATED AC SWITCH
K615

SE:'ES

NEMA

1 SUPPLY

2 LOAD

3 SUPPLY

4 LOAD

5 SUPPLY
6 LOAD

7 SUPPLY

8 LOAD

9 SUPPLY
RETURN

NOTES:
(GR=BT)
(+5=BV)
( ) PINS IF MODULE
IS REVERSED IN
SOCKET.

DOUBLE HEIGHT
TRIPLE THICKNESS

K615 AC SWITCH
The K615 was designed to fit a K724 interfaee shell. This module uses the
same switching circuits as the K614. The difference between the K614 and
K615 is in the input circuits; one input on each circuit of the K615 (AF,
AM, AT, and BF) normally 1:!ssumes the logic "0" level when it is open circuited. This is cont"radictory to a" other K-Series inputs which normally
assume a high level when no input is connected. Because the switch turns
on when both inputs are high, this feature provides an additional fail-safe
against the accidental removal of modules or cut wires that connect directly
to the AC switch input. If the protected input is unused it must be wired to
pin A.

K615-$92

130

Mil

t------~

1.

I--+-----~\) 3

L..-_+-_ _ _

+_~

t-+-----~

L..-_+-___

-+-~\)

I--+-----ft)

SUPPLY

SUPPLY.

LOAD

SUPPLY

LDAD

SUPPLY

8 LDAD

NOTES:
(GReBT)
(+!5-BV)
( ) PINS IF MODULE
IS REVERSED IN
SOCKET.

'--_ _ _ _~ 9

SUPPLY

RETURN

DOUBLE HEIGHT
TRIPLE THICKNESS

K61S AC SWITCH

The K61S has built-in clamp-type terminals for wires to size 14, interchangeable indicators, and output ra~ings of SOO VA per circuit due to the large heat
sink area available in this configuration.
littelfuze@ type 27S00S fuses are mounted by clips on the connector board
for easy replacement. Without the fuses, short circuits will destroy the
module. Circuits cannot be paralleled to increase ratings.
The output rating of each K61S circuit is SOO VA, however, the maximum output rating per module should not exceed 750 VA over a 1 minute period.
Shunt capacitors and shunt devices inhibit false triggering on line transients.
W993 copper-clad boards ($4 each) should be installed between K61S modules and all other types except KS08 or K644. With the pin A connection
cut away, on either the board or the socket, the W993 copper clad board acts
as an electrostatic shield. If this added interface protection is later found to
be unnecessary, the sockets reserved for shield boards can be used to add
logic features, modifications, etc. Refer to Construction Recommendations.

131

LOGIC
SIGNAL

SlPPLl.

RETURN

K615 CIRCUIT IN USE

;
(

132

IIKl

DC DRIVER

'--_ _ _ _ _K_6_44_ _ _ _ _--J

NEMA
SCREW
TERMINALS
SOCKET A

SOCKET
A OR C

r- ~-= =--=-_-= =--,-- - - -~_~ _(SOCKET~

I
l'I
Ir
I
I II
K644

AH

DOUBLE HEIGHT

AF

30"

RIBBON
CABLE

I -

CONNECTOR
BOARD

II

K716
INTERFACE
BLOCK

I 2U-I---0LOAD
N
17

I II

'--------.:.-_-4 I

(20

B
p

I
I

II
II

~--":""'t---+------.~LOAO

20

(2'"

I
I

PLUS
SIDE OF
15 LOAD

(161 SUPPLY

BC

LCW) ISUPPLY
GROUND

K644-$66

133

MIL
SCREW
TERMINALS

SOCKET

SOCKET A
(SOCKET C)

r- _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ AO~RC
I
I

r-------~..,

I
II
I
I

' DOUB~~4~EIGHT

AF

~O" r-- -:- -

RIBBON
CABLE

-----,
II~FACE

1-

CONNECTOR
BOARD

\1

BLOCK

>---:--~--V]LDAD

17.
(2t)

I
I
I
I

'/

I
I
I

I
I
I

I II
I

">--~-+---'-",LOAD

20

(24)PLUS

AB

SlOE OF
15 LOAD

+ (~)iPPLY

J
BC

~-

LOAD SUPPLY
GROUND

L-------:--~

L ___ I_~I

L - - - - - - - - - - - -I

::::J
_

CHASSIS
GROU~D_ _

Operating through the K782 or K716 Interface Block, the K644 DC Driver permits stepping motors, dc solenoids, and similar devices rated up to 2.5
amperes at 48 volts to be driven directly from K series logic. BLliit-in clamping
diodes protect switching transistors from transient over-voltage.
Total output circuit current for the K644 module must not exceed 4 amperes
averaged over any 1 minute period. The ribbon connector should be unplugged before inserting or removing a K644module.
Moving the parts' of a magnetic device change the winding inductance. To
equalize magnetic field turnoff and turnon times, the ratio of inductance to

134

total circuit resistance must be held constant. This demands more resistance
in the circuit during turnoff, when the inductance is higher. Resistance may
be inserted between K716 terminal 15 (or 16) and the load supply to achieve
this, provided the K644 output voltage will not exceed 55 volts. Whether
resistance is added or not, these clamp return terminals must be connected
to the plus side of the load supply to protect the module from overvoltage
during turnoff.
The K644 may be used with a K782 instead of a K716 to obtain the screw
terminals needed for connecting heavy duty field wiring.
See applications section for further information concerning tile use of DC
drivers.

135

DC DRIVER
-.....-.._ _ _ _ _
K6_5_0_ _ _ _ _

NEMA

IIKl

~~

MIL

POSITIVE
' - - - - - - - i o " SlOE OF
LOAD SUPPLY

9 POSITIVE
' - - - - - - - i o n SIDE PF
LOAD SuPPLY

DOUBLE HEIGHT
TRIPLE THICKNESS

K650 DC DRIVER
The K650 DC driver can deliver up to 1 ampere at up to 55 VDC. These four-l
circuit modules drive eXternal loads through built-in clamp-type terminals.
They can be mounted in the K724 interlace shell, but do not have neon indicator lamps across their outputs terminals as the other shell mounting
m~~~~

The positive side of the load supply should be connected to protect output
transistors form damage due to turn-off transients. See the application section for further DC driver information.

K65Q-$40

136

Output Ratings

Module
ResistanE:e
K650

55V
1 AMP

Inductive

INCANDESCENT LAMPS

55V 1 AMP Lamps rated

With added Lamps rated
suppression Lamps. rated
diodes
Lamps rated

60ma;
l20ma
250ma
400ma

to
to
to
to

48V
28v
l8V
l2V

Note greatly reduced ratings on tungsten loads. Lamp filaments draw typically
ten times more current at turnon than when hot, resulting in very high transistor dissipation if supply voltage is high. Series current limiting resistors or
shunt preheat resistors could be used to limit surge in certain cases, but
ratings above assume this would be awkward or impractical.
Terminals 2, 4, 6 and 8 must be connected directly to the negative terminal
of the load power supply or damage to the module will result from high
currents.

137

IIKl

DC DRIVER

'---_ _ _ _ _K_6_52_ _ _ _ _--'

NEMA

MIL

AF

~1
4

AH.

~r----------l;~

~2

AN

~
4

"=- 3

OUTPUT

TERMINALS

ATa
II

AU

AN

5.

~6j

:BH Q!7
~
I
F

.t-

"=-1
1

~8j

14

3:

-'lM

~
=co 1 ,. ;~ "~"AC'

::tJZ+01~ 1
AM

~4

OUTPUT

':J

9 POSITIVE
SlOE OF
LOAD SUPPLY

DOUBLE HEIGHT
TRIPLE THICKNESS

K652 DC DRIVER
The K652 DC priver has four circuits each of which can deliver up to 2.5
amperes at up to 55 volts. Like the K578, K614, K656 and other modules,
this unit has built-in clamp-type terminals for wires up to size 14. It can be
mounted in the K724 interface shell, but does not have neon indicators
across the output terminals as other shell mounted modules.
The positive side of the load supply should be connected to protect output
transistors from damage due to turn-off transients. See the application section for further DC driver information.
Terminals 2, 4, 6 and 8 must be connected directly to the negative terminal
of the load power supply or damage to the module will result from high
currents.

K652-$50

138

I.,. _____DC_~_6~_!V_E_R

SE:'E~ I

_ _ _ _....."

NEMA

OUTPUT
TERMINAL
~---+----~----vn

)-----+---~~_vn7

TERMINALS 2.466 ARE

THE LOAD SUPPLY GROUND

POSITIVE
SIDE OF
LDAD SUPPLY

OOUBLE HEIGHT
TRIPLE THICKNESS

DOUBLE HEIGHT
TRIPLE THICKNESS

K656 250 VOLT DRIVER

Each circuit of this versatile driver can deliver up to 1 ampere at up to 250
volts, making it ideal for driving heavy-duty brakes and clutches or for high
speed operation of other inductive loads. Like the K578 and K614, this
module has integral clamp-type terminals and neon indicator lamps. (LampS
are effective only at 90 volts and above.) This driver module is desighed to
be used with K724 interface shells. Positive side of load supply must be
connected to protect output transistors from damage during turnoff transient.

K656-$80

139

MIL

DC
DRIVER

DC
DRIVER

~4
DC
DRIVER

OUTPUT
TERMINAL

~6

DC
DRIVER

'---------{JV) 9

POSITIVE
SIDE OF
LOAD SUPPLY

DOUBLE HEIGHT
TRIPLE THICKNESS

See the' application section for wiring information and logic' diagrams of
several stepping motor applications.
Terminals 2, 4, 6 and 8- must be connected directly to the negative terminal
of the load power supply or damage to the module will result from high
currents.

140

11K!

DC DRIVER

~_ _ _ _ _K6_5_8_ _ _ _ _-' ~
NEMA

OUTPUT
TERMINAL

(DOUBLE SIDED BOARD)

(TRIPLE THICKNESS MODULE)

9 POSITIVE
SIDE OF

~----~t1

TERMINALS 2,4,6 8e
ARE THE LOAD SUPPLy
GROUNDS

LOAD SUPPLY

DOUBLE HEIGHT
TRIPLE THICKNESS

K658 4 AMP DRIVER

Each circuit of this versatile driver can deliver up to 4 amperes at up to 125
volts. like the K578, K656 and K614, this module has integral ~Iamp-type
terminals and neon indicator lamps. (Lamps are effective only at 90 volts
and above.) This driver module is designed to be used with K724 interface
shells. Positive side of load supply must be connected to protect output
transistors from damage during turnoff transient.

K658-$128
141

MIL

DC
DRIVER

~4

OUTPUT
TERMINAL

~6

DC
DRIVER

POSITIVE
SIDE OF
LOAD SUPPLY

DOUBLE HEIGHT
TRIPLE THICKNESS

See the application section for wIring information and logic diagrams of
several stepping motor applications.
Terminals 2, 4, 6 and 8 must be connected directly to the negative terminal
of the load power supply or damage to the module will result from high
currents.

142

DECIMAL DECODER AND NIXIE DISPLAY

(2)

R
T

(4)

BCD TO
10 LINE
DECODER
WITH DRIVERS

Ii<l
~

K671

12M CABLE

This module has two parts separated by a I-foot ribbon cable_ One part plugs
into any module socket, the other contains a side-viewing Burroughs type
/8-5440 long life NIXIE glow tube on a mounting board. Four connections to
corresponding module socket pins of a K210 or K220 binary-coded decimal
counter completes the input wiring. The display tube board attaches with two
screws to a K771' supply for both mechanical mounting and power supply
electrical connections. Displays up to 6 digits long can be stacked on each
K771 supply. Stacked digits have 0.8" mounting centers. See Construction
Recommendations befGre assigning module locations. A 8urroughs Type
8-5442 NIXIE
and - glow tube can also be used in the K671. Ground pins
Nand V. Let pin R float and put input on pin T. Pin T is high for
low
for -.

+,

I
K671-$55
143

II

LAMP DRIVERS
K681
NEMA

~l
H

02

02

03

03

04

~5

. _SUPPLY

04
LOAD SOLDER
LUGS

ORIVER

SOLDER
LUGS

-G

-GNOi.

06

~.

~l
m-r0 1
S

01

~.

~l
p

~1
~1
~1
~ 1,sC

'llal

~l
~l

MIL

Of

~~l

SE:ES

07

07

~.

08

~.

~l

09

08

09

K681 LAMP DRIVER

These eight-circuit modules drive external loads through g-conductor cable
soldered to split lugs at the handle end by the user. Strain relief holes are
prepunched in the board. Logic "0" turns the driver off, logic "1" turns it on.
Pin connections via diodes to outputs facilitate production automatic module
testing while isolating system wiring from high voltages. Circuits are not
slowed, and these connections are not recommended as output tiepoints
unless exceptional care is taken to prevent noise and damaging voltages from
degrading system reliability. (See Fixed Memory application note.)

-----K681~$15

144

OUTPUT RATINGS

MODULE
TYPE

RESISTIVE

INDUCTIVE

INCANDESCENT LAMPS

K681

18V, 30ma

18V, 30ma with

added suppression
diodes (K784)

Lamps rated l8V, 40ma

operated at 12V to reduce
current to 30 milliamperes.

Note greatly reduced ratings on tungsten loads. Lamp filaments draw typo
ically ten times more current at turnoff than when hot, resulting in very high
transistor dissipation if supply voltage is high. Series current limiting resistors or shunt preheat resistors could be used to limit surge in certain cases,
but ratings above assume this would be awkward or impractical.

K681
Solder lugs on the K681 shown above are numbered I to 9 from left to right.

145

11Kl

LAMP DRIVERS

______
K_68_3_ _ _ _ _ _ _
NEMA

':

MIL

:=;1

~~'\-'-----Ol

~'-"--01

~~~-~1~---o2

~~-----<02

:~1

:~l

H
~ 1
~~~'----03

~r-e--03

"'1

~5

~p 1~

K~

~f-~--+1--o4

SOLDER

DRIVER r-e--04

LUGS

LOAD
SOLDER
~5 LUGS
-SlF'Pr
-GND

~~--o6

~~:--.1----07
5

t-4''---07

~~1-08
U

.-..--08

~____1--09

r-e--09
DOUBLE HEIGHT

K683 LAMP DRIVER

These eight-circuit modules drive external loads through 9-conductor cable
soldered to split lugs at the handle end by the user. Strain relief holes are'
prepunched in the board. Logic "0" turns the driver off, logic ': I" turns it on.
Pin connections via diodes to outputs facilitate production automatic module"
testing while isolating system wiring from high voltages. Circuits are not
slowed, and these connections are not recommended as output tiepoints
unless exceptional care is taken to prevent noise and damaging voltages from
degrading system reliability. (See Fixed Memory application note.)

K683-$30
146

OUTPUT RATINGS

MODULE
TYPE

RESISTIVE

K683

55V, 25Ol1'la

INDUCTIVE
55V, 250m a
with added
suppression
diodes (K784)

INCANDESCENT LAMPS
Lamps
Lamps
Lamps
Lamps

rated
rated
rated
rated

40ma, to 48V;
60ma, to 28V;
BOma, to 1aV;
100ma, to 12V

Note greatly reduced ratings on tungsten loads. Lamp filaments draw typically ten, times more current at turnon than when hot, resulting in very high
transistor dissipation if supply voltage is high. Series current limiting resistors or shunt preheat resistors could be used to limit urge in certain cases,
but ratings above assume this would be awkward or impractical.

K683
Solder lugs on the K683 shown above are numbered 1 to 9 from left to right.

147

EIA OUTPUT CONVERTER

K696

~E
~

ar{]-H
ar{]-K
LOGIC
INPUTS

EIAOR

~M

CCITT OUTPUTS

ar{]-P
ar{]-S
EtA OUTPUT CONVERTER K696
This bipolar non-inverting driver converts standard logic levels to either the
American EIA or the European CCITT 5tandard signals for data transmission.
Power can either be 6.3 VAC 10% 60Hz on pin B for EIA levels (at least
5 volts) or 9.0 VAC 10% 50Hz on pin B for CCITT levels (at least 6
volts). Limited output current capability results in risetimes of several microseconds for capacitive loads of a few thousand picofarads, limiting the
AC can supply up to 32
maximum baud rate to 5K baud. One ampere
K696 modules~ Keep AC leads short to maintain voltage.

of

Please observe that ~oise and interference can enter a digital system through
any wires that pass through a noise field. K696 modules should be located
at the edge of the system, and communications wiring should not be allowed
to lie close to logical wiring for more than a few inches. A high impedance
probe may be used to monitor the half-wave rectified and filtered negative
internal supply at pin T (5 Kn series resistance).
+5V --INPUT
fJV

+6V FOR CCITT ---+5V FOR EtA

OUTPUT

-6V FOR CCITT

-5V FOR EtA

K696-$44
148

HARDWARE SUMMARY TABLE

FUNCTION

PRODUCT

Accessories for Interface

Modules (K5XX, K6XX)

K716
K724
K782

.8 Terminals

K784

8 Termianls with Diodes

K730
K731
K732
K741
K743

10 VDC and approx 16VDC

1 Amp ~egulator
2 Amp Slave Regulator
2 Amp Transformer
3 Amp Transformer with
Auxiliary Winding
5 Amp Low Ripple Supply
NIXIE Supply

Power

H710
K771
Mounting Hardware and
Connectors

K940
K941
K943

Interface Block
Interface Shell, Power wiring only

K980
K982
1907
H001
H920
H800
H802

Mounting Foot for K941

Mounting Bar
64 Module 19" X 5%"
Mounting Panel
End Brackets
Mounting Panel
Hold-Down and Cover
Cover Supports
Module Mounting Drawer
8-Connector Block
Single Connector

Wiring Aids

913
914
932
934
H810
H812

Grip Clip LogiG Wiring Patchords

Power Wiring Jumpers
Bussing Strip
Wire for Wrapping
Pistol Grip Hand Wire-Wrap Tool
Unwrapping Tool

Miscellaneous

K791
W980
W992
W993
H830
K080
W021
W023
W028

Test Probe
Module Extender
Clad Board, Single Size
Clad Board, Double Size
Handle Riveting Tool for Clad Boards
Cable Connector
Cable Connector, Logic Only
Cable Connector, Logic and Power
Cable Connector, Component Lugs

149

INTERFACE BLOCK

IIi<l

"'-_ _ _ _ _ _
K_71_6__________

An important hardware feature of the K Series system is the K716 Interface

by electricians. The logic modules interconnect to the K716 by plug-in ribbon
cables.
120
VAC

CONTROL
LOGIC

LOGIC DECISIONS
AND, OR. NAND.
NOR, EXCLLlaIVE
OR, DECODING,
~ARISON

SEQUENCING COUNTING
CONTROL FLiP-FLOf'S
BlNARV, BCD
UP/DOWN COUNTERS

SCAtlNEAS
SHIFT REGISTERS

AC.ot'ERATED
VALVES,
SOLENOIDS,
MOTORS,
MOTOR
STARTERS,
HEATERS,
LIGHTING

TIMERS
RATE MUL T"LlERS

~
BUILT -IN NIXIE
BCODISPt.AVS

DCOI't/IATED
STEPPING
MOTORS,
SOLENOIDS,
MOTORS,
ACTUATORS,
INOICATORS

LATCHING RETENTIVE

FIXED MEMORY

TYPICAL CONTROL APPLICATIONS FOR K SERIES MODULES

INTERFACED BY K716
Contacts: Ordinary silver contacts of the kind found in limit switches, pressure
switches, and push buttons work best when operated with healthy levels of
both line voltage and load current. The sparking that results prevents buildup
of contact surface contamination. To assur~ reliable switching. isolation
transformers in the K716 provide a reactive load for switched 120 vac pilot
voltages. The K508 AC Input Converter ignores contact bounce. Hash filters
in the module. and attenuation in the isolation transformer built into the
K716, reduce electrical noise. Built-in indicators permit quick maintenance
checks.
The K716 Interface Block serves as an interconnection interface for those
K Series modul~s that communicate with external equipment. External field
wiring terminates at a 24-terminal screw connection block that accepts plain
stripped wire up to 14 guage. No separate crimped or soldered terminals are
required.
K716-$75

150

0----.---.,

,.-----j----O R

souu

::=t~""

~.-e:~~"

P.R

~-

R5

I!;)

1I~---~
~:~~NALS

j
1!-J

:
0--

-OMN

r----o
0

I(

A.B,C

g~:
:,0
_ "

SOCKE:T
A

ST

l"
K716 INTERFACE BLOCK- SCHEMATIC
Ribbon cables from the K Series interface modules connect to printed circuit
board sockets on the K716. This allows the K716 terminal block to mount on
the rear panel of a NEMA enclosure for the convenience of electricians, while
the digital system itself mounts on the door for easy access to both modules
and logic wiring. The ribbon cable makes neat, simple wiring layouts and easy
flexing at the hinge.
The three sockets in the K716 terminal block contain the same modulf[!connector system used for the modules themselves, permitting quick disconnect of the entire logic system without affecting reliability. This arrangement,
together with the K940K941 bolt-on mounting hardware, allows initial checkout of control systems away from the site, as well as minimizing downtime in
case of failure. (See Construction Recommendations.) The cable sockets ha.ve
the same reliable gold contacts as K Series module sockets.
Socket B, for use with the K508 AC input converter, is fed by eight isolation,
stepdown and contact loading transfomers contained within the aluminum
shell of the ~716. The transformer primaries receive 120volt pilot signals
from external contact closures. Each input is monitored by a neon indicator.
Sockets A and C are for use with K524, K604, and K644. Neon indictors are
provided to monitor the outputs of the K604 Isolated AC Switch module.

151

PROJECTS S 112"
ABOVE MOUNTING
SURFACE
2

3
4

1&1

iii
en

2
0

10

II::

r-RIBBON
CABLES
FROM
MODULES

I
I

IL.

"

12
CONNECTOR
MODULES:
A IN FRONT,
B,C,D BEHIND

SPACE
FOR
TERMINAL
MARKING

12 112. MTG.
CTRS.

13OVERA(L

13
14

L __

IS

CI

16

Cl.
Cl.

17

II::

CI

en

18

1&1

II::

19
20
21
22
23

ICLEARANCE
REQUIRED

. . .____ ;-2.~
K716 INTERFACE BLOCK
FRONT VIEW

The drawing above shows approximate dimensions of the K716. Mounting

slots clear no. 10 screws and allow compensation for mounting screw location tolerances. See first Application Note "Construction Recommendations."
152

All neon indicators are located within the K716 shell, visible at the rear of
associated screw terminals.
Socket D. normally terminated by a shoting plug, runs all return lines from
connector C to a common point. If the shorting plug is removed, indepen
deht wiring of connector C return leads for K524 or K604 modules is possi
ble. A W03306FW033 cable connector ($15) must be installed between
socket 0 and socket A. An extra 2inch clearance is required by this connector
board. Independent wiring provides connections for four two-wire circuits
instead of 8 circuits with bussed returns.
Below is a recommended mounting pattern for combining many interlace
blocks. This pattern can be extended provided the 30" reach of ribbon is
not exceeded.
.
WIRING TROUGH

l ~~~~~~

[Ji
LOGIC

----+---+--..

DOOR~PANEL
HINGE

WIRING TROUGH

K716'S IN INDIVIDUAL ENCLOSURE

153

INTERFACE SHEll

I~

K_72_4_ _ _ _ _...J

1..--.,;..._ _ _ _ _

Unlike the K716 Interface Block, the K724 Interface Shell does not contain
any electronic components. Instead, it provides the connectors and the
mechanical support for self-contained interface modules K578, K614,
K615, K650, K652, K656 and K658. Up to four K578, K614 or K615
modules or two K650, K652, K656 or K658 modules may be installed, with
eight module socke~~ remaining for decoding or gating modules. The limit of
two DC Driver modules is due to the fact that they cannot be reversed in
their connector sockets.
Convenient wiring channels are obtained between units if they are mounted
on 12" centers vertically and 6" centers horizontally. This way a total of upto 32 input converters and 16 output converters fit in one square foot of
panel space, along with up to 16 logic modules.
The K724 provides only logic power and ground connections between all but
two sockets. It is primarily intended for very simple logic systems or for large
systems where all input and output logic levels are connected to a separate
logic unit by connector cables.

K724-$55
154

GENERAL PURPOSE MODULE

K730

12.6V
TRANSFORMER

~II

T\

APPROX}
1 - - - - 16
VDC FAST-ON TABS

--~

FAST-ON

RECTIFIER
AND
SENSING
CIRCUITS

K730

1----

10 VDC

I--_ _
F -f

OR
SOLDER LUGS

LINE SYNC

1--_~E-f~5 OK

LEVEL

...-_ _
0-115 TURN ON

The K730 is a general purpose module that can be used with any +5 volt
power supply to generate the turn on and power OK signals that are normally
provided by the K731.
If an external 12.6 volt transformer is connected to the fast-on tabs at the
handle end of the module, a 2 amp diode bridge power supply and a line
sync will also be available. (line sync will not operate without a load on
either DC output).
The line sync output on pin F allows a K1l3 or K123 gate to switch in
synchronism with ac supply zero crossings. This permits the line frequency
to drive a realtime clock, or serve as the standard in a phase-locked loop with,
K303 timers, where higher frequencies must be synchronized with the line.
Line sync fanout is limited to 1 ma (for high fanout, use K113 or K123
for distribution).
The bridge power supply has two separate fused outputs; approximately
16 VDC and 10 VDC. The direct (Jutput is fused for 2 amps and the diode
string output is fused for % amps. The diode string output may be used with
the K580 switch filter as a source of +10 yolts for contact sening. Space is
provided on the board for an electrolytic capacitor to be added if a filtered
supply is desired. All supply outputs are brought out through fast-on tabs at
the handle end of the module. The auxiliary winding on the K743 transformer
may be used, however, any 12.6 VAC transformer may be used as long as it
does not have a grounded center tap.
The turn-on output on pin D goes to ground during the power-up transient,
and remains at ground until at least 30 ms after the supply voltage has
reached its quiescent value. It may be used to initialize the flipflops to a
known voltage.
The OK level output (pin E) goes to ground when the +5 VDC supply voltage
at pin A reaches 4.5 volts, and returns positive when less than 4.5 volts 1s
available. It is normally used as an enabling input to the K273 Retentive
Memory module.
K730-$19

155

12.6 VAC

FAST-ON TAB
CONNECTIONS
EIGHT

SILICON
0100ES
IN400 ETC
A

3/4 AMP
FUSE

APPROX
16 VOC

GETTING APPROXIMATELY +16 VDe AND +10 VDe

FROM K730

156

I~

SOURCE MODULE

' -_ _ _ _ _K_73_1_ _ _ _ _.....

lZ.6VCT
TRANSFORMER

NEMA

~1U"~ ~- _-__-_

C --------,A

RECTIFIER AND
REGULATOR
K731

SENSING OUTPUT
(TO K732)

12.6VCT
TRANSFORMER

MIL

~~II~~~~ ~~

+5VOC. 1AMPERE

l'LiImON
OK LEVEL
LINE SYNC

SENSING OUTPUT
(TO K73Z)
(TRIPLE THICKNESS MODULE)

TRIPLE THICKNESS

The K731 supplies +5 volt DC power to pin A of all K Series modules and
provides several specialized o"nce-per-system control functions. Any source of
center-tapped 12.6 v (50 or 60 Hz) allows the K731 to deliver up to 1 amp dc,
which is sufficient to operate most typical control systems of up to 32
modules. The K731 is short-circuit proof.
This module i~ normally plugged into one of the innermost sockets on a K941
mounting bar, where its large components occupy space otherwise unused.
The turn-on output goes to ground during the p~wer-up transient, and remains
at ground until after the supply voltage has fully reached its quiescent value.
It may be used to initialize flip-flops to a known starting condition.
The OK level output goes to ground when the supply voltage reaches 90% of
its final value, and returns positive when less than 90% of full voltage is
available. It is normally used as an enabling input to the K273 Retentive
Memory module.
.
The line sync output allows a K113 or K123 gate to switch in synchronism
with ac supply zero-crossings. This permits the line frequency to drive a real
K731-$30

157

time clock, or serve as the standard in a phase-locked loop with K303 timers,
where higher frequencies must be synchronized with the line. line sync fanout is limited to 1 ma (for high fanout, use K113 or K123 for distribution).
None of the K731 logic outputs may be used to obtain the OR function, and
they may not be wired to any other output.
K731 delivers up to 1 ampere when used with a 12.6 volt tranformer rated
for 105130 volt line. For 5% input voltage reduction (12.0v tranformer or
100 volt line) the output current capability decreases 10%.
The K731 can also be used with M Series modules provided overvoltage
protection is not necessary, since voltage regulation is 5%.

158

l_______
_

PO
__W_E_R_S_U_P_PL_Y
______
H710

POWER
SOPPLY

The H710 power supply is ruggedly built, low cost, regulated, floating output,
five volt power supply that can be mounted in an H920 chassis drawer or
used as a free standing unit.
INPUT VOLTAGE: 105125 VAC
or 210250 VAC 47-63 HZ

OUTPUT VOLTAGE:
5 vdc.

POp RIPPLE
Less than 20 mv_

OUTPUT CURRENT:
0-5 amps, short-circuit protected for parallel supply operation.
LINE AND LOAD REGULATION:
_
The output voltage will not vary more than 50 mv. over the full range of load
current and line voltage.
REMOTE SENSING:
Remote sensing is provided to correct for loss due to long lines. These
sensing inputs should be connected to the most distant point on the +5 and
ground buss system. When shipped from the factory, the remote sensing in"
puts are jumpered to their respective o~tputs. These leads are especially use
ful in systems that require maximum repeatability from K303 timers in the
millisecond region.

OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION:
The output is protected from transients which exceed 6.9 volts for more than
10 nsec. However, the output is not protected against long shorts to voltages
a,bove 6.9 volts.

H710-$200

159

IrI<l

SLAVE REGULATOR

K73 2
_ -------'

L . . -_ _ _ _ __

NEMA
12.6VAC
CT
U
,--.......- - -.....--1

-i2Oj

+5VDC, 3 AMPS
(TO PIN A,
ALL MODULES)

C
K731

TURN ON

OK LEVEL
SENSING
LEVEL

LINE SYNC

r - .......+-Hf-----~------~......

d7

S
A

GROUND
(TO PIN C,
ALL MODULES)

K732
SLAVE
REGULATOR

* HASH FILTERS
(SEE CONSTRUCTION
RECOMMENDATIONS)

FOUR MODULES THICK

This module is normally tied to corresponding pins A,C,S,U, and Vof a K731
Source. For each unit of current emitted by the K731, the K732 emits two.
Up to three K732 slaves can be controlled by a single K731 for a total system
current of 7 amperes.
In high-current systems, use short heavy wires for transformer secondary
connections. Loss of 5% of secondary voltage in either ground return or
transformer output leads will reduce regulator current ratings more than 10%.
Tabs near the handle end of the K732 may be connected to K741 or K743
transformers by using convenient 914 Power Jumpers. Then by wiring pins U
and V to corresponding pins on K731, AC connections are provided through
theK732 to the source modulp.. To avoid loss of regulation, do not connect a
K732 until enough modules have been plugged in to draw a reasonable current (several hundred milliamperes).
For self contained low-ripple supplies see H710, and H716.
/

K732-$27

160

MIL
'2.6VAC
CT

TuRN'ON

K731

VAC

1'*

OK LEVEL
SENSING
LEVEL

r -

rh

* HASH FILTERS
(SEE CONSTRUCTION

LINE SYNC

GROUND
(TO PIN C,
ALL MODULES)
A

+5VDC, 3 AMPS
(TO PIN A,
ALL MOOULES)

K732
SLAVE
REGULATOR

RECOMMENDATIONS)

FOUR MODULES THICK

One K731 plus up to 3K732 can provide from 1 'to 7 amperes at +5v.

161

MODULE CHARACTERISTICS

MODULE HEIGHT

.....

THICKNESS

NUMBER
CIRCUITS

UNIQUE CHARACTERISTICS

CURRENT
REQUIREMENTS
(Ma)

PRICE

KOO3

,3

No drive capability, for expansion only

$ 5

K012

No drive capability, for expansion only

12

$ 8

K026

No drive capability, for expansion only

$ 8

K028

No drive capability, Pin C should not be bussed

to ground unless B-C function is not used.

$ 8

K080

Cable connector.

$ 3

K1l2

1 KHz maximum speed with slowdown on one

circuit to 50Hz; both, AND and OR expandable

17

$12

K1l3

AND and OR expandable; slowdown on one circuit to 5KHz

17

$11

K'122

1 KHz maximum speed with slowdown on one

circuit to 50Hz; both AND and OR expandable

18

$13

K123

Both AND and OR expandable; slowdown on

one circuit to 5KHz

18

$12

K124

Not expandable; slowdown on one circuit to

5KHz.

'21

$14

K134

Common AND input; can only be AND ex-,

panded

23

$13

K135

Common ANI;> input; can only be OR expanded

Pin K Fan-in varies

22

$13

0'1

--

MODULE CHARACTERISTICS

MODULE HEIGHT

....m
w

THICKNESS

NUMBER
CIRCUITS

UNIQUE CHARACTERISTICS

CURRtNT
REQUIREMENTS
(Ma)

PRICE

K138

Single input inverters

28

$24

K161

Slowdown on zero output only; 'inputs need 0

and +5 volt levels

45

$25

K171

Output has no drive capability and must be

connected to ,an' AND expansion node of any
gate

16

$13

KI74

Output has no drive capability and f)1ust be connected to the OR expansion node/of any gate

12

$24

KI84

Capacitance added to Pin J for pulse width vari.

ation

56

$25

K201

Temperature range 0 to 65C; 1KHz maximum

speed

130

$39

K202

Temperature range 0 to 65C; slowdown provided on Pin B

120

$2?

K206

Temperature range 0 to 65C; common read- .

IN enable

50

$20

K210

Temperature range 0 to 65C

150

$27

K211

Temperat'ure range 0 to 65C

60

$20

K220

Temperature range 0 to 65C; only logic "l's"

can be preset using the read-in inputs

220

$55

, K230

Temperature range 0 to 65 DC; only logic "1's"

can be preset, all pin connections on upper half

150

$40

---_ .. -

MODULE HEIGHT

K271

.~

THICKNESS

NUMBER
CIRCUITS

UN.IQUE CHARACTERISTICS

CURRENT
REQUIREMENTS
(Ma)

PRICE

Maximum angle from vertical of 30

40

$40

50

$85

K273

Maximum angle from vertic~1 of 30

K281

Contains eight four-bit words

$10

K282

Contains eight 16-bit words

$40

K301

Double thickness with timer- control mounted.

Connect pins P and S for ONE SHOT

15

$15

K303

Double thickness with timer control mounted.

30

$27

K323

Double thickness with timer control mounted.

35

$35

K333

Split lugs for mounting delay capacitors

29

$23

K371

When three controls are mounted on a module.

that module must go at the- ehd of a K941
mounting bar

$11

$11

K373

K374

$15
$11

K375
K376
I

K378
K410

$15

$15
1

Pin connections made on B connector half.

Lamps are Hudson # 2309, 10 volt 40Ma rated
Module requires 120VCT 5060 cps
--------~

--------

200

$18

MODULE HEIGHT

THICKNESS

NUMBER
CIRCUITS
UNIQUE CHARACTERISTICS

<.n

PRICE

K415

'2

Pin connections made on B connector half.

Illegal number inputs (11-15) light two numeral
filaments. Module requires 12.6VAC 5060 cps
at 80Ma capability

43

$46

K420

Pin connections made on B connector half

17

$33

K422

Pin connections made on B connector half; outputs have no drive capability and are AND expansion inputs only

$27

K424

Pin connections made on B connector half output has no drive capability and can be used as
an expansion input only

$27

K432

Pin connections made on B connector half;

optional third circuit available if customer inserts components

$33

K501

Provides 1 volt of hysteresis

45

$25

65

$44

.....

0\

CURRENT
REQUIREMENTS
(Ma)

K508

Module has a 30" ribbon cable and cable connector board which is triple thickness

K522

Solder lugs are made for inputs

25

$25

K524

Module includes a 30" ribbon cable and single

height connector board

35

$98

K531

All pin connections on A connector half

50

$70

K578

Module may be reversed in socket. Neon indicators are effective for 90VDC and above. AC
inputs made to clamp-type terminals.

$80

MODULE HEIGHT

0\
0\

NUMBER
CIRCUITS

UNIQUE CHARACTERISTICS

CURRENT
REQUIREMENTS
(Ma)

PRICE

$28
$20

K580

Input connections are made to solder lugs

(uses separate supply)

K581

Input connections are made to solder lugs.

+5VDC must be applied to Pin A. Current required per contact closed

22

K596

Temperature range 0 to 65

30

K604

THICKNESS

K614

K615

4
\

K644

Module includes a 30" ribbon cable and connector board. Current with all circuits off
Additional current per circuit on
Module may be reversed in socket. Neon indicators are effective for 90VOC and above.
AC input connections are clamp-type connecCurrent with all circuits off
tors
Additional current per circuit on
Module may be reversed in socket. Neon \ndicators are effective for 90VDC and above.
AC input connections are Clamp-type connectors
Current with all circuits off
Additional current per circuit o~
Module includes a 30" ribbon cable and connector board for outputs.
Current with all circuits off
Additional current per circuit on
--

$20
$110

40
20

$88
40
20
$92
56
28

.
$66

10
160

MODULE

K650

K652

K656

HEIGHT THICKNESS

NUMBER
CIRCUITS
4

0'1
""-J

K65B

K671

CURRENT
REQUIREMENTS
(Ma)

UNIQUE CHARACTERISTICS

$40

DC output connections are clamp-type connectors

Current with all circuits off
Additional current per circuit on

160

DC output connections are clamp-type connec

tors
Current with all circuits off
Additional current per circuit on

10
160

Clamp-type output connections. Neon indicators

effective for 90VDC and above.
Current with all circuits off
Additional current per circuit on
Clamp-type output connections. Neon indicators
effective for 90VDC and above.
Current with all circuits off
Additional current p( r circuit on

PRICE

B
$50

$80
10
160
$128
10
350

Two part module with one foot ribbon cable

13

$55

K6Bl

Solder lugs for output connections

16

$15

K683

Solder lugS for output

conn~ctions

160

$30

K696

Requires 6.3 VAC 50-60 cps

$44

K730

Requires 12_6 VAC for 16VDC and 10VDC

34

$19

..

POWER TRANSFORMERS
K74i, K743

12.6VCT
FOR K731.

K732

K741 TRANSFORMER WITH FILTER

li

BlK

GRN~
0

GRNlYEL
..

12.6VAC CT CQ) 3 AMPS

FOR K731, K732

GRN

230
V/'lC

ORO

~""'--4i~__._.....;O;;.;.R""D

12.6VAC@3AMPS

K743 TRANSFORMER WITH FILTER

These hash-filtered, 50/60 Hz transformers supply K731 Source and K732
Slave Regulator modules. The K743 also provides an auxiliary winding for
use with K580 Dry Contart Filters, K681 or K683 Lamp Drivers (requires
additional bridge rectifier) and the K730 Source Module. Type 914 Power
Jumpers are convenient for connecting to tab terminals on these transformers
and on the K732 and K943. Both transformers have holes at the corners of
the chassis plate for mounting on K980 end plates:
PLATE DIMENSIONS
K741
K743

31h"x5"
4'l's" x 4'l's"

HOLE CENTERS MATCHING K980 Ctrs.

2%" x 3%"
4" x 3 3/ 8 "

2%"
4"

The K741 is sufficiently light in weight to be mounted on one side-only, as at

the end of a K943 mounting pane\.

K741-$30
K743-$45
168-

The table below shows how to obtain various currents. Line voltages within
10% from nominal and short, heavy secondary wires are assumed. One
K73l is required in each case.

60 Hz

50 Hz

K732

O.llA
0.5-2A
1-3A
2-4A
3-5A
4-6A
5-7A

O.IO.8A
O.4-1.6A
O.8-2.4A
l.6-3.2A
2.4- 4A
3.2-4.8A
45.6A

0
1
1
2
2
3
3

'\.

K743'

169

TRANSFORMER

2
2
3
3
4

K741 or K743
K74l or K743
K741s or K743
K74ls or 2 K743s
K74ls or 2 K743s
K74ls or 2 K743s
K74ls or 3 K743s

DISPLAY SUPPLY

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _K_7_71_ _ _ _ _- '

f4-------

r-t<l

2 3/4"---/

(SHOWN WITH 3 K611'Sl

Shown above from the viewing side, the K771 supplies power and a convenient two-screw mounting for up to 6 K671 display tubes. Display tubes are
stacked to the left, the first tube board being attached to the K771. The second tube board attaches to the first, and so on. Board mounting screws provide both mechanical mounting and electrical power connections. The two
panel mounting screw locations dimensioned above have no. 6 steel threaded
inserts. Several I" high holes using a standard chassis punch may be cut on
0.8" centers for viewing display tubes. To seal opening against dust, a 3" by
3-6" piece of Lucite or Plexiglas@ may be assembled between display and
mounting surface. Power 120 VAC enters the supply from a terminal strip at
the rear. Total depth behind mounting surface: 4".
K771-$35

TEST PROBE
' -_ _ _ _ _
K7_9_1_ _ _ _ _
1/
-

RED

>1

1/

K731 U,V ~

BLACK
ANY PIN C

HIGH

LDW

I "_ _ _----'

K791 TEST PROBE

IIKl

~~

'~T)I
.
~

"(
./

This pocket test probe contains two pulse-stretching lamp drivers for visual
indication of both transient and steady-state conditions. Neither indicator
lights on an open circuit. A built-in test point illuminator adds convenience.
The probe introduces negligible loading of the point under observation. The
black wire connects to any pin C. The red wire gets ac power from the system
supply transformer, pin U or V of K731. Probe is hollow and fits unwrapped
end of H800W pins for hands-off lise if desired.
K791-$40
170

IIKl

TERMINALS

_ _ _ _ _ _ _K_7_82_,_K_7_84_ _ _ _ _---I
CLAMPTYPE
TERMINALS

CONNECTOR
PINS

SPLIT
LUGS

~
0 - - - - -~

leJ---

CLAMPTYPE
TERMINALS

TRANSIENT
SUPPRESSION
DIODE

SPLIT

CONNECTOR

AA

AA

8A

SA

AC

AC

8e

BC

0~~AE
-----v..r

AE

68E

BE

0f-------~
AH
-x.r~-6BH

.--~::

5~

'~~.

8M

0--~

~-.......

0---------.-.......~

~a =i~~.

BP

~-t:

~AP

AP

~~::

~AS

'~BS

9@---j ~:~
CHASSIS GROUND

"(CONNECT TO LOAD SUPPLY)

K782

K784

DOUBLE THICKNESS
DOUBLE HEIGHT

DOUBLE THICKNESS
DOUBLE HEIGHT

These two double size modules offer an alternative to the K716 for obtaining
field wiring connections in K series systems. The K782 has straight-through
connections for use with K524, K508, K604, or K644 modules. The K784
includes 60 v clamp diodes for protection of K681 or K683 modules driving
inductive loads. Strain relief holes and split lugs on both boards adapt them
for such modules as K580 and K683 where 9-conductor ribbon or individual
wires will be used.
Connector ptns are also provided, so the connector board of types like K524
or K604 can be plugged into a shared H800-F block and bussed connections
used.
The photo at right shows one way that these modules may be mounted, by
bolting through the holes provided and mounting on K980 brackets. The
attachment of a K743 transformer to the K980 is also shown here.

K782-$12
K784-$17
171

K782 TERMINAL

K782 TERMINALS WITH

K743 AND K980

172

MOUNTING HARDWARE
K940, K941

r-~=-;:~:.
I

I,'

K SERIES MOOULE
ITOP VIEW)

:::':.::.-:.:-:: :=--.:----------=-=-=== =:.:f - - - - - -1:

I

L..J......

I
I

H_

I
:

I
I

I
I

IL. ______ JI

r------I

~
I

I
I

I
I

CUTOFF

SUIII'I.US

HIOO

L_____ :

TOPYIEW

H_
CONNECTOfI
8LOCK

"MODULE
SLOTS\

KM'

GUIOE PIN

'~ICK

_ _ LV

TWO &/".. HEAO MOUNTING 80L T8

EQUIPMENT IiIOUMTING PANEL

FRONT

This convenient mounting hardware permits logic connector pin wiring to be

done before logic is installed in the enclosure.
K940 is a mounting support that attaches to the enclosure. K941 is a removable bracket that mounts up to four H800 connector blocks. Any connections
to external equipment are made through the ribbon connectors of interface
signal modules (K508, K524, K604, K644) to the K716 Interface Block..
An installation of KSeries equipment in a NEMA-12 Enclosure is illustrated
on the next page.

K94o-$4
K941-$6
173

K716

MER'-ACE
BLOCK

~ '/4

IN.

I
I
I

>~,~~"
H800

I
I

'01lZIN

(LESS 2 IN fOR
EACH H800 OMITTED
IF SURPLUS K941

MOU"TING BAR
IS CUT OFF)

JOIN
CABLES
FROM

K116

2 BOLTS
5116 IN HEAD

~Of\llL

61N FROM FLANGE

K940, K941 WITH K716 IN A NEMA12 ENCLOSURE,

16 IN. DEEP
TOP VIEW

174

19" MOUNTING PANEL

K943R, K943S

These low cpst, 19" panels have sixty four, 18 pin connector sockets with
either wire-wrap (S) or solder fork (R) contact pins. Each panel is shipped
with connector blocks installed and pins A and C bussed.
No terminal strips are included in the K943, since power regulators K731
and K732 will normally be plugged in to make power connections. If holddown is required to prevent modules from backing out under vibration, order
a pair of end plates K980. These assemble by means of added nuts on the
rear of the rack mount screws. They accept the painted 1907 cover plate,
making a hold-down system that contacts the module handles and can allow
flexprint cables to be threaded neatly out the end. Rack space: 5 1/4". See
photos showing K943-S, K980, 1907, and HOO!.

1907

K943R-$96
K943S-$96

175

MOUNTING PANEL
_
H914
"-_
_ _ _ _ H913,
_- -------'

HARDWA_RE

The H913 panel houses a 5v regulated supply and four low density H80S connector blocks. This allows 16 of either A, K, M, or W series modules to be
used. Electrical and mechanical characteristics are given below.
The H914 panel houses a low density HaOS connector blocks. The panel will
hold 32 of either A, K, M, or.W series modules. It can be used for expanding
slot capacity in conjunction with H913 'or alone using other options of voltage
supply, e.g. K731, K732 combinations. Mechanical characteristics are like
those of K943.

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
fNPUT VOLTAGE:
105-125 VAC or 210-250 VAC
47-63 Hz
OUTPUT VOLTAGE:
5vdc
OUTPUT CURRENT:
0-5 amps. short-circuit protected
for parallel supply operation

OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION:
The output is protected from transients
which exceed 6.9 volts for more than
10 nsec. However, the output is not
protected against long shorts to voltages above 6.9 volts.

MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PANEL WIDTH: 19 in.
PANEL HEIGHT: 5~6 in.
DEPTH: 16 3A in.
FINISH: Chromicoat
POWER INPUT CONNECTIONS:
Screw terminals

Provided on transformer
MODULES ACCOMMODATED: 16
POWER OUTPUT CONNECTIONS:
Barrier strip with screw terminals and
tabs which fit AMP "Faston" receptacle
series 250, part no. 41774 or Type 914
power jumpers.

1945-19 HOLD DOWN BAR: Reduces vibration and keeps modules securely
mounted when panel or system is moved. Adds 'n in. to depth of mounting
panel.

H913-$270
H914-$125

176

MODULAR PANEL HARDWARE

K950

The K950 Magnetic modular panel hardware provides a convenient way to

build control panels containing lights, toggle and push button switches, timer
controls, and thumbwheel switches. The lower connector half of the control
modules K410, K415, K420, K422, K424, and K432 are plugged into the
upper connectors across a K943 mounting panel and the manual controls
protrude through the K950 panel frame. The K410, K420, and K432 modules
are supplied with a precut panel piece that fills fhe panel space for the mod
ule. The K422 and K424 modules do not require a panel piece. Since each
module is covered independently of the next module, any module type can
be plugged into anyone of the available 32 panel socket locations. All panel
hardware is supplied painted black, however, panel pieces may be individually
repainted to give color coded meaning to panel controls. Thumbwheel mod
ules are black plastic and can not be painted.
A control module can be inserted into any socket e,\cept the one directly to
the left of a K422 ad K424 thumbwheel module. For this reason it is recommended that all thumbwheel registers be grouped together in the same sec
tion of the panel to conserve panel locations. Metal spacers of single or
double module width are available to cover unused panel locations.
K9SQ-$39

177

Another control module can not be mounted in the socket next to a K415
Nixie Display- module. These modules can be mounted in every other socket
location to form a neat multi-digit display.
""
The frame and panel pieces are made of steel and are he!d together with
rivets and flexible strip magnets. The frame is mounted in a standard 19
inch rack directly above a socket mounting panel. After the control modules
have been inserted into their chosen socket locations, the steel panel pieces
are snapped into place to cover the modules and unused locations. After the
panel is completely filled, a steel bezel is snapped into place over the panel
pieces and the panel is complete.
The panel hardware can be disassembled at any time to allow controls to be
added or removed.
When the panel is completely assembled, most of the magnetic lines of force
are closed through the steel panel pieces. However, steel dust particles and
filings will still be attracted to the panel surfaces. The magnetic force from
the panel is not strong enough to damage a watch worn by the user. Each
K950 is supplied with 8 single and 8 double spacers to cover up to 24 unused panel locations. The K950 is 3Vz inches in height.

'--_____E_N_D_K_=S_':_T_E_S_ _ _ _

---'

HARDWARE I

Pair of plates for supporting 1907 cover to hold modules in K943 panel
under shock and vibration. (Note: If vibration is anticipated, care must be
taken not to nick logic wires. Use a quality wire stripping device.) Also used
for mounting K741, K743, K782, K784.

K980-$6

___________C_O_l:_:_7R
____________

~I[HARDWAREI

Blue painted or brown tweed painted aluminum cover with captive screws
to mate threaded bushings in K980 and HOOL Adds to appearance while
protecting system against vibration and tampering.

1907-$9
178

MOUNTING PANEL

11K!

K98 2
. a..-_ _ _ _ __ _,- - - - -

The K982 is a predrilled 19" mounting panel on which can be mounted up

to three separate power transformers (K741 or K743).
Transformers can be mounted using either the K980 end brackets for exposed
transformer connections or H002 setback brackets for unexposed transformer connections.

K982-$10
179

TIMER COMPONENT BOARD

~-------------------------------------------

_.J __

~
K

SERIES

K990

b b
_ J I __

<.

The K990 is a predrilled etched module for mounting up to six RC networks

for K301, K303, or K323 timer cont~ls. Any capacitor size up to a "0" case
tantalum can be mounted in the space provided. A trim pot and series resistor
can be mounted in the remaining space. Trimpot adjustments are accessible
from the edge of the module. If the module is not mounted in the top row of
modules in the system, a W980 extender module will be required'to make
trimpot adjustments. Etch layout is for trimpots with a staggered center pin.
Connections to the module can be made either through the pins or through a
cable soldered to split lugs.
Dimensions for trimpot mounting are:

180

K99o-$4

DEC thoroughly tests all finished modules as well as incoming components.

Most of the testing is conducted on computerized equipment such as this
one which performs 100 ac and dc tests in less than 5 seconds on each
module tested.
181

These pantograph-controlled Insertion machines position and crimp

pre-tested components onto four module boards at a time. A press
will cut the modules apart after assembly is completed. minimizmg
handling up to that point.

182

A Series
Analog Modules

,...

183

IAl

POSITIVE LOGIC MULTIPLEXER

~_ _ _ _ _TY_P_E_A_l_23_ _ _ _ _..... ~
R

Ho-~"""

J o-..........-t
L G-H""1....-_--'

s
M o---1....-t______

T
K

0---........

N o--,r;-""L_~
U

v
INPUT OUTPUT TERMINALS
+3V
OV

CONNECTED
OPEN

The A123 Multiplexer provides 4 gated analog switches that are controlled
by logic levels of Ov and +3v. The module is equivalent to a single-pole,
4-position switch, since one output terminal of each MOS FET switch is tied
together. If all three digital inputs of a circuit are at +3v (or not connected)
the two output terminals are connected together. If any digial input is at Ov,
the switch terminals are disconnected. Two switches should not be on at
the same time. The analog switch can handle signals between +lOv and
-lOv, with currents up to 1 rna.
The positive power supply must be between +5v and +15v, and at least
equal to or greater than the most positive excursion of the analog signal.
The negative power supply must be between -5 and -20v, and at least 10
volts more negative than the most negative excursion of the analog signal.
The voltage difference between the two supplies must not be more than 30v.

A123-$58
184

SPECJflCATIONS
Digital Inputs
Logic ONE:
Logic ZERO:
Input loading:

+2.4v to +5.0v
O.Ov to +0.8v
0.5 ma at 0 volts

Analog Signal
Voltage range:
Current (max.):

+10v to -10v
1 ma

Output Switch
1000 ohms
_0 volts
10 na, 10 pf
0.2 '-'sec
0.5 ).Lsec

On resistance, max.:
On offset:
Off leakage, capacitance:
Turn on delay, max.:
Turn off delay, max.:
Power

+5v (pin A):

+v (pin D):
-v

45 ma
18 ma (for +10v)
50 rna (for -20v)

(pin E):

185

HIGH IMPEDANCE MULTIPLEXER

~
_ _ _ _E_XP_A_N_D_ER
_
A160 _ _ _ _----,

~'
SERIES

.------oAHZ
FEEDBACK

INPUT SIGNALS
BUZ

8SZ

NOOE

~---+-----{)(l----+-~

8MZ

AJ2
EXPANSION

NOOE

SKZ

8HZ

IIOAI!O

SIZE
DOIJ8J..E HEIGHT
DOUBl.E WIDTH

ASZ
POWER REQUIREMEPITS
+ISV
-1 !IV
ANALOG GND
+SV
LOGIC GPlD

APZ

I-

CD

C\I

CD

.c

.,

ADI,ADZ
AE1,AEZ
AF1,AF2
AA I,AA2,BAI,BAZ
ACf,AC2,8CI,IICZ

II:

The AI60 is a high impedance multiplexer expander consisting of 8 independent FET channels.
This unit may be used with any of the' DEC high impedance multiplexers to
perform single or double level multiplexing. It also may be used to expand
the channel capabilities of the A162, Al63, and AI64, Multiplexer,
The Al60 is DTL and TTL compatible and may be used with DEC's standard
K and M Series logic modules. Each channel has its own channel selector
driver and may be controlled from an external'source such as a shift register.
clock, or gating function.

AI60-$250
186

Advanced shielding techniques and optimized circuit layout have been

employed in the A160, ensuring stable operation under normal ambient electrostatiC and electromagnetic conditions, as well as allowing minimal crosstalk between channels.

SPECIFICATIONS

Analog Inputs:

8 single ended

Input Voltage Range:

10v. Maximum full scale

Expander Node:

Common point of 8 channels brought

out to a common pin for input to external buffer amplifier

Feedback Input:

Feedback control point of multiplexer

switches connected to output of buffer
amplifier

Input Leakage:

0.5 nano ampere max., per channel

Input Feedthrough Capacity:

4 pf per channel

OFF

Cha~nel

Capacity:

7 pf. per channel, shunt capacity at

common node

ON Resistance of Channel
(Without Buffer):

1000 ohms max.

Max. Input Voltage

15 v.

Switching plus Settling Time:

5 jJ.sec., max., to settle to within .01 %

of full value for full scale excursion
with zero source impedance

Output Range:

Same as input ( 10 VFS)

Transfer Accuracy:

0.01 % of full scale at 25 C.

Selector Input
(Direct into Multiplexer):

One TIL load

ON Level

Logic Zero (0 volts)

OFF Level

Logic One (+3 volts)

187

HIGH IMPEDANCE MULTIPLEXER WITH

~_ _ _O_U_TP_U_T_BU_F_F_ER______
At61

~
SERI,ES

INPUT SIGNALS
~2o-----------;X~~--~

852 o--I-------{)o--+--~

8P2 o-~H-----{)<r--+--~

8K2

o--t-t-t+----oo--+---1

8HZ

o--t-t-+++---{)Q--+---1

'---------oAJ2
EX .... NStON

NOllE
BOARO SIZE

DCJUa.E HE tGHT
OOU8LE WIDTH
A52 o--+-+-+++4-~O---+---"'"
POWER REQUIREMENTS
+1~V
-1~V

ANALOG GNO
+~V

LOGIC GNO

....

G)

...

A01.A02
AE1.AE2
AF1.AF2
AA1.AA2.8Al.8A2
AC1,AC2.ecl,1IC2

II:
<C

The A161 is a high impedance multiplexer consisting of 8 independent FET

switched channels and a noninverting unity gain follower amplifier, designed
for application where accuracy, high speed, and high input independance are
prime requirements.
This unit is DTL and TTL compatible and may be used with DEC K and M
Series logic modules. It will also provide excellent performance with systems
employing sample and holds, high speed multiplexing, 0/ A converters, as
well as single and double level multiplexing.
Provided on the A161 are eight channel select lines, which may be controlled
from an external source such as a shift register, clock, or gating function.
A161-$375

188

The A161 has been- engineered and factory adjusted to provide rated performance. It also employs advanced shielding techniques and optimized circuit
layout, ensuring stable operation under normal ambient electrostatic and electromagnetic conditions, as well as allowing minimal crosstalk between
channels.
The A161 has the capability of output channel expansion simply by typing
in the A160 or A162 Multiplexer Expanders.

SPECIFICATIONS
Analog inputs:

8 single ended

Input voltage range:

10 v. Maximum full scale

Expander node:

Common point of 8 channels brought

out to pin as well as to input of buffer
amplifier.

Input leakage:

0.5 nano ampere, max., per channel

Input feedthrough capacity:

4pf per channel

OFF channel capacity:

7 pf per channel, shunt capacity at

common node

Series ON resistance of channel:

1000 ohms max .

..shunt ON Resistance to ground:

10 ohms min.

Switching plus settling time:

5 J.Lsec., max., to settle to within .01 %

of final value for full scale excursion
with zero source impedance

Fault protection:

Current limiting to 10 rna. provided

Max. Input Voltage

(Without Damage):

15 v.

Output Range:

Same as input ( 10 VFS)

Output Current:

20 rna., maximum

Output Protection:

Short circuit protection, indefinitely to

ground

Amplifier Offset:

Adjustable to zero

Transfer Accuracy:

0.01 % of full scale at 25

o

Temp. Coefficient:

30 JA,v/

Selection Inputs
(Direct into Multiplexer):

One TTL Load

C.

ON Level:

Logic Zero

OFF Level:

Logic One

Power Requirements:

15 v. at 35 rna.

189

c.

HIGH IMPEDANCE MULTIPLEXER

WITH DECODER
A162
,------QAHZ

INPUT SIGNALS
~2o-----------~~-4--~

FE~CK ,

852

O-~------~~--+-~

11M2

o---t-t-1I------{)()---+----<~-_o

AJ2
EXIWISION
NOOE

IIOMO SIZE

OOUIILE HEIGHT

OOU8l.E wmH

AS2 o---t-t-1I-+I-+---{)(}---+----+
POWER REOUIftEMENIS
+'5V
-15V
ANAl.OG GNO
+5V
LOGIC GNO

8FI

IF2

AO'.A02

AE' .AE2
AF AF2
AAI.M2.BA'.SA2
AC!.AC2.8CI.8C2

AVI

The A162 is a high impedance multiplexer with decoder consisting of 8 independent FET switched channels. Included on this module is a gated binary
to octal decoder for selecting any of the eight high speed channels.
The A162 may be used as a stand-alone multiplexer or with any of the high
impedance multiplexers to perform single or double fevel multiplexing. It
also may be used as an expander to increase the channel capabilities of the
A163 or A164. Multiplexers.
This unit has been engineered and factory adjusted to provide rated performance. and is fully compatible with DTL and TTL systems.

A162-$270
190

The A162 employs advanced shielding techniques and optimized circuit layout, ensuring stable operation under normal ambient electrostatic and electromagnetic conditions, as well as allowing minimal crosstalk between channels.
SPECIFICATIONS
Analog Inputs:

8 Single Ended

Input Voltage Range:

10 v. Maximum full scale

Expander Node:

Common point of 8 channels brought

out to a common pin for connection to
the input of the external buffer amp.

Feedback Input:

Feedback control. point of multiplexer

switches connected to output of buffer
amplifier.

Input Leakage:

0.5 nano ampere, max., per channel

Input Feedthrough Capacity:

4 pf per channel

OFF Channel Capacity:

7 pf per channel, shunt capacity at

common node

ON Resistance of Channel
(Without Buffer):

1000 ohms max.

Switching Plus Settling Time:

5 IJ.sec., max., to settle to within .01 %

of final value for full scale excursion
with zero source impedance

Decoder
Decoder:

One of 8 Jines, decoded, binary

Decoder Outputs:

Select: Logic zero

De-select: Logic one

Decoder InputsAO IN to A2 IN:

Address lines
One TTL Load
High
One

Decoder Gate Input:

Logic zero enables decoder out

Fault Protection:

Current limiting to 10 rna provided

Max. Input Voltage

(Without DaDmage):

15 v.

Output Range:

Same as input ( 10 VFS)

Power Requirements:

15 v. at 35 rna.
+5 v. at 30 mao (with decoder option)

191

HIGH IMPEDANCE MULTIPLEXER WITH

~_ _D_EC_'O_D_E_R_A_N_D_BU_F_F_ER
_ _---,
A163

Q;J
SERIES

INPUT $IGPfAtS

W2~O--------~~+-~

I.
II
I

~
....

'

AH2

OUTPUT

4J'

EX""N$ION
NOllE

OOl8l.E MEtGM'

DOUILE WIDTH

POWER RQuIREMEtrfTS

A~A\.OG

.. '5\1
-15Y

At,A2

GHO

AFI.AF2

+SV
LOGK: GNO

AOt. A02

AAI,AAZ.BAt.8Al
A.Ct ,ACZ,lCt.ICZ

D<XlOEA

OUTPUT

8F'

1IF2

"VI

The Al63 is a. high impedance multiplexer consisting of 8 FET switched

channels, a noninverting unity gain follower amplifier, and an 8 bit binary to
octal decoder for channel selecting.
This unit was designed for application where accuracy, speed, and high input
impedance are important factors. It also may be used in systems which
employ sample and holds, 01 A converters, and high speed multiplexing.
Provided on the A163 is an expansion node, which when used in conjunction
with either of the high impedance multiplexer expanders (A160, A162) will
provide additional input channels.
The A16~ is fully compatible wiht OTL and TTL logic levels and may be used
with DEC's standard K and M Series digital logic modules.
This module has been engineered and factory adjusted to provide proper
operation over the specified range.
Optimized circuit layout has been employed in the packaging of the A163
ensuring minimal crosstalk between channels. Advanced shielding techniques
A 163-$395

192

of the switching circuitry' have been used to allow proper operation under
normal ambient electrostatic and electromagnetic conditions.
SPECIFICATION
No. of Inputs:

8 Single Ended

Input Voltage Range:

+: 10 v. maximum full scale

Input Leakage:

COlllmon point of 8 channels brought

out to pin as well as to input of buffer
amplifier
0.5 nano ampere, max., per channel

Input Feedthrough Capacity:

4 pf per channel

OFF Channel Capacity:

7 pf per channel,' shunt capacity at

common node

ON Resistance of Channel
(Without Buffer):

1000 ohms max.

Switching Plus Settling Time:

5 /.Lsec, max. to settle to within .01 %

of final value for full scale excursion
with zero source impedance

Fault Protection:

Current limiting to 10 rna provided

Max. Input Voltage

(Wi~hout Damage):

15

Output Range:

Same as Input ( 10 VFS)

Expander Node:

v.

Output Current:

20 rna, max.

Output Protection:

Short circuit protection, indefinitely to

ground

Amplifier Offset:

Adjustable to zero

Transfer Accuracy:

O.Ol % of full scale at 25 0 C.

Temp. Coefficient:

30 /.Lvi 0 C..

Decoder
Decoder:

One of 8 lines, decoded, binary

Decoder Outputs:

Select: Logic zero

De-select: Logic one

Decoder InputsAO IN to A2 IN:

Address lines
One TTL Load
One
High

Decoder Gate Input:

Logic zero enables decoder out

Power Requirements:

15 v. at 35 rna.
+5 v. at 30 rna (with decoder option)

Size:

One Double Height

Double Width Module

193

EIGHT CHANNEL CONSTANT

_

I_M_P_ED_A_N_C_E_M_U_l_T_IP_lE_X_E_R_E_X_PA"-!'-N_D_E_R.......
A164

SERIES

1. __

SIGNAL INPUT

BU2

BS2

O~-~L--:

_ _- ,

C>---""I'r-_--{j~----+-___+

BP2 C>-~tv--_--C>O------+-+-~

BM2 C>---""tv--_--C>O----++-+--~-~ AM2

EXPAI'ISION I'I00E

8K2

o---~_---(x.,...---+-+-+_+_______+

!ICARD SIZE
DOUBlE HEIGHT
OOU8LE WIDTH

.'OWER REQUIREMENTS
~ 15V
- 15V
MlALOG GtIO

+5V
LOGIC GI'IO

AD! A02
AE'. AE2
AF'. Af2, AJ', AM',
AK, , AK2, AL' , AL2.
AN',AI'I2
A41,AA2,841,842
AC~, AC2, SCI, BCl!

CHANNEl

SELECT
LINES

<III

CD

CD

en

It:

...,

The AI64 is an 8 channel constant impedance multiplexer expander utilizing eight FETS to switch the input signal through e:ght precision resistors
either to ground (OFF) or to a virtual ground null point of an operational
amplifier (ON).
This unit is used primarily with the A165, A166, and the AI67 as a means
of providing additional input channels. It may also be used to do high voltage
multiplexing and input scaling.

AI64-$350
194

The AIM does not contain an output amplifier; therefore, to ensure proper
operation, the output must be terminated into a buffer amplifier whose gain
is equal to minus one. The A.I64 or the A165 may be used to accomplish
this if the AI64 is being used" as an expander to either of these modules.
If used as a stand a/one module, the A260 dual amplifier card may be used
as a buffer amplifier.
Provided on the AI64 are eight channel select lines. These lines are brought
to pin connections and may be control/ed from an external source such as
a shift register, clock, or gating functions.

SPECIFICATIONS
NUl)1ber of Inputs:

Input Impedance:

10,000 ohms

Input Range:

10 volts

Switching Plus Settling Time:

5 I-tsec to .01 %

Expander Node:

Summing point brought to pin to allow

expansion of number of channels.

Switch leakage:

0.5 nano amp per "OFF" channel

Feedthrough (all channels OFF &

20 Vp.p at inputs):

-86 db at I KHz (Ratio

= 20,000: 1)

Select lines 0" TTL load)"ON":

logic Zero

"OFF":

logic One

Power Requirements:

15 v. at 40 rna.

Size:

One double height, double width

195

CONSTANT IMPEDANCE MULTIPLEXER'

WITH OUTPUT AMPLIFIER

Q;]
SERIES

A165
SIGNAL . INPUT

POWER REOUIREMOITS
+I~V
-I~

ADI, A02
AEI,AE2

ANALOG GND AFI, ""2, AJI,_,

Ale" AK2,ALI, AL2,
ANI,AN2
AAI,AA2,8A',8A2
LOGIC GNO AC" AC2 ,acl , 8C2
+~v

~L

SELECT
LINES

The A165 is a constant impedance multiplexer consisting of eight independent channels which utilize FETS to switch the input signal through precision
resistors into either a ground (OFF) or a virtual ground of an operational
amplifier (on).
Included on this module is the operational amplifier, which has been factory
adjusted to yield a gain of minus one. Also included on the A165 are eight
channel select lines which may be controlled from an external source, such
as a shift register, clock, or gating functions.

A165-$475

196

The A165 is DTL and TTL compatible and may be used with DEC's standard
"K" and "M" Series modules to perform control functions.
The A165 may also be used in the multiplexing of high voltage or input
scaling. It also may be used in conjunction with other constant impedance
multiplexers.
DEC's constant impedance multiplexers have been engineered and packaged
using optimized circuit layouts to ensure minimal crosstalk between channels.
Advanced shielding techniques allow stable operation under normal ambient
electrostatic and electromagnetic conditions.

SPECIFICAnONS
Number of Inputs:

Input Impedance:

10,000 ohms

Input Range:

::l: 10 volts

Output Range:

10 volts; inverted with respect to

input.

Output Drive:

20 rna.

Switching Plus Settling Time:

5 J,.tsec to .01 %

Expander Node:

Summing point brought to pin to allow

expansion of number of channels.

Switch Leakage:

0.5 nano amp per "OFF" channel

Transfer .Ratio:

Minus one for 10v range

Transfer Accuracy:

0.015% of full scale

Temp. Coefficient of Offset:

50 !-tV I degrees C.

Temp. Coefficient of Gain:

7 PPM / degrees C.

Feedthrough (all channels OFF &

20 Vp-p at inputs):

-86db at 1 KHz (Ratio 20,000 :: 1)

Select Lines (1 TTL Load)"ON":

logic Zero

"OFF":

logic One

Power Requirements:

15 v. at 40 rna.

Size:

One double height, double width card

197

CONSTANT IMPEDANCE EXPANDER

MULTIPLEXER WITH DECODER
A166
SIGNAL INPUT

0'--fV--_---cQ----++-+--+---~

4M2
EXPltoNSION NODE

oautIlEHEIGHT
DOUBLE

WIDT~

POWEll REQUIREMENTS

A52

o-_ _---.--{)()---++++++----.

+t5V
- t5V
ANALOG GND

4Ol,402
AEt, AE2
AFt. 41'2. AJt , AM1.

AKt. 4K2.AlI. Al2,

ANI.4N2
+5V
LOGIC GND

AAt. AAZ.8At. 8A2

ACt AC2. Bet 8C2

CHANNEL SELECT L....ES

DECODER

OUTPUT

LINES

8F,

BF2

/lNt

The Al66 is a constant impedance eight channel- multiplexer with decoder.

This unit can be used for multiplexing high voltage signals, Single level or
double level multiplexing, input scaling, or as a means to expand the channel
capabilities of either the A165 or A167 DEC multiplexer.
Contained on the A166 as a binary to octal decoder which can be used to
select either randomly or in sequence any of the eight analog input channels.
If the A166 is to be used as a stand alone multiplexer, its output must
terminate into the null point of a buffer amplifier whose feedback resistor is
10,000 ohms.
A166-$365

198

SPECIFICATIONS
Number of Inputs:

Input Impedance:

10,000 ohms

Input Range:

10 volts

Switching Plus Settling Time

with output amp

5 JA.sec to .01 %

Expander Node:

Summing point brought to pin to allow

expansion of number of channels.

Switch Leakage:

0.5 nano amp per "OFF" channel

Transfer Accuracy:

0.015% of full scale

Feedthrough (all channels OFF &

20 Vp-p at inputs):

~86db at 1 KHz (Ratio 20,000: 1)

Decoder
Decoder:

One of 8 lines decoded, binary

Decoder Outputs:

9 TTL Loads
Select
Logic Zero
Deselect
Logic One

Select Lines (1 TTL Load)"ON":

Logic Zero

"OFF":

Logic One

Decoder
Decoder:

One of eight lines decoded, binary

Decoder Outputs:

9 TTL Loads
Select
Logic Zero
Deselect
Logic One

Decoder Inputs:-AO IN to A2 IN:

Address Lines-3 bit binary code

One TTL Load
Positive voltage
Logic One

Decoder Gate:

One TTL Load

Logic One yields disable
Logic Zero yields enable

Power Requirements:

15 v. at 40 mao
.5 v. at 30 rna. (with decoder option)

Size:

One double height double width module

199

CONSTANT IMPEDANCE MULTIPLEXER

~W_I_TH_D_EC_O_D_ER_A_N_D_O_U_T_PU_T_A_M_P_
A167

Q;J"

SERIES

SIGN,AL INPUT

~MEIGHT
DOUBLE WIDTH
POWER REQUIRIo1ENTS
+15\1

ADt,AD2

-15V

AEt,AE2

ANALOG GND
o-----~_o<:r_---i_++++-t--~

A\F1, AF2, AJI , AMI,

AK1, AK2, AU, AL2,

ANI ...HZ
+5V UI , AA2,8AI, 8A2
L..OGIC GND ACt. AC2. act. BC.2

8Ft

8F2

AVt

The A167 is an eight channel constant impedance multiplexer with output

amplifier and decoder. The operation of the A167 is performed in the same
manner as any of the other DEC constant impedance multiplexers, where
the input signal is switched via FETs to either ground (OFF) or into a virtual
ground null point (ON) of the operational amplifier.
This unit may be used for multiplexing of high voltages, input. scaling, and
in situations that require single or double level multiplexing.
The A167 has the capability of being expanded by any of the constant impedance multiplexers (A166, A164). The limitation to the number of channel
expansions will depend upon system specifications, speed, leakage current
of OFF channels, and the output drive capabilities of the source.
The output amplifier has been factory adjusted and preset to a gain of
minus one. The decoder is an eight bit binary to octal decoder with gating
facilities on the decoder to control its states.

A167-$490
200

Advanced shielding and layout techniques have been employed on the A167
to allow stable operation under normal ambient electrostatic and electromagnetic conditions as well as minimal crosstalk between channels.
SPECIFICATIONS
Number of Inputs:

Eight

Input Impedance:

10,000 ohms

Input Range:

10 volts

Output Range:

10 volts

Output Drive:

20 rna.

Switching Plus Settling Time:

5 J.l.sec to .01 %

Expander Node:

Summing point brought to pin to allow

expansion of number of channels.

Switch Leakage:

0.5 nano amp per "OFF" channel

Transfer Ratio:

Minus one for 10v range

Transfer Accuracy:

0.015% of full scale

Temp. Coefficient of Offset:

50 J.l.v I degrees C.

Temp. Coefficient of Gain:

7 PPM{degrees C.

Feedthrough (all channels OFF &

20Vp-p at inputs):

-86db at 1 KHz (Ratio 20,000 : 1)

Select Lines (1 TTL load)"ON":

logic Zero

"OFF":

logic One

Decoder
Dttcoder:

One of eight lines decoded, binary

Decoder Outputs:

9 TTL Loads
Select,
Logic Zero
Deselect
logic One

Decoder InputsAO IN to A2 IN:,

Address Lines-3 bit binary code

One TTL load
Positive voltage
logic One

Decoder Gate:

One TTL Load

logic One yields disable
logic Zero yields enable

Power Requirements:

15 v. at 40 rna.
-: 5 v. at 30 rna. (with decoder option)

Size:

One Double .Height

Double Width Module

201

OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
A207

./

NOTE 1

AUX.
INPUTS

GUARD

GAIN

0------4+

BAL 1K

-INPUT S
0--0:==:1.........,1....--1
(INVERTING) NOTE 2 :

>-""-0() OUTPUT

\'''--'-';

+INPUT
(NON-IN\I.) 0 - - - - - - - - 1

E
-15V

ANALOG GND

NOTE 1.

Mounting holes are provided on the module so that input and feedback
components can be added. Components shown with dashed lines are not
included with the module.

NOTE 2.

This jumper comes with the module. It may be removed to suit circuit re-quirements.

NOTE 3.

Pins L & M can be connected together to improve settling time, but parameters such as drift and open loop gain are degraded.

The A207 is an economical Operational Amplifier featuring fast settling time

(5 ,",s to within 10 my), making it especially suited for use with Analog-toDigital Converters. The A207 can be used for buffering, scale-changing, offsetting, and other dataconditioning functions required with AI D Converters.
All other normal operational amplifier configurations can be achieved with
the A207.
The A207 is supplied with a zero balance potentiometer. Provisions are made
on the board for the mounting of input and feedback components, including
a gain trim potentiometer. The A207 is pin-compatible with the A200 Operational Amplifier.

A207-$45

202

 SPECIFICATIONS-At 25C, unless noted otherwise.

Pins l & M Differences with Pins
Connected l & M Not Connected
Settling Time
Within 10 mY, IOv step input, typ:
Within 10 my, 10v step input, max:
Witbin 1 mY, 10v step input, max:

3 ,lsec
5 Jlsec
7 ,,,sec

Frequency Response
Dc open loop gain, 670 ohm load, min:
Unity gain, small signal, min:
Full output voltage, min:
Slewing rate, min:
Overload recovery. max:

15,000
3 MHz
50 KHz
3.5vhtsec
8 ,lsec

Output
Voltage, max:
Current, max:

IOv
-tI5 ma

Input Voltage
Input voltage range, max:
Differential voltage, max:
Common mode rejection, min:

IOv
10,000

Input Impedance
Between inputs, min:
Common mo~e, min:

100 K ohms
5 M ohms

Input Offset
Avg. voltage drift vs. temp, max:
Initial current offset, max:
Avg. current drift vs. temp, max:

60 J'V/lC
0.5 J'a
5 naleC

Temperature Range

0' C to +60'C

Power
+15v (pin D), Quiescent:
-15v (pin E), Quiescent:

6 ma
10 rna

6 "seo

8 J'sec
10 !,sec
100,000

lOy

..:

30 Jtv/<C

If the Output is accidentally shorted to ground, the amplifier will not be

damaged.
Gain of I, inverting or non-inverting configuration.

203

!AI

DUAL AMPLIFIER CARD

'---_ _ _ _ _A2_60_ _ _ _ _-----'

BOARD SIZE;

~T

DOUBLE WIDTH
Al2

czo

R13

POWER REOUIREMENTS:

-+15V-A02
--15V-AEZ
ANALOG GND
AF2

RIS

8f>2 BN2

BE2

802

AS2

AR2

AJ2

AH2

The A260 is a universal dual amplifier card which contains two independent
operational amplifiers. Provisions "have been made for mounting input and
!eedback components so that the A260 may be used in a variety of modes.
Some of the configurations in which the A260 may be used are:

1. Voltage follower with a gain of plus one.

2. Voltage follower with positive gain of greater than one.
3. Attenuated follower with positive gain of less than one.
4.

Differential amplifier with difterential input and single ended output.

5.

Inverter with negative gain of one or greater.

The A260 may also be used as the output buffer for the A160 and Al64
multiplexer series, as well as the input buffer for the A400 series sample
and hold modules. Individual offset adjustments are provided for on each
amplifier.

A260-$300

204

SPECIFICATIONS
Descri ption:

Two differential amplifiers mounted

on one board with provision for
mounting resistors in a variety of
modes.

Offset:

Adjustments provided to adjust off

set to zero.

Configurations

A.

B.

Follower

High input impedance. gain of plus

one.

Transfer Accuracy:

0.01% of FS

Settling Time (0 to 10v):

1.5 J.LS to .01 %

Output drive:

20 rna.,
ground.

Inputloutput range:

10 volts

short

circuit

proof

to

Input impedance:

1000 megohms

Temp. Coefficient:

30 ....v/oC.

Follower with Gain-

High input impedance. positive gain

greater than one.

Transfer accuracy:

Function of resistors provided.

Gain:

Determined by

Settling Time:

(Gain) x (1.5 1'5) to .01 %

Output Drive:

20

Input/Output range:

10 volts

Input Impedance:

~100

Temp. Coefficient:

30 ....v/ o C. (referred to input)

Attenuated follower-

Gain:

Input attenuator, positive gain Jess

than one.
R13
(see schematiC)
R12 + R13

Transfer Accuracy:

Function of resistors provided.

Settling Time:

1.51-'s to .01 % if not limited by attenuator.

Input Range:

o to .... 100

R14+R15

C.

rna.
ground.

Output Range:

circuit

proof

to

megohms

+ 10 volts

205

short

RI5

volts, max.

D.

Output Drive:

20 rna.,
ground.

short

circuit

proof

to

Input Impedance:

R12

Temp. Coefficient:

30. ~v!

Differential Amplifier:

Differential input, single ended out

put.

+ R13
Q

C. plus input attenuation.

R14

Gain:

Ri5

E~

Transfer Accuracy:

Function of resistors provided.

Settling Time:

(Gain) x

Inr>ut Voltage (Signal plus com

mon mode):

1
(1 + G . ) X (lOV) max.
am

Output Range:

10 volts

Output Drive:'

20 rna., short
ground.

Temp. Coefficient:

(30 "v/

Common Mode Rejection:

Function 'of resistor matching in

each input> 86 db for .01 % resistor watch in addition to transfer
accuracy of .01 %

Inverter

Negative gain of one or greater

(1.5~s)

circuit

C) x (1

proof

Gain)

Specs same as differential amplifier, except input referenced to ground.

~'

F.

Power
+15v @ 20ma
-15v @ 15ma

206

to

1.

FOLLOWER
o

R12
R22

R13
R23

R14
R24

R15
R25

on

CD

CD

5K

on

CD

G=

5K
+2

2. PLUS GAIN

R4

EO

G=

1K\
+10

CD

20K

9K

R4+R5

EIN=~

3, POSITIVE GAIN LESS THEN ONE

0-

~~~ l'rt>:~--l-----O
.~.

50K

50K

G=

+'1/2

20K

20K

20K

G=

R3

4. DIFF. INPUT

R4
C2= 5PF

R5

EO

R2

EO
EIN

R4

=R'5

R3

5. INVERTER

CD

R4
C2=5PF

R5
EO
R3
EIN=R4"

207

tOK

20K

G=

-1

20K

\1Al

SAMPLE AND HOLD

""---_ _ _ _ _A_4_04_ _ _ _ _--'

GAIN TRIM

OPT

AT

(81

RES.

""--_--<lAy ANALOG
OUTPUT

AU
-- -

PINS AH
A,J SHOULD
BE CONNECTED TOGETHER
TO IMPROVE SETTLING TIME,
HOWEVER PARAMETE,RS SUCH
AS DRIFT AND OPEN LOOP
GAIN ARE DEGRADED
AJ

TRACK CONTROL BF
(POS')

TRACK CONTROL BD
(NEG)

IFI

~NfSET

JUMPER CONNECTIONS TO OFFSET OUTPUT

MODE
PIN
BF (pos)
BD (neg)

TRACK (sample) HOLD

3v or open

-3v or open

Ov
Ov

Positive

Negative

AU 'to BJ

AU to BJ
BL to AD

BM to AE
BK to AF

BN to AF

Analog gnd (pin AF) and digital gnd (pin AC) must
be connected together at one point in the system.
The A404 Sample & Hold has an acquisition time of 6 f.A,sec for a 10 volt
signal to within 10 mv (0.1 %). The circuit inverts the input signal, and has
an input impedance to 10 K. Features of the circuit include potentiometers
to control the pedestal and the droop of the output signal.

A404-$130

208

Twodigital Track Control (sample) inputs are provided: one for negative logic
(Ov & -3v), and the other for positive logic (Ov & +3v). Either input by
itself will perform the necessary control, and the inadvertent application of
both digital signals will cause no damage to the circuit.
Potentiometers are also provided for zero balancing, gain trim, and offset adjustment (up to 10v). If offsetting is desired, connections should be made
according to the table shown with the diagram. The A404 is pincompatible
with the A400 Sample & Hold.
SPECIFICATION5--At 25C, unless noted otherwise. Pins AH & AJ are connected together.
Acquisition Time
Within 10 my, lOy step input, typ:
Within 10 mY, 10v step input, max:
Within 2.5 mv, 10v step input, max.
Aperture Time, max:

4 ~I.sec
6 !J.sec
11 !J.sec
0.2 !J.sec

Gain

-1.000 (adjustable 0.2%)

Input
Voltage range, max:
Impedance:

lOv
10 K ohms

Output
Voltage range, max:
Current, max:

lOv
10 rna

Pedestal
Initial pedestal:
Pedestal variation vs. temp, max:

Adjustable to less than 1 mv

0.2 mv/oC

Droop
Initial droop:
Droop variation vs. temp, max:

Adjustable to less than 5 mv/rns

2 mv/rns/ C

Track Control
POSe (pil?BF)

+3v, Track
Ov at 2 rna, Hold
-3v, Track
Ov at 1 rna, Hold

Neg. (pin BD)

Board Size

1 double he:ght board, single module width

. Temperature Range
Power
+ 15v (pin AD), quiescent:
-15v (pin AE), quiescent:

22 rna

35 rna

If the Output is accidentally shorted to Ground, the circuit will not be .

damaged.
Oifference in output voltage when changing from Track to Hold mode.

209

r--Al

SAMPLE AND HOLD

A4_6_01_A_46_1_ _ _ _ _......

L..-._ _ _ _ _

BR2

>---"""--AH2
8H2
AM2

POWER REQUIREMENTS:

-15V AE2

+15V AD2
ANALOG GND AF2

BOARD SIZE:
DOUBLE HEIGHT
OOUBLE WIDTH

The A460' and A461 are one channel sample and held modules used to
sample the value of a changing analog signal at a particular point in time
and store this information.
'The difference between the A460 and the A461 is that the A460 is a 51 H
without input buffering and the A461 is 51 H with input buffering. It should
be noted that when using the A461 an external jumper is required between
pins' BH2 and AR2.
Provided on the A460 and A461 is a select line which can be used to control
the sample or hold operation of the module.
Both the A460 and A461 are DTL and TTL compatible and may be used
with standard "M" or "K" Series modules in control and system configura
tions.
The output circuitry consists of a buffer amplifier with output drive capability of 20 mao Both the A460 and A461 are compatible with DEC "A"
Series high impedance and constant impedance multiplexers and may be
used in conjunction with each to perform various levels of multiplexing.

A46Q-$400
A461-$525
210

SPECIFICATIONS
Transfer Accuracy at 23 0 C.

0.01% FS

Input/Output Voltage Range

10V Full Scale

Transfer Characteristic

+1

Acquisition Time (to 0.01 %)

5 microseconds for -lOY to +10V

excursion

Aperture Time

Less than 50 nanoseconds

Input Impedance (During Sample

Time)(With No Butler):

100 ohms in series with 0.002 microfarad capacitor

34
1000 meg ohms in parallel with 10
pf.

(With Buffer):
Output Drive:

20 mao

Hold Decay:

15 microvolts per millisecond

Offset:

Adjustable to zero

Temp. Coefficient of Offset:

50 JJ.v/ o C.

Control Input (1 TTL Load)Sample:

Logic Zero
Logic One

Hold:
Power:

l5V at 12 ma wlo buffer

. 15V at 20 rna with buffer
One double height double width
module.

Size:

211

I!AI

12..81T DAC

A_6_13_ _ _ _ _......

L - -_ _ _ _ _

OPTIONAL
RESISTORS
AJ 0----0-',,.0--......

BV
GAIN
TRIM
\

AL O-----<>-'I'I\~-__4~IIV'v_--J'NY_4I~...

,
(MSBl

SWITCHES
BE
",-.

BK

,~

,,
BD
BJ
BM ,

,
PIN CONNECTIONS
BINARY
BCD

. .. ...

BK to BE BK to eo
8M to BJ BMto BH
BV to BN

BH
AA

_tQ.'t._
AF
ANALOG
GND

AC
DIGITAL
GND

ANALOG GND (PIN AF)

DIGITAL GND (PIN AC)
MUST BE CONNECTED TOGETHER AT ONE
POINT IN THE SYSTEM.

BINARY INPUTS
OUTPUT
2- ALL OTHERS
OV
OV
+O.OOOV

+3
+3

0
+3

H5.000
+9.9975

The A613 is a 12bit Digital-to-Analog Converter for moderate speed applications. The module is controlled by standard positive logic levels, has an out- put between Ov and +lOv, and will settle within 50 J,Lsec for a full scale
input change. The input coding can be either straight binary or 3 decades of
8421 BCD with only simple connector jumpers required to take care of the
change.
A613-$200
212

The A613 requires a - ~O.Ov reference that can supply negative current,
such as an A704. Provisions are made for adding up to 3 extra resistors to
implement offsetting functions. Potentiometers are provided for zero balancing, and gain trim. The A6l3 is a double height board.
An input of all Logle O's produces zero volts out; all Logic l's produces close
to +lOv out. The operational amplifier output can be shorted to Ground
without damaging the circuit.
SPECIFICATIONS

Inputs
Logic ONE:
Logic ZERO:
Input loading:

+2.0v to +5.0v
O.Ov to +0.8v
1 rna (max.) at 0 volts

. Output
Standard:
Optional, (requires
Positive REF)
Settling time, (lOv step):
Output current:
Capacitive loading:
Binary Dig. In.
000-00
000-01
001-00

111-11

Ov to +lOv
lOv range between -lOv and +lOv
50,...sec
10 rna
0.1 ,...f (without oscillation)

Analog Out
O.OOOOv
+0.0025
+5.0000
+9.9975

Accuracy
At +25C:
Temp. coef:

BCD (8421)
000
001
050
500
999

Binary
0.015% of full scale
O.OOl%/oC
(plus drift of REF)

Analog Out
O.OOOv
+0.010
+0.500
+5.000
+9.990

BCD
0.05% of full scale
0.002%/oC
(plus drift of REF)

Board Size
1 double height board, single module wid'th
Temperature Range
+10C to +50C
Power
+ 15v at 35 rna
at max. load
-15v at 60 rna ~
+ 5vat60 ma
-10.0v REF at -7 rna (reverse current)

If the Output is accidentally shorted to Ground, the output amplifier will not
be damaged.

213

10-BIT D/A CONVERTER

SINGLE BUFFERED
A618 and A619
AM 10 DATA LINES

AMPLIFIER
POWER

LOAD DAC

LOGIC
POWER

'~~

b b b

+15

COM

-.5

..-10

b b

-15

GND

JANAC.OG

BINARY WEIGHTED NETWORK

BjOUTPUT

The A6l8 and the A6l9 Digital to Analog Converters (DAC) are contained on
one DEC double Flip-ChipTM Module. These modules are also double width in
the lower (B section) half. The converters are complete with a 10-bit buffer
registers. level converters. a precision divider network, and a current summing amplifier capable of d'riving external loads up to 10 rna. The reference
voltage is externally supplied for greatest efficiency and optimum scale
factor matching in multi-channel applications.
The A6l9 DAC output voltage is bi-polar while the A618 DAC ,Qutput voltage
is uni-pular.
Binary numbers are represented as shown (right

justifi~d)

in Table 1:

TABLE 1
Analog Output (Standard)
Binary Input
OOOOR
0400 x
1000x
1400 x
1777 x

A6l8
Ov
+2.5v
+5.0v
+7.5v
+lO.Ov

A6l9
-lOY or -5v
-5v or -2.5v
volts
+5v or +2.5v
+lOv or +5v

A6 18-$300
A619-$325

214

OUTPUT:

o to +10 volts

Voltage: (A618--Standard)
Voltage: (A619-Standard)
Current:
Impedance:
Settling Time:
(Full scale step, resistive load)
(Full scale step, 1000 pf)
Resolution:
Linearity:
Zero Offset:
Temperature Coefficient:
Temperature Range:

5 or 10 volts
10 rna MAX.
<0.1 ohm
<5.0 JLsec
<10.0 JA.sec
1 part in 1024
0.05% of full scale
5 mv MAX.
<0.2 mv/oC
to 50C

INPUT
Level: 1 TTL Unit Load
Pulse:
(positive)
Input loading: 20 TTL Unit load
Rise and Fall Time:
Width:
Rate:
Timing:

20 to 100 nsec
>50 nsec
106 HZ max.

Data lines must be settled 40 nsec before the "LOAD DAe" pulse (transition) occurs.

POWER REQUIREMENTS:
Reference Power:
Amplifier Power:
Logic Power:

-10.06 volts, 60 rna

15 volts, 25 rna (plus output loading)
+5 volts, 135 rna
-15 volts, 60 rna

NOTES:
*Voltage-:-A619: Full scale voltage (5 or 10) must be specified at time
of purchase.
Price: Price stated is for standard output voltage and current. Other output
are available on request.

chara~eristics

215

'\

10-BIT D/A CONVERTER

DOUBLE BUFFERED

SERIES

L.-_ _ _ _TY_P_ES_A_6_2_0_an_d_A_62_1_____

10 DATA LINES
\

BE

BH

BJ

LOAD OAC
INPUT REG.

AMPl..IFIER
POWER

UPDATE

OAe

LOGIC

POWER
,...--......,

AA

AB

AC

000
000

+5 -15

GNO

-E REF. {BR
ANA~~

BT

The A620 and theA62l Digltal-to-Analog Converters (DAC) are contained on

one DEC double Flip-Chip Module. These modules are also double-width in
the lower (8 section) half. The converters are complete with two 10-bit buffer
registers, level converters, a precision divider network, and a current sum:.
ming amplifier, capable of driving external loads up to 10 mao The reference
voltage is externally supplied for greatest efficiency and optimum scale-factor
matching in multi-channel-application.
The A62l DAC output voltage is bi-polar while the A620 DAC output voltage
in uni-polar.
The double-buffered DAC's are offered to satisfy those applications where it
is imperative to update several analog output Simultaneously. When DAC's
deliver input to a multi-channel analog tape system or update the constants
of an analog computer, the doublebuffer feature may be necessary to prevent
skew in the analog data.

A620-$300
A621-$375

216
/

Binary numbers are represented as shown (right justified) in Table 1:

TABLE 1
Analog Output (Standard)
Binary Input

A620

A621

0000 8

Ov
+2.5v
+5.0v
+7.5v
+10.0v

-10v or -5v
-5v or-2.5v
-0 volts
+5v or +2.5v
+10v or +5v

0500 R
10008
15Q0 8
17778

OUTPUT:
Voltage: (A620-Standard)
Voltage: (A621-Standard*)
Current:
Impedance:
Settling Time:
(Full scale step, resistive Load)
(Full sca.le step, 1000 pf)
Resolution:
Linearity:
Zero Offset:
Temperature Coefficient:
Temperature Range:

o to 10 volts
5 or 10 volts
10 ma MAX.
<0.1 ohms
<5.0 ....sec
<10 ....sec
1 part in 1024
0.05% of full
5 mv MAX.
<0.2 mv/oC
o to 50C

~cale

INPUT:
level: 1 TTL Unit load
Pulse:
(positive)
Input loading:
20 TTL Unit load
Rise and Fall Time:
20 to 100 nsec
Width:
>50 nsec
Rate:
106 Hz MAX.
Timing:
1. Data lines must be settled 40 nsec before the "lOAD DAC" pulse
(transition) occurs.
2. The "Update DAC" pulse must occur more than 100 nsec after the
"LOAD DAC" pulse.
POWER REQUIREMENTS:
Reference Power:
Amplifier Power:
logic Power:

-10.6 volts, 60 rna

15 volts, 25 rna (plus output loading)
+ 5 volts, 190 ma
-15 volts, 60 ma

Notes:
*Voltage--A621: Full scale voltage ( 5 or 10) must be specified at time
of purchase.
Price:
Price stated is for standard output voltage and current.
Other output characteristics are avaUable on request.

217

12 BIT MULTIPLYING DIGITAL

TO ANALOG CONVERTER
A660

~----------------------------------------~
81.2
8"
810
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81

m
en

m
en

..J

:I

ANALOG RETURN

+5V
DIGITAL RETURN

ANALOG
OUTPUT

AH1

LAJ1
ANALOG
REFERENCE
INPUT

DIGITAL INPUTS

+15V
-15V

~
SERIES

AD1,AD2
AE1,AE2
AF1,AF2
AA1,AA2,8A1,8A2
AC2,BC2

The A660 is a precision 12 bit multiplying digital to analog converter whose

output is the product of the external analog references voltage supplied and
digital code presented.
This Of A converter is OTL and TTL compatible, requires essentially zero
warmup time, and has high output current drive capabilities. It also may be
used in either unipolar or operations.
This unit may be used in applications where precision digital control must
be exercised over an analog signal. It also may be used in systems requir
ing synchro to digital conversion, AC transducer digitization, or in hybrid
computation.
A660-$500
218

When operating in conjunction with an external DC reference source, - the

A660 -may be used as a conventional D/A converter with the output polarity
determined by the references polarity.
The A660 employs advance shielding techniques which allow proper operation under normal ambient electrostatic and electromagnetic conditions.

SPECIFICATIONS
,

~umber

of Bits:

12

Coding:

Binary-A,?solute Value

Input logic levels:

High
logic One
I TTL load

Accuracy-(OC to 4 KHz)

.025% FS, 0.01 % of reading

Temp. Coefficient of Offset:

200 microvoltsl C.

Temp. Coefficient of Range:

20 PPM/

Feedthrough (for 20 v. p:p sine

wave; all bits off):

at 1 KHz: 1 mV RMS

Analog Reference Input Range:

10 v. Full Scale

C.
C:

Input Impedance:

10 K

Frequency:

Down 0.02% at 20 KHz

Phase Shift:

<7

at 20 KHz

Output Range:

10 v .

. Output Current:

15 mao

Short Circuit Protection:

Indefinitely to ground

Phase

Output in Phase with Ref.

Attenuation Range-Absolute Value

000
111

000
111

OUTPUT
0.0000 Volts
(0.9976) X (Input Ref.) Volts

DIGITAL
000 000
111 111 Binary

Settling Time to Digital Change:

lOms.

Size:

One double
module.

Power Requirement:

+15v @ 14 rna.
-15v @ 3 rna.
+5v @ 20 mao

219

height double width

Q;J

REFERENCE SUPPLIES
A702, A704

..

SERIES

(DO_U_Bl_E_H_E_IG_Hn________

L-.-_ _ _ _

AN
AU TEST POINTS

AM

AT +SENSE

AC

AV -SENSE

REF

REF

SUPPLY

AE

AT

+SENSE

AV

- SENSE

AE

- OUTPUT

SUPPLY

AC

-OUTPUT

Module
Output
Type

Current

1mv/oC

60 ma

A702

-10 v

A704

-10 v -90 to +40 ma 1 mv/8hrs

1 mv/15 to 35C
4 mv/O to 50C

Module Adjustment
Type Resolution
A702

A704

5 mv

Peak
Peak to
Ripple

Temperature Coefficient Regulation

Input
Power

30 mv, no
load to full
load

10 mv

0.1 mv, no
load to full
load

0.1 mv

Output
Impedance

Use

-15 v/100 ma
+10 v (8)/10 ma

Load with 500~f

at load. May also
be preloaded' if desired

0.5 ohms

0.01 mv -15 2 v/250 ma See below for sensing 0.0025 ohms

and preloading

Remote Sensing: The input to the regulating circuits of the A704 is connected
at sense terminals AT (+) and AV (-). Connection from these points to the
load voltage at the most critical location provides maximum regulation at a
selected point in a distributed or remote load. When the sense terminals are
connected to the load at a relatively distant location, a capacitor of approximately 100 ~f should be connected across the load at the sensing point.
A702-$58
A704-$175
220

Preloading: The supplies may be prelcaded to. grcund cr -15v to. change the
amcunt cf current available in either direction. For driving DEC Digital-Analog
Ccnverter mcdules,-l25 rna maximum can be cbtained by ccnnecting a
27005% 1 watt resistor from the -lOv pin AE reference output to pin
AC grcund (A704 cnly).
Pin Connections: The A704 is a double-sized mcdule. The top pin letters are
prefixed A.
Wiring: Digital-analcg and analcg-digital ccnverters perfcrm best when mcdule locations and wiring are optimized. All Digital-Analog Converter modules
shculd be side-by-side. In an analcg-digital ccnverter, the comparatcr should
be mou,:,ted next to. the ccnverter mcdule fcr the bits cf mcst significance.
The reference supply mcdules shculd be mcunted nearby, and if the A704 is
used, its sense terminals shculd be wired to. the most'significant-bits converter mcdule. The high quality grcund must be connected to. the commcn
ground cnly at pin AC cf the reference supply mo.dule, and this point should
also. be the ccmmcn grcund fcr analcg inputs to. analcg-digital ccnverters.
Dc nct mcunt A-series mcdules clcser than necessary to. po.wer supply transfo.rmers o.r ether so.urces o.f fluctuating electric o.r magnetic fields.

221

IAl

10 BIT AjD CONVERTER

""'-_ _ _ _ _ _
AS_l_l_ _ _ _ _---'

CONTROL
LOGIC

'ANALOG
INPUT

L---_-,-_~

AH

START PULSE
8M

A/O DONE PULSE

o TO A
CONVERTER

DIGITAL
OUTPUT

BIT

(MSBI

2
3
4
5
6

ABO' lO-BIT ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER

10~BIT

AM
BL
BR
BK

BP

BS
BT

to (LSBI

ASU

AE
AD
AN

ANALOGTODIGITAL CONVERTER

The ASII is a complete, lObit successive approximation, analog to digital

converter with a built in reference supply. The complete converter is con
tained on one DEC double FLIP CHIPTM logic module. Conversion is initiated
by raising the Convert input to logic 1 (+4 volts). The digital result is avail
able at the output within 10 microseconds. An AI D Done Pulse is generated
when the result i~valid. The ASll uses monorifhic integrated circuits for
Co'ntrol logic, output register, and comparator.
The ASU requires 2 vertical connectors and the top section (connector A)
requires 2 connector widths.

ASll-$350
222

100

NANOSECONDS
BIT 10

<J~------10

.Ll SEC

--------1.

CONVERT
PULSE
AD Done

PULSE

-----------------------------~

BIT

19 110 I

SPECIFICATIONS:
Max.
Convert Pulse Input:
Input loading
Pulse Width
Pulse Rise Time
AI D Done Pulse Output:
Pulse Width
Digital Output:
Logical "0"
Logical "I"
Output Current "0"
Output Current "I"
Input:
Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Resolution:
Accuracy:
Temperature:
Coefficient:
Operating Temperature:

Min.

10 TTL unit load

500 nsec

100 nsec

250 nsec
300 nsec

100 nsec

+0.4v
+3.6v
16 ma
-0.4 rna

Ov
+2.4v

o to

+10v
1000 ohms
10 bits
0.1 % of full scale

OC to 50C
Conversion Rate:
100 KHz MAX.
Output Format:
Parallel Binary Uni-polar
+15 volts 1 % 20 ma (pin BU)
-15 volts 1 % 160 ma (pin AV)
+ 5 volts 1 % 300 ma (pin AA)
Analog Ground (pin BN)
Options:
The input impedance of the AID converter can be raised to greater than 100
megohms by adding an input amplifier module. A sample and hold amplifier
module may also be included. The impedance of the converter with sample
and hold is 10,000 ohms. Both options may be included simultaneously if
high impedance and narrow aperture are both required.

"'--.

223

A860
~________________________________________- - J

2
BPt.BN1.BM1, BLt,
BK1

CARRY INPUT

2'
22

BHt
BD1

RESET OUT

23

CLOCK OUT

24
25

AV2
AU'
AT2

AS2

BV2

SERIES

BU2
BT2
BS2
~

BR2
BP2
BN2

OVERLOAD

26

EXT. TRIG.

27

CONVERSION

28

BL2

29

BK2

INT. TRIG.

~
A

12 BIT INDUSTRIAL CONVERTER

BM2

A860

MSB
AKt.AK2
AJ1,AJ2
ASt

BF2

ANALOG{-)
ANALOG(+)

POL

802
POWER REQUIREMENTS
BAt ,BA2,AA1,AA2
+5V

SYNC INPUT

LOGIC GND
+t5V
-15V
ANALOG GND

BCt ,BC2,ACt,AC2
AD1,AD2
AE1.AE2
AF1.AF2. AM1.AM2,
AR1,AR2

The A860 is a 12 bit industrial converter employing dual slope integrating

techniques whereby an analog signal is converted into 12 bits (11 bits
sign) of digital information in 9 milliseconds.

This unit may be used in industrial systems where senSing of an analog

s.!gnal is essential in the control of a digital system.
The A860 may be used in application where the output of analytical instruments, strain gauges, and resistance bridges must be converted into digital
form. Other uses of this module are industrial and machin~ tool control and
conversion of instrumentation to digital displays. Because of its bit rate
(l20~3600 BPS), the A860 may also be used to transmit data over telephone lines.
The A860 is both DTl and TTL compatible and may be used with standard
K and M Series modules, as well as DEC's A Series multiplexers and sample
and hold.
A860-$395
224

The A860 has been engineered and designed uSing advance shielding techniques which allow proper operation under normal ambient electrostatic and
electromagnetic conditions.
~
SPECIFICATIONS
Technique:

Dual Slope Integration

Input Voltage Range:

2 volt

Coding:

Sign bit + 11 magnitude bits

Accuracy at 23 C.:

0.05% of input voltage

Conversi.on Time:

3 milliseconds

Inpwt Type:

Differential

Input Impedance:

>

Common Mode Voltage:*

0.25 V max.

Common Mode Rejection:

> 70db at 60 Hz

External Trigger:

millivolt.

- 9 milliseconds

Sample Aperture (part of

. conv. time):

Control Inputs
Internal Trigger:

+1

1000 meg ohms

Internal oscillator provided for auton

omous operation of converter; can be
enabled by grounding internal trigger
line.
Triggered by leading (negative-going
voltage) edge 1 TTL load. Internal trig
ger must be disabled by hard wire to
+5volts.

Digital OutputsData (11 lines):

Parallel data available after end of conversion. Logie one is high; 8 TTL loads.

End of Conversion

Output logic one during conversion.

(Busy Status):

High to low transition indicates end of

conversion.

Carry Input:

Input to control flip flop that deter

mines word length of converter. For
11 bits + sign. 'connect carry input
(BKl) to 29 out (BK2) ..

Overload:

Output logic one when analog exceeds

full scale
'

Power Requirements:

15V 0.3% at 20 rna.

+5V at 150 mao

Size:

One double height double width mod

ule.

* Note:

Unit normally supplied witt! analog minus input connected to analog

return through R6 (r). For differential inputs remove R6.
225

HIGH SPEED 12 BIT

AID CONVERTERS
A86! A862
~----------------------------------------~
~ ....

fOK

lIT
BB1

B01

CLOCK

ADJ.

CLOCK

B1

BE1

A861- A86l

AJl
AKl
AFl
AF1

ANALOG RETURN

BFi

EOC

BH1
AU1
BV1
AUZ
AVl

RESET
START CONVERT

BJZ
BKl

-SHOT

CYCLE

..

BlZ

B5

BMZ

B6

BNl

B9

B11

81l

--

BFl

810

..

...

Bl

B8

BEl

B3

B7
ANALOG INPUT

--...
--.

-""
p

B4
SERIAL OUTPUT

~
SERIES

..

---..

BPl
BRl

BSl

BTl

..

BU2
BVl

..

cnNERTER TRIG. IN

-f

INHIBIT

POWER REQUIREMENTS
+5V
LOGIC GROUM>
'-15V
+15V
ANALOG RETURN

BAl,AA2,BA1,AA1
BCZ, ACZ, BCi ,AC1
AE1, AEZ
AD1,ADl
AK2 ,AFl AF1

The A861 and A862 are high speed analogI digital converters that provide
adjustment-free 12 bit accuracy over the specified temperature range.
The A861 is a unipolar converter with an input range of 0 to +10 volts and
a straight binary output, whereas the A862 is a bipolar converter whose input
is in the 10 volt range with an output that is coded offset binary or 2's
complement.

A861-$595
A862-$595

226

80th of these modtlles employ the successive approximation techniques and

include a self-contained clock and trigger circuitry that will allow adjustment
of the conversion time to a level from 12 microseconds to 48 microseconds.
The A86l and A862 are DTL and TTL compatible and may be used with
standard M and K Series modules, as well as standard DEC hardware for
system configuration.
Both AID converters are packaged on a double-height double-width module
and contain internal reference supplies that are adjustable. In packaging the
A861 and A862, advance shielding techniques have been employed to allow
stable operation under ambient electrostatic and electromagnetic co'nditions.
To minimize potential ground loop problems, separate ground returns are
brought to:
a. Digital power supply return pin.
b. Analog power supply return pin.
c. Analog signal return pin.
80th of these modules are useful in systems demanding high integral accuracy and long term reliability, such as computer linkage, biomedical data
transmission, process control, and conversion of instrumentation data.
Range and offset adjustments are provided on the module.

227

SPECIFICATION
A862 (BIPOLAR)

A861 (UNIPOLAR)
Technique:
Resolution:
Accuracy vs. speed @ 23'C:
Reference:
Code:
Temp. Coeff. of Offset:
Temp. Coeff. of Gain:
Signal Input Load:
Input Range:
Data Output-Parallel:
N
N

co

Clock Adjustment (Multi-Turn Pot):

End of Conversion Output:

Serial Data (available

during conversion):
Converter Trigger:
Inhibit Trigger:
Power Requirements:

Successive Approximation
12 Bits
:: 0.01% of FS. @ 48 ",sec cony.
0.015% of FS. @ 24 \.Lsec l:onv.
:: 0.05% of FS. @ 12 ~Lsec cony.
Internal +5V and + 10V supplies;
adjustable
Straight binary
0.001 %! cC
(20 ppm! CC) X Input Voltage Applied
2.5K ohms returned to +5 volts
o to +10V
True side of all bits
7 TTL unit loads.
Variable from 12 to 48 microsecond
conversion time
Goes High During Conversion;
Returns to low state @ at end of conversion
8 TTL LOADS
NRZ code available
(Binary) 8 TTL loads
Triggered on the leading
(negative-going voltage) edge,
1 TTL load
logic zero inhibits
+ 15V @ 55 mao
- 15V @ 12 mao
5V @ 420 ma_
One double height
double width module.

Size:

Successive Approximation
12 Bits
:: 0.01 % of FS. @ 48 ",sec cony.
0.015% of FS. @ 24 \.Lsec conv.
0.05% of FS. @ 12 J,Lsec cony.
Internal +5V and +10V supplies;
adjustable
OFFSET Binary or 2's complement
.001%/oC
(20 ppm! C) X Input Voltage Applied
5000 ohms returned to +5 volts
-lOV to +10V.
True side or All Bits
plus false side of MSB
7 TTL unit loads.
Variable from 12 to 48 microsecond
conversion time
Goes High During CQnversion;
Returns to low state @ at end of conversion
8 TTL LOADS
NRZ code available
(offset binary)
8 TTL loads
Triggered on the leading
(negative-going voltage) edge,
1 TTL load
LogiC zero inhibits
1 TTL load
15V @ 55 mao
- 15V @ 12 rna.
5V @ 420 mao
One double height
double width module_

+
+

The A Series analog module line has been substantially expanded. Shown
here are a few of the new units.

The A Series additions are DTL and TTL compatible and compatible with
DEC K and M Series modules, computers, control systems and standard
instrumentation.

229

DUAL POWER SUPPLY

POWER
SUPPLY

H704. H707
15 Volts

H704

H707

These supplies differ only in dimensions and output current capabilities:

400 ma and 1.5 Amperes respectively for the H704 and H707. May be
mounted on the bars in an H920 drawer, taking the space of two connector
blocks.
. MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS
DIMENSIONS: 3 1/4 x 3 3/s X 5 in. height (H704)
DIMENSIONS: 4" x 5" X 5%" height (H707)
CON-'ECTIONS: All input-output wires must be soldered to octal socket at
the base of the power supply. '
OPERATING TEMPERATURE: -20 to +71C ambient

H704-$200

H707~$400

230

POWER CONNECTIONS:
Input power connections are made via tab terminals which fit the AMP
"Fastort" receptacle series. Output power is supplied to solder lugs. All required mounting hardware is supplied with this unit. See 914 power jumpers.
Length: 8"
Width: 5"

Height: 6"
Finish: Chromicoat

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

INPUT VOLTAGE: 105 to 125 vac; 47-420 cps.

OUTPUT VOLTAGE: floating 15 v
OUTPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT: 1 veach output
REGULATION: 0.05% line, 0.1 % load for both voltages
RIPPLE: 1 mv rms max for both outputs
OVERLOAD PROTECTION: The power supply is capable of withstanding output short circuits indefinitely without being damaged.

5 TO 4
IF REMOTE SENSING IS NOT USED, CONNECT: 6 TO 7
-15V SENS
+15V SENS

-t5V

+15V

+15V

105-115VAC

+15V SENS

115--125 VAC

-15V SENS
-15V

AC-COM

POWER SUPPLY 1

POWER SUPPLY 2

The H704 and H707 contain two 15 volt floating power supplies. To get 15
volt supply, connect pins 7 and 8 and use this point as ground. Pin 4 will
now be at positive 15 volts and pin 11 will be negative 15 volts.

231

The Module Assembly area has shifted emphasis from volume production to complex experimental work_ The above process is a special sub-assembly of an indicator light board designed for a control
unit.

232

Universal Hardware
and Accessories
Digital manufactures a complete line of hardware accessories in support of its
module series. Module connectors are available for as few as one module
and as many as 64. A complete line of cabinets is available to house the
modules and their connector blocks, as well as providing a convenient means
for system expansion. Power supplies for both large and small systems and
reference supplies are also available.
Coupled with the recent additions to the hardware line, Digital has madt:: every
effort to maintain or improve the high standards of reliability and perfor
mance of its present line. Through the availability of a wide range of basic
accessories, DEC feels that it is offering the logic designer the necessary
building blocks which he requires for complete system design.
50-CYCLE. POWER

Because of the demand for Digital's products in areas where 1I5-v, 60:cps
power is not available, each of the power supplies with a frequencysensitive
regulating transformer is also available in a multivoltage 50cps version. All
50cps supplies have the same input connections. The line input is on pins
3 and 4. Jumpers should be connected depending on the input voltage.
WIRING HINTS

These suggestions may help reduce mounting panel wiring time. They are not
intended to replace any special wiring instructions given On individual module
data sheets or in application notes. For fastest and neatest wiring, the following
order is recommended.
233

(lr All power & ground wiring and any horizontalty bussed signal wiring. Use
Horizontal Bussing Strips Type 932 or Type 933.

(2) Vertical grounding wires interconnecting each chassis ground with pin C
grounds. Start these wires at the uppermost mounting panel and continue
to the bottom panel. Space the wires 2 inches apart, so each of the chassisground pins is in line with one of them. Each vertical wire makes three
connections at each mounting panel.
(3) All ether ground wires. Always use the nearest pin C above the pin to be
grounded, unless a special grounding pin has been provided in the module.
(4) All signal wires in any convenient order. Point-to-point wiring produces
the shortest wire lengths, goes in the fastest, is easiest to trace and
change, and generally results in better appearance and performance than
cabled wiring. Point-to-point wiring is strongly urged.
The recommended wire size for use with the H800 mounting blocks and 1943
mounting panels is 24 for wire wrap, and 22 for soldering. The recommended
size for use with H803 block and H911 mounting panels is #30 wire. larger
or smaller wire may be used depending on the number of connections to be
made to each lug. Solid wire and a heat resistant spaghetti (Teflon) are easiest
to use when soldering.
Adequate grounding is essential. In addition to the connection between mounting panels mentioned above, there must be continuity of grounds between
cabinets and between the logic assembly and any equipment with which the
logic communicates.
When soldering is done on a mounting panel containing modules, a 6-v (transformer) soldering iron should be used. A llO-v soldering iron may damage
the modules.
When wire wrapping is done on a mounting panel containing modules, steps
must be taken to avoid voltage transients that can burn out transistors. A
battery- or air-operated tool is preferred, but the filter built into some lineoperated tools affords some protection.
Even with completely isolated tools, such as those operated by batteries or
compressed air, a static charge can often build up and burn out semiconductors. In order to prevent damage, the wire wrap tool should be grounded
except when all modules are removed from the mounting panel during wire
wrapping.

AUTOMATIC WIRING
Significant cost savings can be realized in quantity production if the newest
automatic wiring techniques are utilized. Every user of FLIP CHIP modules
benefits from the extensive investment in high-production machinery at
Digital, but some can go a step further by taking advantage of programmed
wiring for their FLIP CHIP digital systems.
While the break-even pOint for hand wiring versus programmed wiring depends upon many factors that are difficult to predict precisely, there are a
few indications:

1.

One-of-a-kind systems will probably not be economical with automatic

wiring, even when the size is fairly large; programming and administrative
costs are likely to outweigh savings due to lower costs in the wiring itself.
234

2.

At the other end of the spectrum, production of 50 or 100 identical

systems of almost any size would be worth automating, not only to lower
the cost of the wiring itself but also to reduce human error. At this level
of volume, machine-wired costs can be expected to be less than the cost
of hand wiring.

3.

For two to five systems of several thousand wires each, a decision on the
basis of secondary factors will probably be necessary: ease of making
changes, wiring lead time, reliability predictions, and availability of relevant skills are factors to consider.

The Gardner-Denver Corporati.on, and Digital can supply further information

to those interested in programmed wiring techniques. At Digital, contact the
Module Sales Manager, Sales Department.

COOLING OF FLIP CHIP. MODULES

The low power consumption of K and M series modules results in a total of
only about 25 watts dissipation in a typical 1943 Mounting Panel with 64
modules. This allows up to six panels of modules to be mounted together
and cooled by convection alone, if air is allowed to circulate freely. In higherdiss!pation systems using modules in significant quantities from the A series.
the number of mounting panels stacked together must be reduced without
forced-air cooling. In ~neral. total dissipation from all modules in a convec
tion-cooled system should be 150 watts or less.
The regulating transformers used in most DEC power supplies have nearly
constant heat dissipat.ion for any loading within the ratings of the supply;
Power dissipated within each supply will be roughly equal to half its maximum
rated ouput power. If power supplies are mounted below any of the modules
in a convection-cooled system, this dissipation must be included when checking against the 150 watt limit.

MOUNTING PANEL HARDWARE

HOOl,HOO2, H020, H021, H022

UNIVERSAL
HARDWARE

PAIRS OF SETBACK BRACKET:

Hool - 3,4" standoff used to mount a 1907 over K943 wiring as shown in
the description of the K943.

Hoo2 -

2" setbackused to mount a control panel with switches, lamps, etc.

This setback brings the control panel up flush with the mounting
rack or cabinet in front of the log:c wiring.

MOUNTING FRAMES
H020 - Mounting frame casting upon which HBOO, HB03, HBOB connector
blocks, power supplies, such as, the H710 and other components
that are adaptable to the frame mounting requirements can be
mounted.

H021 -

Single offset end plate which mounts to the H020. This end plate
provides a mount for the 194519 hold down bar, if required.

H022 -

Single end plate similar to the H021 on which is mounted a terminal

block assembly for ease of parallel power wiring to adjacent panels.

HOOt

H001PR-$8
H002PR-$8
H02o-$15
H02l-$7
H022-$20
236

CONNECTOR BLOCKS

UNIVERSAL
HARDWARE

HBOO-W, HBOO-F

This is the 8-module socket assembly used in Flip,Chip mounting panels.

Because of its 18 pin connectors, it can be used for all modules except those
with pins on both sides of the board. Pin dimensions are .031 inches by.062
inches and may be of either a wire wrap or solder fork type. Number 24 wire
should be used with these connectors. The drawings below show the pertinent dimensions.
WIRE-WRAP TOTAL LENGTH

--~------6-112'"-_--.j
1.750

WIRE
WRAP
TERMINAL

---I

CLEJIRANCE FOR COWONENTS

ON TliE MOOIA..E IN THIS SLOT ~

I
I

I
I
I
I
I

---------~
@

IL __
,-L--------l

1.375"

,~,.

TERMINAL

1------3-I
I--0

,...--

I
I

s~g~

V4"

!if16" CXIt.WTEJII8CR:
3116"OEEP

0.500" ~

l~._~

r--~

I
I
I
I

0.375

5.170"

IL. _ _

L~:J-H:'-/4"~

~20"~
VIEW fllON NODULE SlOE

SOLDER FORK TOTAL LENGTH

REPLACEMENT CONTACTS TYPES H801-W, H801-f

These contacts are offered in packages of 18 for replacement purposes. In

each package, nine straight and nine offset contacts are included, enough
to replace all contacts in one socket.
H801-W is for wire-wrap connectors; H801-F is' for solder-fork connectors_
HSOOF-$8
HBOOW-$8
H801F-$2
H801W-$2

237

~______CO__N_N_EC_:_~_O~__B_L_OC__K______~I-_~_:_~_:W_RA_S:_~_
~t-----

...

~I.

2.594 R E F . - - - - -..

t
L~
1000

0125]~
ci~
REF.

..t..0.125
REF.

-----.J L

This is an 18 pin connector block for a single FLIP CHIPS module. It can be
used to mount all modules except those with pins on both. sides of the board.
Pin dimensions are .031 inches by .062 inches and may be of the wire wrap
type only. Number 24 wire should be used with this connector.

H802-$4
238

CONNECTOR BLOCK

UNIVERSAL
HARDWARE

Haoa, Ha09 PINS

WIRE-WRAP TOTAL

(1.7"'1

1:=

LENGTH

6','.~

r--WIRE
WRAP

:
I

n~~i

I
IL __ _

O.500-~

r--I
I

,
,
I
I
I
I

L __ _
I

~2.0'~
VIEW FROM MODULE SIDE

The Ha08 is a relatively low density connector block for use with all modules
in the catalog. This includes A, K, M, and W Series modules. The connector
provides 4 module slots each having 36 pins. On A, K and W. Series modules
only the 2 side pins, (A2, 82, etc.) will make contact. This connector adds
a measure of convenience and versatility to the many uses to which these
catalog modules can be applied. The dimensions of the connector pins are
the same as those for the H800 (.031 inches by .062 inches). Number 24
wire should be used with these blocks, H800 and H808 connector blocks can
be mixed for M and A, K, W module mixing purposes. Wire wrapping patterns
can be maintained even though module letter series are mixed because H800
and Ha08 pin layout is identical. Ha09 is a package of 36 replacement pins,
18 left and 18 right.

H808--$10
H809-$ 4

239

WIRING ACCESSORIES
932, 933, 934, 935, 936
H8l0, H8ll, H812, H813, H814

UNIVERSAL
ACCESSORIES

932 BUS STRIP

Simplifies wiring of register pulse busses, power, and grounds. Same as used
in K943 with H8DD blocks.

933 -$0.60

933 BUS STRIP

Simplifies wiring of power, ground and signal busses on mounting panels using
H8D3 connectors.
933-$1

934 WIRE-WRAPPING WIRE

1000 ft. roll of 24 gauge solid wire with tough, cut'resistant insulation. (Use
Teflon insulated wire instead for soldering.)
For use with H800 connectors.

934-$50
240

935 WIRE-WRAPPING WIRE

1000 foot roll of 30 guage insulated solid wire for use with HS03 connectors.
935-$60
936 19 CONDUCTOR RIBBON CABLE
Use on W Series connector modules or ~plit into 9-conductor cables for use
with K5S0, K6Sl, K683, etc.

936-$0_601 ft.

HalO PISTOL GRIP HAND WIRE WRAPPING TOOL

The type- HSlO Wire Wrapping Tool is designed for wrapping #24 or #30
solid wire on Digital-type connector pins. The H8l0 Kit includes the proper
sleeves and bits. It is recommended that five turns of bare wire be wrapped
on these pins. This tool may also be purchased from Gardner-Denver Co.
(Gardner-Denver part No. l4H-lC) with No. 26263 bit and No. 18840 sleeve
for wrapping #24 wire. Specify bit #504221 and sleeve #500350 for
wrapping # 30 wire.
When ordering from Digital, specify the sleeve and bit size desired:
HSlO-# 24 wire

H810(24)-$ 99

HSIOA-#30 wire

H810A-$ 99

HS10B-#24 and #30 wire

HSIOB-$150
241

The Type H8ll Hand Wrapping tool is useful for service or repair applications.
It is designed for wrapping #24 solid wire on DEC Type HaOO-W connector
pins. This tool may also be purchased from GardnerDenver Co. as GardnerDenver Part #A20557-12.
Wire wrapped connections may be removed with the Type H812 Hand Un
wrapping tool. This tool may also be purchased from Gardner-Denver Co. as
Gardner-Denver Part #500130.
The H8llA and H812A are equivalent to the H811 and the H812 except that
the A versions are designed for .#30 wire. Both tools may be purchased from
Gardner-Denver directly under the following part numbers: H8llA A-20557-29;
H812A 505244-475. The H813 is a #24 bit; H813A, a #30 bit. The H814 is a
#24 sleeve; H814A, a #30 sleeve.
None of the Wire Wrapping Tools will be accepted for credit under any circumstances.
H811(24) H811A(30) H812(24) H812A(30) -

$21.50
$21.50
$10.50
$10.50

H813(24) H813A(30) H814(24) H814A(30) -

$30
$30
$21
$21

WIRING ACCESSORIES
913, 914, 915
H820, H821, H825, H826

UNIVERSAL
ACCESSORIES

913 AND 915 PATCHCORDS

These patchcords provide slip-on connections for FLIP CHIP mounting panels
and are available in Color-coded lengths of 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24, 32, 48,
and 64 inches. All cords are shipped in quantities of 100 in handy polystyrene
boxes. Type 913 patchcords are for 24 gauge wirewrap and use AMP Terminal
Type #60530-1. Type 915 patchcords are for 30 gauge wirewrap and use AMP
Terminal Type #85952-3.
H820 AND H821 GRIP CLIPS FOR SHlpON PATCHCORDS
The type H820 and H821 GRIP CLIPS are identical to slip-on connectors used
in respectively the 913 and 915 patchcords. These connectors are shipped in
packages of 1000 and permit fabrication of patchcords to any desired length.
H820 GRIP CLIPS will take size 24-20 awg. wire and may be purchased from
AMP, Inc. as AMP part #60477-2. H821 GRIP CLIPS will take size 3024 awg.
wire and are AMP part #85952-3.
242

H825 HAND CRIMPING TOOL

Type H825 hand crimping tool may be used to crimp the type H820 GRIP
CLIP connectors. Use of this tool insures a good electrical connection. This
tool may also be obtained from AMP, Inc. a~ AMP part #90084.
H826 HAND CRIMPING TOOL
Type H826 hand crimping tool may be used to crimp the type H821 'GRIP
CLIP connectors. This tool is identical to AMP part #9019-1.

. 914 POWER JUMPERS

For interconnections between power supplies, mounting panels, and logic
lab panels, these jumpers use AMP "Faston" receptacles series 250. Specify
914-7 for interconnecting adjacent mounting panels, or 914-19 for other runs
of up to 19 inches. 914-7 contains 10 jumpers per package; 914-19 contains
10 jumpers per package.
The 914-7 jumpers are 7 inches long and the 914-19 jumpers are 19 inches
long.

913 914-7
914-19
915 -

$18/pkg. of 100
- $4/pkg.
- $4/pkg.
$33/pkg. of 100

243

H820 - $48/pkg. of 1000

H821 - $75/pkg. of 1000
H825-$146
H826-$210

MODULE DRAWER
H920

UNIVERSAL
HARDWARE

The H920 Module Drawer provides a convenient mounting arrangement for a

complete digital logic system. The H920 has space for 20 mounting blocks in
addition to an H710, or H716 power supply, or 24 mounting blocks without
a supply. It accepts H800, H803, and H808 mounting blocks and fits standard
19" racks. Width of the H920 is 16314", depth is 19" and height is 6 3,4"
including an H921 front panel. The H920 is equipped with a bracket for distributing power within the drawer, or to other drawers or mounting panels.
Mounting arrangements are provided for the H921 front panel and H923
slide tracks.
The H921 front panel is designed for use primarily with the H920 Module
Drawer. It provides mounting space for switches, indicators, etc. The H921 is
pre-drilled and ready to mount on the H920. Height of the H921 is 6314",
width is 19".
H923 chassis slides are intended for use with the H920 Module Drawer. The
H923 allows the user to slide the drawer out of the rack and tilt the drawer
for easy access.

H920-$170
H921-$ 10
H923-$ 75

244

MODULE DRAWER
H925

UNIVERSAL
HARDWARE

The H925 Module: Drawer provides mounting space for HSOO, HS03, and
HSOS connector blocks to accommodate up to 144 modules. The connector
blocks mount pins upward on the H925 for easy access during system
checkout.
The right side of the H925 is provided with three axial flow fans (300 c'fm)
which are mounted internally. They provide cooling air flow across the
mounted modules.
For power supply' mounting in the H925 cabinet, omit 4 connector blocks
thereby deleting 32 module slots, when using the HSOO or HS03 connector
blocks. If the HSOS blocks are used, 16 module slots are deleted. Mount the
power supply externally if all logic mounting space is required.
For ease of mounting, the H925 is provided with two non-tilting slides, similar
to Grant type 55-16SNT. Considering possible servicing, the H925 should be
mounted with enough height for using bottom access.
The H925 includes top and bottom cover plates along with an attractive bezel
and front subpanel. The subpanel is made of sturdy I6-guage metal for
mounting front panel controls and accessories. The bezel is designed for
installing a customer-supplied dress panel. The dress panel should have a
thickness of11a". The H925 fits a/l DEC 19" racks.

H925-$250

245

19" MOUNTING PANEL FRAME

UNIVERSAL

H941AA

HARDWARE

This rugged steel frame holds four 19" x 5IA" mounting panels. A quickrelease pin snaps out to allow the two-piece frame to swing open for easy
. access to the back panel wiring and connections. The construction of this
frame allows sufficient rigidity for vertical or horizontal mounting. The Black
Tweed finished aluminum cover affords mechanical protection for the circuitry as well as a neatly finished appearance for your digital logic system.
The cover attaches to the frame with two thumb-release, positivegrip fasteners.
The H941 AA holds up to 32 H800, H803 and H808 Connector Blocks. It
provides up to 256 module slots with H800 and H803 Connector Blocks and
128 slots with the H808's. The frame is designed to accept K943, H911,
H914, 1943 Module Panels and H900, H910, H913, H916, H917 panels with
power supplies. These panels attach to the pre-tapped frame with 1032 x
1;2 II machine screws.
Frame Height: 23"
Frame Width: 24"
Overall Depth (Cover and Frame): 8"
Frame Mounting Hole Centers: 12 x 22 112"
Frame Mounting Bolt: IA II dia.
Weight (Cover and Frame): Approx. 25 Ibs.
Cover Material: .093" Sheet Aluminum

246

H941 BA, H941 AA

Includes Cover and
Two Piece Frame

$175.00
247

CABINET

H950

Front view of H950 frame.

UNIVERSAL
HARDWARE'

Rear view of H950 frame.

248

Digital Equipment Corporation manufactures a standard 19" mounting frame

assembly that offers the customer complete flexibility in selecting hardware
to design the cabinet. It is a complete enclosure designed to house module
racks, power supplies, computer, systems, and peripherals.
The H950AA frame assembly. which includes a filter cover, is designed for
sophisticated computer systems. It is constructed of rugged 12 and 13 gauge
steel. The two pairs of frame uprights have 9/32" holes drilled at standard
EIA spacings (o/a-o/a-%) the full length of the 63" mounting panel height.

63"

FILLER STRIP

STABILIZER FOOT
(TWO REQ'D)

I:t6" f
LEVELER --L.J

MOUNTING HOLES 18- 5116"

CENTER TO CENTER ALL SIDES

249

OPTIONAL PARTS
H950

UNIVERSAL
HARDWARE

1.

The H952EA caster set (4) and H952FA leveler set (4) are needed for
the H950 frame to provide mobility and balance to the cabinet.

2.

The fan assembly H952CA is mounted to the top pan. of the H950AA
frame. When ordering, please specify the direction of air flow, up or
down.

3.

H952AA end panels are standard gray and are easily mounted to the
frame.

4.

The frame identification panel (LOGO) H950lT is available with colored

adhesive inlay strips of brown/yellow or dark blue/light blue.

5.

The H950-P or -Q bezel cover panel is available in heights of 5IA" and

10Y2" with a 19" panel width_ It is used as a cover panel or filler for the
front of the cabinet. The customer can select any combination of bezels
to fill the cabinets front panel space of 63".

6.

The H950-HA through H950-H K series of short doors are available for
mounting to the cabinet's front side. A various table of short doors is
listed in the H950 parts list. The customer has the option of completing
the front side of the cabinet with a combination of short doors and
bezels. NOTE: Dimensions of doors listed only cover' mounting panel
height. Check special considerations section for short door limitations.

7.

The H950-BA (righthand door) and H-950~CA (left-hand door) are full
doors for rear and front mounting to the H950AA frame. See special
considerations section for front mounting.

8.

The rear mounting panel door, also called a plenum door H950DA or
EA, is for lefthand or right-hand mounting. There is a distinct advantage
to using the plenum door for mounting power supplies, logic racks,
module connector block panels, etc. It offers convenient access for ser
vicing and mounting equipment. It is designed for 19"- panels and holes
are drilled to 9/32" at standard EIA spacings (518-0/8-%) the full
length of the plenum donr frame. The customer has the option of select
ing a rear mounting panel door skin H950-FA that bolts to the plenum
door or ordering a full door. For additional information, see special con
sideration section.

9.

The fitter H950-SA should be ordered only for fans that are to be used
for air flow intake.

250

Special ConsidenItions
Before ordering a cabinet, the following should be considered:
1) If a LOGO is used, only a short door can be used on the cabinet front.
2) When ordering a cabinet to add to a system, or when joining two or more
cabinets, front and rear fillers H952G are required.
3) If power supplies with meters or switches are mounted to the plenum
door H950-DA (RH) or H950-EA (LH), a full door H950-DA (RH) H950-cA
(LH) is needed.
4) The mounting panel door skin H950-FA bolts to the plenum door and is
used in place of a full door when hardware mounted to the plenum door
does not require servicing.

5) All cabinets require power supplies adapted for 19" rack mounting. 17" ..
rack panels can be converted to 19" by using extenders. Up to five power
supplies can be mounted on a side frame.
6) When ordering stablizer feet, H952-BA (pair) and/ or kickplate 7406782,

a short door or full door cannot be used in the cabinet front.

7) If fan assembly H952CA is required, indicate the direction of desired air
.
flow (up or down).

8) If using short door, make certain that the equipment for cabinet installa
tion will not interfere with the door height.
9) The inner dimensions of the H950-AA frame on all (4) sides are 185/16.
Consequently, it offers flexible panel rack expansion.

Ordering Format (Example)

When ordering H950 Hardware, use the following format:

1.

2.

1 pc

Frame 19" cabinet

Full door-RH
5 ~ bezel cover panel
Fan assembly, air flow upwards
Caster set (4)
leveler set

H950-AA
H950-CA
H950-P
H952-CA
H952-EA
H952FA

Cabinet
add the following:
5- IA II bezel cover panel
10~" bezel cover panel

ADDON CABINET
H950-P
H950-Q

251

1 pc

5 pes
1 pc
1 set
1 set

4 pes
2 pc

CABINET PARTS

LIST

Frame 19" wide, 25" deep, 63" mtg. panel includes cover
filter and all mtg. hardware
Full door (RH) Front & Rear Door Mounting
Full door (LH) Front & Rear Door Mounting
Mounting panel door (plenum) RH rear mounting
Mounting panel door (plenum) LH rear mounting
Mounting panel door skin
Short door (covers 21" mounting height)
Short door (covers 22314" mounting height)
Short door (covers 261;4" mounting height)
Short door (covers 31112" mounting height)
Short door (covers 36 3/4" mounting height)
Short door (covers 42" mounting height)
Short door (covers 47 1;4" mounting height)
Short door (covers 521;2" mounting height)
Short door (covers 57 % II mounting height)
Short door (covers 63" mounting height)
Frame panel (includes LOGO)
5 1;4" bezel cover panel (snap-on)
101;2" bezel cover panel (snap-on)
Filter (for fan assembly)
End panel (require 2 per cabinet)
Stabilizer feet (pair)
Fan assembly (specify direction of airflow)
Caster set (4)
Leveler set (4)
Filler strip-front & rear (joining two cabinets)
Kick plate
Kick plate (use with Add On cabinet)

252

Parts Noo
H950-AA
H950-BA
H95O-CA
H950DA
H950-EA
H950-FA
H950HA
H950HB
H950-HC
H950HD
H950HE
H950-HF
H950-HG
H950HH
H950-HJ
H950-HK
H950-LA
H950~P
H950'Q
H950SA
H952-AA
H952-BA
H952-CA
H952-EA
H952-FA
H952-GA
7406782
7406793

ADD-ON
OPTION CABINET

UNIVERSAL
HARDWARE

The Addon option cabinet uses the same H950AA frame and parts as listed
in the H950 and H952 parts list. It is designed for customers who want to
add on to a basic cabinet system. It will house peripheral equipment for 19"
panel rack mounting, especially those manufactured by DEC. Among the
mounting options are 4K and 8K memory expansions, multiplexers, magnetic
tape control transports, disk files, analogtodigital converters, module racks,
and power supplies. The cabinet is supplied without end panels, H952-AA,
since the cabinet joins an existing basic system. The filler strip, H952-GA
front and rear, are Ibeams designed for compatibility between two or more
cabinets.
The front part of the Add-on cabinet is equipped with a kick plate. The cus
tomer must remove the kick plate if a short door is to be used. The customer
must specify what combination of bezels and/ or short doors is needed to
complete the front of cabinet. All parts are additional to quoted net price
of the Addon cabinet.
The Addon cabinet includes all of the following:
- Part No.
Frame-19" wide, 63" mtg. panel height includes
filter cover (less filter)
Mounting panel door skin
Mounting panel door (plenum)
Fan assembly - airflow upwards
Caster set (4)
Panel frame (includes LOGO)
Kick plate (to be used wI a stabilizer feet)
Filler strip front and rear (only used when joining cabinets)
Levelers

253

H950AA
H950FA
H952-EA
H952-CA
H952-EA
H950LA
7406793
H952-GA
H952-FA

Ordering
In order to efficiently assist the customer, we recommend that the customer
specify the type of equipment intended for cabinets. Give the dimensions
whenever possible to ensure exact cabinet configurations.

Before ordering hardware options for existing cabinets, make certain that they
are compatible with the H950AA standard frame, (overall height 717/16"
from floor including casters, 19" wide frame, and 63" of vertical panel
space). Module Marketing Services of Digital Equipment Corporation will assume responsibility only for parts ordered from the H950 and H952 Parts
List.
Color
Basic color of cabinet hardware is black. Gray is used for end panels and the
bezel of the cover panels.

Color changes will be accepted if customer's order is for 25 or more cabinet~.

Customer must supply color chips for colors desired.

Shipping
All shipments are FOB Maynard, Massachusetts. Specifications are subject to
change without notice. Special packaging has been designed to ensure safe
delivery with proper handling.
Assembly
The customer has the choice of cabinet configuratipn as listed in H950 and
H952 Parts List. The customer must indicate whether the cabinet parts are
to be shipped unassembled or completely assembled by Digital Equipment
Corporation. See special consideration section.

Discounts
Same discounts that are applied to Modules. See Price List.

COLOR CHANGES

Standard color of cabinets is black with gray end panels.

Customized painting will be accepted with a minimum order of 25 cabinets.
Customer must supply a color chip for color desired. An additional charge of
$20.00 will be added for each cabinet painted.
Order should be

sen~

to Module Marketing Services.

No cabinet hardware will be accepted for credit or exchange without the prior
written approval of DEC, plus proper return authorization number (RA#).
All shipments are FOB Maynard, Massachusetts, and prices do not include
state or local taxes. Prices, discounts, and specifications are subject to
change without notice.
Quantity Discounts (Module Discount applies)

$ 5,000 10,000 20,000 50,000 -

3%

$- 100,000
250,000
500,000
1,000,000

5%
10%
15%
254

18%
21%
22%
25%

CABINET PRICE LIST MODULE PRODUCTS

Description

PrIce

Module Drawer
Front Panel
Chassis Slides
Module Drawer
Frame
Full Door (RH)
Full Door (LH)
Mtg Panel Door (RH)
H950~EA
Mtg Panel Door (lH)
H-950-FA
Mtg Panel Door Skin
H-950-HA
Short Door (Covers 21 " Mtg)
H-950-HB
Short Door (Covers 22 3.4" Mtg)
H-950-HC
Short Door (Covers 26%" Mtg)
H-950-HD
Short Door (Covers 31 %" Mtg)
H-950-HE
Short Door (Covers 36 3.4" Mtg)
H-950HF
Short Door (Covers 42" Mtg)
H-950-HG
Short Door (Covers 47%" Mtg)
H-950-HH
Short Door (Covers 52lh" Mtg)
H950-HJ
Short Door (Covers 57 3.4" Mtg)
H-950-HK
Short Door (Covers 63" Mtg)
H-950LA
Frame Panel (includes Logo)
H950P
51.4" Bezel Cover Panel
H950Q
10lh" Bezel Cover Panel
H-950SA
Filter (for Fan Assembly)
H~952AA
End Panel (2 per cab)
H-952BA
Stabilizer feet (pair)
H-952CA
Fan Assembly (specify air flow)
H-952EA
Caster Set (4)
H952FA
Leveler Set (4)
H952GA
Filler Strip F & R (jOining two cabinets).
7406782
Kickplate
7406793
Kickplate (for use w/o Stabilizer Feet)
Add on Cabinet Unassembled
Add on -Cabinet Assembled

$170.00
10.00
75.00
250.00
152.00
31.00
31.00
30.00
30.00
21.00
57.00
57.00
57.00
57.00
57.00
57.00
63.50
63.50
63.50
63.50
16.00
10.00
12.00
4.00
39.00
25.50
54.50
14.50
12.50
44.00
4.00
5.50
350.00
400.00

CatalOi No.
H-920
H-921
H-923
H-925
H-950-AA
H-950-BA
H-950-CA
H-950-DA

NOTE: Cabinets are shipped unassembled. For cabinet assembly a

$50.00 charge will be added.

255

ORDERING INFORMATION

UNIVERSAL

FOR

HARDWARE

PREASSEMBLED CABLE

Standard lengths for preassembled cable are: 3, 5, 7, 10, 15 and 25 feet.

Cable price per foot is as follows:
19 conductor Ribbon cable
9 conductor Flat Coaxial cable

$0.60
$1.00

Standard charges for connection of cable to each connector is as follows:

Ribbon
Coaxial

$ 9.00 pel" connector side

$18.00 per connector side
STANDARD PREASSEMBLED CABLES

RIBBON
Type
BC02LXX
BC02SXX
BC02N-XX

CONNECTORS
W021-W021
W023-W023
W028-W021

COAXIAL
Basic
Price
$26.00 $26.00
$26.00

Type
BC03C-XX
BC03D-XX

To the above prices, add price of cable:

Example: BC02L7

$30.20

I-BC02L-XX
7 feet ribbon cable @ $O:60/ft.

$26.00
4.20
$30.20

256

Basic
CONNECTORS Price
W021-W021
44.00
W021W022
45.00

MODULE EXTENDER
W980

UNIVERSAL
ACCESSORIES

The W980 Module Extender allows access to the module circuits without
breaking connections between the module and mounting panel wiring.
For double size flip.chip modules use two W980 extenders side by side. The
W980 is for use with A, K and W Series 18 pin modules.

W980-$14

257

MODULE EXTENDER
W982

UNIVERSAL
ACCESSORIES

The W982 serves a function similar to the W980 except it contains 36 pins
for use with M series modules. The W982 can be used with all modules in
this catalog. A, K, and W series modules will make contact with only 2 side
pins. A2, 82, etc.
For double size M Series modules use two W982 extenders side by side.

W982-$18
258

BLANK "ODULES
W970-W975, W990-W999

UNIVERSAL
HARDWARE

These 10 blank modules offer convenient means of integrating special circuits

and even small mechanical components into a FLIP CHIP system, without
loss of modularity. Both single and doublesize boards are supplied with con
tact area etched and gold plated. The W990 Series modules provide connector
pins on only one module side for use with H800 connector blocks. W970
series modules have etched contacts on both sides of the module for use
with double density connectors Type H804, and low density Type H808.

Type

Height

Pins

W990

Single

18

Descriptron
Bare board, splitlug terminals

Handle

Price

attached

$ 2.50

$ 5.00

W991

Double

36

Bare board, splitlug terminals

attached

W992

Single

18

Copper clad, to be etched by user

separate

$ 2.00

W993

Double

36

Copper clad, to be etch,ed by user

separate

$ 4.00

W998

Single

18

Perforated, 0.052" holes, 18 with etched

lands. The holes are on 0.1" centers,
both horizontally and vertically.

attached

$ 4.50

W999

Double

36

Perforated, 0.052" holes, 36 with etched

lands. The holes are on 0.1" centers,
both horizontally and vertically.

attached

$ 9.00

W970

Single

36

Bare board, no split lugs, similar to attached

W990, contact both sides

$ 4.00

W971

Double

72

Bare board, no split lugs, similar to

W991, contact both sides

attached

$ 8.00

W972

Single

36

Copper clad both sides similar to W992

separate

$ 4.00

W973

Double

72

Copper clad both sides similar to W993

separate

$ 6.00

W974

Single

36

same as W998, contact both sides

attached

$ 9.00

W975

Double

72

same as W999, contact both sides

attached

$18.00.

Old boards with .067" holes on .2" centers are no longer available.

259

After all the components have been attached to the board, the
module IS degreasecl to remove contaminants In preparation for
flow soldering

260

K Series
Applications
The engineering of K Series would be for naught if it couldn't be applied
practically. The following section shows but a handful of uses for which K
Series has been designed. Practically all of those presented were designed
by DIGITAL's module application group which provides design assistance to
our customers. More than 300 logic systems for control and interfacing have
been designed by this group. These include designs of: simple interfac.ing
between a computer and stepping motors; controls for injection molding
machines; plating machine controls; transfer machine controls; materials
sensing and classification systems; pipeline trow counters; camera shutter
controls; computer interfacing to observatory telescopes; and a woodcutting
machinery controller. Many of the control applications have been conversions
from relays to K Series.
There is an excellent likelihood that our engineers have designed a control
system for equipment just like yours. If not we would like to give it a try. '

261

APPLICATION

KSERIES CONSTRUCTION RECOMMENDATIONS

A high percentage of all failures in electronic systems result directly from
hasty planning of nonelectronic aspects. Much time and trouble can be saved
by planning mechanical assembly before construction begins. Wiring methods
and lead dress, heat distribution and temperature control, power supply
reliability and line fault contingencies, and the attitudes and habits of people
working near the system all merit forethought. Important opportunities for
..,liability, maintainability, and convenience will be lost if early and consistent
attention is not given the topics below.

Environment
Temperature

B.

Module temperature ratings are -20C to 65C (01= to 150F) except ~01,
K202, K210, K211, K220, K230, and K596 which are limited to OC (36F)
minimum. These ratings are for average air temperature at the printed board.
and take local heating by high dissipation components into account. Free,
unobstructed air convection is required for reliable operation; the plane of each
m~ule must be essentially vertical for this reason. /
Convection is required not only to remove heat but also to distribute it, and
movable louvres or baffles used to obtain selfheating under frigid conditions
must not interfere with air movement within and around modules.

b. Motion
Transport or use in trucks or aboard ships can vibrate modules sufftCiently to
work them out of their sockets. K271, K273, K604, K644. K731, K732. K303,
K301 and K323 modules with K374 or similar controls attached are most
subject to disturbance.
If modules are mounted in a K943 19inch panel. use K980 end plates and a
1907 cover.
If modules are mounted on the hinged door of an enclosure. position the
K941 so a support bolted to the side of the enclosure will contact the
modules when the door is closed, taking care not to let the support interfere
with ribbon cable on K508. K524. K604. and K644.
Mercury contact relays in K273 modules should be maintained within 30 of
vertical while operating to insure correct logic output.
Controls such as K374, etc. will hold their setting in vibration, but are easily
disturbed by repeated contact with loose wiring, etc.
Finally. take pains not to nick logiC wires if vibration is likely to be encoun
teredo Use a quality wire stripper. One of the new motor driven rotary types
could easily pay for itself by reducing wiring time and avoiding vibration
induced wire breakage.
~
\

c. Contaminants
Sulphurous ftJmes will attack exposed copper or silver; their presence demands the coating of ribbon connections and K731 heatsink cladding with
suitable insulating varnish or plastic. A combination of high humidity and
262

contaminated atmospheres requires such treatment on all printed wiring of

K301. K323. and K303 timers and controls, .ince at maximum settings even
a few microamperes of leakage will affect their timing. Varnish or coatings are
neither required nor recommended in less hostile conditions, and in any case
it is desirable to exclude contaminants.
d. Convenience
Adjustments sholJld be mounted so the least critical are easiest to reach.
Calibrated controls such as K374, etc. should be positioned in a fogical
pattern before K303 sockets are wired. Ruggedness and feel should govern
the selection of remote timer controls likely to be operated in moments of
preoccupation or alarm.
Pluggable connections to K716, K724K725, and (optionally) to K782K784
allow electricians to complete their work while the logic itself is being built
or checked elsewhere. Plan cable routing to simplify installation of electronics
last. Take advantage of the ease with which a K941 mounting bar can be
fastened to a preinstalled K940 foot.
logic Wiring
a. Genera' Information
Wire wrapping is the most suitable technique for the sockets used with K
series modules. Some prefer AMP TermiPoint (trademark) but neither AMP
nor DEC can guarantee full compatibility for this system. Solder fork connectors are optional; wrapped connections may also be soldered. For large
volume' repetitive systems using K943 mounting panels, DEC offers a machinewrapping service.
Never solder or wire wrae with any tool if there are modules installed, unless
the tool is grounded 1:0 the frame to drain static charges, and unless AC
operated devices work from isolation-- transformers. It is safest to avoid AC
operated wire wrap tools together. Handoperated pistol'grip wire wrapping
tools are surprisingly efficient and easy to use. If automatic machine wrapping
is contemplated, plan for only two wraps per pin.
b. Wire Types
Teflon (trademark) insulation over size 22 tinned solid copper wire is best
for soldering. Size 24 tinned solid copper wire must be used for wrapping
H800 and K943 pins. Teflon (trademark) inSUlation may be used,. but some
prefer to sacrifice high temperature performance by using Kynar (trademark),
to get greater resistance to cut-through where soldering is not involved.
Type 932 bussing strip allows module power and ground pins A and C to be
connected conveniently, and is also helpful if several modules have common
pin connections.
c. Procedures
First solder in all bussing strips. Next tie all grounds and grounded pins together. Finally pointtopoint wire all other connections.
Run all wires diagonally or vertically. Do not run wires horizontally except to
adjacent pins or along mounting bar between modules. Horizontal' zig-zag
wiring interferes with checking and is prone to insulation cut-through. Leave
wires a bit slack so they can be pushed aside for probing. Cabling is definitely
not recommended. Wires should be more or less evenly distributed over the
wiring area.
263

When wrapping, avoid chains of top-wrap-to-bottom-wrap sequences which

entail numerous unwrappings if changes must be made. Properly sequenced
wraps require no more than three wires to be replaced for anyone change in
two-wraps-per-pln systems. Never re-wrap any wire. For best reliability, do not
bend or stress wrapped pins, for this may break some of the cold welds. Follow tool supplier's recommendations on tool gauging and maintenance etc.
As a convenience, DEC stocks three Gardener-Denver tools under numbers
HalO, Hall, and H812. See specifications pages.
Field Wiring
a. AC Pilot Circuits
All screw terminals used in the K-Series have clamps so that wires do not
need any further treatment after insulation is stripped. All terminals can take
either one or two wires up to 14 gauge.
K716 terminals have been arranged so AC inputs all go to one end of the
interface block, and AC outputs all go to the other end. The eight terminals
nearest the center are typically connected only to each other and to a few
return and AC supply wires. Input and output leads should be segregated so
they do not block entry to the ribbon connector sockets. If sockets face to
the left, AC inputs will be above and all other connections below. Wires
should be routed down the connector side of K716 blocks to cable clamps or
wiring ducts placed parallel with K716s. (See diagrams on K716 data page.)
Plan the logical arrangement of field wiring terminals and indicators before
module locations are selected to avoid excessive folding or twisting of ribbon
cables. (See recommendations on module locations below.)
b. DC and Transducer circuits
DC outputs from K644, K656, K681, and K683 and AC outputs from K604
and K614 are high level; wiring is noncritical. low level inputs, however, may
require special treatment to avoid false indications. low level signals should
at least be isolated from AC line and DC output signals throughout the field
wiring system, and, as a minimum, individual twisted pairs should be used
for signals and return connections.
For lower Signal levels or longer wiring runs, shielded pairs may be required,
with'the shield grounded only at one point, preferably at the logic system end
unless one side of the transducer is unavoidably grounded. Conduit which
may be grounded indiscriminately is not an effective substitute for shielded,
insulated wiring.
All signals except line voltage AC inputs use the straight-through connections
of K716 terminals 15 through 24. Within the K716, leads are shortest to
terminals 15, 17, 18, 19, and 20; use these terminals for minimum noise on
K524 low level signals.
Module types K578, K614, K615, K650, K652, K656, and 'K658 have their
own terminal strips and do not require the use of a K716. Modules that do
not have terminal strips may be connected to field wiring through the K782
or K784 module.

264

Module Locations
a. End Sockets (K941)
The first sockets to assign are those for K731 and K732 regulators, and for
K301, K323, and K303 timers. If possible, mount regulators nearest the foot
of a K941 mounting bar, so their extra bulk projects into the space between
the mounting surface and the first HaOO block on the bar. Controls mounted
'on the same mounting surface opposite K731 source modules may be as much
as 'Va'H deep without touching modules.
Sockets at the outer ena aT K941 mounting bars are the only locations where
K303 timers can have integral controls mounted. Even where the use of
K370group controls is not initially planned. assignment of K303 modules to
these outer locations is recommended. Also. these sockets should be the first
reserved as spares if any unused locations are available. This way maximum
flexibility will be preserved for possible design changes or additions.

b. Interface Modules
AC and DC interface modules such as K508. K524, K604, and K644 should

be assigned locations that simplify cabling. Ribbon cables can be twisted by

a succession of 45 0 folds, but a neat installation should be planned. Assign
the location and position of K716 interface blocks first. Consider such features
as logical arrangement of indicator lights for trouble shooting, ease Qf routing and tracing field wiring, and directness and length of ribbon cable runs
back to the logic modules.
After _K716 locations and assignments have been selected, assign socket
positions for interface modules (K508, etc.). The order should be coordinated
so the combined ribbon cables will lie flat together. Excess ribbon cable can
be easily and neatly folded away. Lengths other than 30" are not available
since these modules cannot be tested and stocked until cables are cut and
soldered. This should cause -no difficulty if module locations are assigned
thoughtfully.

c. Display Modules
If K671 decade displays are required, select their locations after regulator and
interface modules have been aSSigned sockets. The 12" cables on these
modules are oriented for convenient assembly of displays above logic modules, to be viewed from outside the door or enclosure in which K940 and K941
hardware is mounted. Used this way, the digits of lower significance have
cables below those of more significant digits.
For neatest cabling and quickest module wiring, counter and display modules
should be arranged so the counter input will be nearest the K940 mounting
surface. Notice that pin connections on K671, K210, and K220, and K230
modules are coordinated, so that a side-by-side pairing of flip-flop-and associated K671 modules will result in short, neat, easy wiring. Ribbon cable passes
easily between modules, so it is not necessary to restrict K671 mOdules to
the topmost row. However, the limited cable length will usually restrict them
to the top mounting bar in systems using more than one K941.
Do not fold or arrange ribbon cables so that they lie flat on the upper edges
of modules, as this will restrict the flow of cooling air.

265

System Power
a. Supply Transformer
Any filament or "control" transformer rated at 12 v or 12.6 v RMS on
nominal 120 v line voltage may be used to supply power to K series logic.
However, use of a 12 v instead of a 12.6 v transformer reduces maximum
current ratings from K731 and K732 by 15%, as does a 5% vo'ltage drop
from any other cause such as resistance in secondary wiring or line voltage
below the nominal 10% tolerance.
Transformer current rating should be for capacitor-input filter, about 50%
higher than the rating required for resistive loads. Thus a single K731 1 amp
regulator requires a center-tapped transformer with 3,4 ampere rating on
resistive loads at 12.6v, or with two 6.3v windings rated 3,4 ampere each.
These transformer selection considerations can of course be "eliminated by
using K741 or K743 transformers with noise filtering built-in.

b. Noise Filtering

Hash filter capacitors of 0.1 mf each are recommended from each side of the
power transformer secondary to chassis ground. In environments where the
AC line may carry unusually large amounts of noise, line filters such as
Sprague Filterols (trademark) are advisable. K series systems must not share
12 volt power with any electromechanical device, since the transformer itself
is the primary filter for medium-frequency line noise rejection.
c. Power Wiring
In systems not requiring full use of the quick-change features of the K716
and K940, transformer secondaries can be wired directly to pins U and V of
regulator modules. If power connections are to be removed with maximum
speed, a W021 connector board may be used to bring 12 VAC power into the
system. It is best to limit current through any pin to about 2 amperes, so in
large systems several W021 pins are needed for each side of the secondary.
d. Alternate Power Supplies

Any source of 5 VDC 10% may be used for K series systems at ordinary
room temperatures, provided noise, hash, spikes, tumon-overshoot, etc. are
reasonably well controlled. K series modules are far less sensitive to noise
on power lines than computer-speed circuits, but it is still possible to cause
malfunction or damage if extreme noise is present.
Temperature coefficient of the K731 regulator is selected to compensate for
that of timers and other circuits, so operation over temperature extremes with
constant-voltage supplies involves a sacrifice in timing consistency. Output
fanouts are also degraded if constant voltage supplies are used at extreme
low temperatures. Derate linearly from 15 ma at room temperature to 12 ma
at -2QC (OF) for constant-voltage power supplies.

e. Line Failure
When unscheduled shutdown of a K-series system cannot be toferated in
spite of AC power failure, some form of local energy storage is required. To
withstand. short-term failures it is possible to add extra capacitance from pin
A to pin C. However, manual grounding of. pin 0 (tumon level) may be ra266

quired to start the system, since the external capacitance will appear to the
regulator as a short and output current will be limited to a low value. For each
ampere millisecond of de power storage beyond the rise of K731 OK level,
10,000 mfd is required. The supply itself provides one half amperemillisecond
internally. K732 slave regulators each provide one ampere-millisecond
internally. However, these survival times are only available when regulators
are operating at or below 75% of their nominal ratings.
A 5 volt battery, or a 6 volt battery with series diode(s) to drop the voltage to
5 volts, may be used as an alternate source of power in case of line voltage
failure. In very small systems (with some types of batteries) it may be prac
tical to use the battery itself as a shunt regulator, charging it through a
simple full-wave rectifier and dropping resistor circuit from the same kind
of transformer used with K-series regUlators. Unless the current is very low
with respect to battery size, however, some means of switching the battery
connection will be required. Below is shown a circuit which can be used for
current requirements to 1 ampere. Th~ same principle can be extended to
larger systems with slightly more complex circuitry.
6 VOLT BATTERY

PIN A

POWER FAILURE SWITCH FOR EMERGENCY BATTERY

267

CONVERSION OF RELAY
CIRCUITS TO K SERIES
Conversion of relay logic to K Series is a simple and straight-forward procedure. The design of a solid state control system using three basic functions
-AND, OR and NOT-is performed the same as with relays. Thus the prob
lem of converting a given relay circuit to K Series may be broken down into
two simple steps. First, derive from the relay circuit a set of logical equations
using standard logical notation describing the operation of the circuit. Second, from these logical equations, design a K Series circuit to perform the
desired logical function.

Relay Logic
Consider the following circuit:

The light only comes on when relay contact CRI is closed (when the relay
is on). So if the letter l ~epresents the light and CRI represents the relay,
we can write the logic equation for this circuit as l
CRl. When CRI is off
(false), then l is off (false) and vice versa.

Relay NOT
Consider the following

circu~t:

In this circuit, the light is on when the relay is off, and the light is off when
the relay is on. This is just the NOT function, so we can write the logic
equation l
CRl.

268

Relay AND

CRL~

LJR1

flH~

In this circuit. the light is on only when both CRI, and CR2 are closed. This
is just the AND function and can be written
-

L = CRI CR2
Relay OR
CR1

CR2

In this circuit, the light is on when either or both contacts CRI, CR2 are
CR2.
closed. This is the OR function L = CRI

K Series Logic

K Series logic performs the same functions that we have seen relays perform.

AND
AB-hc

OR

NOT

C=A-B

AB~C

C=A+B

A-.C C.A
269

If we were to replace pairs of relay contacts with K Series logic we would get
'
the following:

AND

C R 1 = P - F. CR1 CR2
CR2
CR3
CR3=PCR4

OR

CRS

NOT

CR5~H=CR5

t-----::I~~r~

Co~bined

G-CR3+ CR4

Logic

Often, s~veral basic logic functions occur together to form a more complex
function.
For example:

CR2

Has the equation L

CRl
CR2
Which in the K Series logiC would be

CR1
L

CR2 ------tr-..

Or, for example:

~1

CR2

CR~

III At II'YJ
Has the equation F

= CRI

CR2 CR3

270

Writing Lolic Equations

As noted so far, in writing down the logic equation from logic each relay
contact is assigned a name, which appears as a variable in the equation, as
shown below.

Relay logic

CR1

CR3

Equation L =CRI

+ CR2 + CR3

Writing the equation of more complex sets of relay contacts is simply a

matter of picking out the basic functions one at a time.
For example:

~R1

CR2

CR3

HljR4

Notice that CRl, CR2 perform the AND function, so P = CRI CR2.
The diagram could be redrawn as follows:

(CRr CRZ)CR3

~~

Because CR3, CR4 now perform the OR function, the diagram can be redrawn
as follows:

(CRl

A
CR2l

(CR3+~

.1

II~
271

The two remaining "contacts" perform the AND function, therefare the logic
equation can be written:
L = A 8 and A = CRl CR2 and 8= CR3
therefore L= (CRl .. CR2) (CR3
CR4)

+ CR4

Another example:

First, CR2, CR3 form the AND function resulting in

(CR2. CR3)

Subsequently (CR2 CR3), CR4 form the OR function resulting in

(CR4+(CR2. CR3

Finally, CI, (CR4 + (CR2 CR3

+ (CR4 + (CR2 CR3.

form the AND function so L

= CRI (CR4

Converting logic equation to K Series logic

The object in converting logic equations to K Series logic, is to devise a K
Series logic network which has the same logic equation as the relay logic.
For example, the equation F
logic as follows:

= (A 8) + C can be implemented with K Series

F=(A- Bl+C

272

Or, for example, the equation F

= (A + 8 + C) + (O E)

becomes:

o
F=(A+B+C)+(O. E)
E
A
B

Most logic equations can be implemented with K Series logic in a number

of ways. For example, the equation F A (8 C) may be realized correctly
by either of the designs shown here.

= +

B
C--------------------------~~

A --------------------------~

B
C

In general, when alternate means of implementing a function are available,

the decision as to which one to use is often based on which K Series gates
are available, on which alternative is more economical, orloftentimes on the
designer's personal preferences.
Unfortunately, there is no single route to follow to arrive at a K Series logic
design from the logical equation. As in most design situations, the imagination and intuition of the designer are prime factors in arriving at a solution.
Therefore, once the basic operation of K Series logic becomes familiar, a few
hours of experimenting with the K Series Logic Lab can provide a much
deeper understanding of how to use K Series.
On the following pages, a number of examples are shown of relay circuits
which have been converted into logic equations and then implemented with
K Series logic.

273

..L
6CR

tCR
PBt

SCR

1CR

~H~
. tCR-PSt +PB2.,M

iCR

5CR 1CR

PB2
1M

1eR

PBt

tM- i5t. (tPs+(!CR. 7CR((3PB. iCR)~8CR+tM). 9CR

274

1PS
1M

5CR
9CR

7CR

10L

3P8,

iCR
8CR

1M

tOCR

7CR

UCR

15CR t4CR

H~
1CR

2CR <iQCR.1CR) + USCR. MCR.ttCR)

[U3CR.t2CR)+(1CR. 2CR.~)+(2P8.tCR)]
+(tCR.17CR. tCR. 2P8. iPi. SCR)

275

2CR

2CR
7CR
. 15CR

14CR
HCR

13CR
12CR

1CR

2CR

2PB

10CR
nCR

1CR
2PB
4PB

SCR

276

II

II'"

"", , ,
4,,...,)

'"
"

The printed circuit board layout is a crucial step in module produc

tion. Tolerances are checked to within 1/5000 of an inch.

277

ELECTRO-MECHANICAL

J.I.C.

:a

K SERIES

N.E.M.A.

.GENERAL

r'I'I

MIL.

<!l

..

T.

2INPUT ~
AND +@) ".
_

If 0 ... AI
1"01

"0 .... Al
IN 01

.<!l=l ,T.+
+@)

~"
C-

f<!l '"''
+@

:::.:

+@

""',UI

fA

+@

1"1'1

::a

~ANO~

<!>ANO~

it;
fA

....,

00
(fOIl" AI
INOI

+(!)
+@

EXPANSION
TO +@
5-INPUT +@

AND

+<!>

T+

If 0 ... Al

t'

+<!)

I~

+@

+@

<!> A"O

+(!)
<!)

1"01

+(!)

+@

J;

...D I,!!)

?s.

<!>.ND@

AND@

UlD@

A"O@

ANO@

(!)

.IIO

AIIO

+@

....O

+@
+@

.'IIIIU

\!U

.110

:.-

,..~

ELECTROMECHANICAL

K SERIES

GENERAL

J.I.C.

N.E.M.A.

MIL.

+0

21 NPUT
INCLUSIVE

OR

.@ ..

. -0j

T' ":,"

DJ",,"

::=1_Lt~

J (P,V)

(K,R)

J (P,V)

E
(L,S)

(K,R)

E
(L,S)

"

\0

(FOIl. AI
(f'0'I! .... 1

@~-S

5INPUT .(!lo@
INCLUSIVE .('J. 0 ,
OR @-0 t
.-~.

-0

. !. ~

..

C"OJ

rJ.. ::

.@

00(1)

~-tf

L...~ ~

._

(~

(1-]M
t-'

(NO)

@OII(!)

+@

OII@
OII@

+@
+@

+el>

I +@

o (K,R)

F (M

,n

@ OR@
DR

OR @

OII@
OR

J (P,V)

OR
+@

+@
+@
+(9

OR@
OR

K SERIES

ELECTRO-MECHANICAL

N.E.M.A.

GENERAL

J.I.C.

(1'0"" 81
(NCI

l'O~'"

INVERTING". @ ~
FUNCTION

-r:

II
llle I

+@~~~L ~

.L
.

MIl.

~
.'15
'..
F '''',TI

lIS

DIK.RI

(M.R)

+@

VERtEO

INvERTED

INVEIUE:D

INVERTED

(FORIII A'
COOR'" .,
INC I

'NC'

+@ FI",TI

00

2-INPUT

.@~J:+
.@~

NOR

.@~

+~-.~

NOT@

[
OR

2-INPUT

NAND

-0--1 T

NOT

.~O,!>

OR

o l~.:..~l ..

~OT

J (p.VI

E
(L.SI

(".RI

(L.S I

OR

.@
+@

M~M

--0-- +@=;t. @::.@

+til.-0-i _ +

+ "

~.':.3.

(FORM 81
INCI

(FORM I)

IN C 1

o
1',AI

NOT@
J (P,V)

NOT@

OFf

D(~~

liS
K1' ~

+C!>

t@

~
( ... TJ

Ii (ItI,U)

+@

liS

tC113

DIKRI

NOT

@ANO@

'@~~~T:

__ JH (N.UI

111

1(1\ 3'

(I( ,R

.' -

(~

..

NCT

o@

ELECTRO-MECHANICAL

J.I.C.

K SERIES

GENERAL

2INPUT

(~O~M

Y-+

'=)

m~~;~_t'.

.@~

--"'l

...

BISTABLE
(FlIPFlOP)

r+ 1f::+

... -t

OUU-1

L __

..

@
.,OT
@

sn-1"

+3,

OFFDElAY .1~~~~~

J (P,V)

I'.RI

IL,S)

Ik,R)

+~
NOT

+@

NOT

+0

NOT

LATCHING II[LAY

l'ONel
DELAY
STAIIT

NOT +
J (P,")

T+
RESET-1~ ~
.0

L"'TCNING_~"Y

0"

NOT.

OR@
'KIT BOTH

fIIOT BOTH

00

.(j0~'~

[t

@OR@

MIL.

N.E.M.A.
(FOAM CI

(FORM C)

t~l~ +~
OFF DE LAY
START

"

COIOTACTS SWITCH T SECS

AFrU ,TAIIT sYIOCH"_1
IIOTOII 011 I'NEUIIATIC TI.III

T SECS

M :ELAY

CONTACTS SWITCH T SECS

AFTER START SYNCHRONOUS
MOTOR OR PNEUMATIC TIMER

~I_".~

~
---v---

.
-I{$IO

oJ

NOT

~EIL.~
@

",V,

INPUT SPLIT LUG

~.LITLUG-

3.4.',7.'.'

5,4,',7,'.'
Oulftu,

~.T.V

" ' T, 00' TO )0 SEes

OU'''UT LEVELS C"AN., , SICI "'TE. ITa.,

~LT.~~~.T.V

I!!!!

SIT T, 0 01 TO '0 sres

OUTPuT UvtLI 'tU.IIGE T SECS ""Ut ,TA.'

ELECTRO-MECHANICAL
GENERAL

J.I.C.

DECODER:
BCD TO
10 LINE

282

K SERIES
N.E.M.A.
FROM 1<210 COUNTER

~--------------------------------O

~--------------------------------__ 1

~---------------------------------e 2
~------------------~----------------~ 3
~--------------------------------------.4

~----------------------------------------.~

~------------------------------------------___ 6

~--------------------------------------------e 7
F

o (K,R)

F (M,T)

1/3
K123

H
M (T)
K (R)

N (U)

MIL.
FROM 1<210 COUNTER

' - - - - -.. 0
'------_1

"-------2
' - - - - - - - - - -.. 3
~----------...

'--------------_ 5

L..-------------_6

' - - - - - - - - - -..... 7

283

ELECTRO-MECHANICAL

GENERAL

J.I.C.

f-iz~ ~

..

f-i"r- ~

CROSSBAR
SELECTOR

a.

a..

(Jl

(Jl

HOMETO
S

284

SELECT
'0

-K580

+@

~SPLIT LUG

3,4,6,7,8,9

+@

+@

I,

+@

I ,

OUTPUT
10,21

J,L,N,R,T,V

:z
H

IR

11,21

I T

I V

Ie

- F (M,T)

+@-Ir

o (K,R)'

12,01

Ie12,11

!'T1
3:

?>

12,21

H (H,U)
CROSSPOINT COINCIDENCE DETECTED

1
2
4
8
TO K1S1 DECODER

N
00

8Y .'23 "AND" FUNCTION

+

@.

AND +

U'I

@Y

(J1

",

::a

SELEC T

-~

+ .@
I ,

+@

SPLIT LUG

I ,

f;i

U'I

+@

I ,

+@

3,4,6,7,8,9
OUTPUT

10,21

J,L,H,R,T,V
+@
[1,21

s:

--+--..----

+@

F (M,T)

H (H,U)
CROSSPOINT COINCIDENCE DE TEC TED

TO Kt61 DECODER

8Y .'23 "ANO"FUNCTION
+

@.

AND +

- - - -.. --.--.---------.-.---.-.,.----_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _--lL--_ _ _ _ _ _ _- - - - - - - -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _--L_ _L.----..J

APPLICATION

K SERIES SEQUENCERS -

GENERAL

A fundamental part of many K Series systems is a sequencer that controls

the progression from one state or operation to the next state or operation.
Four logic elements are available to define the state or operation currently
in effect, and there i[lre also several choices of method for moving from each
state to the next, and for deriving output signals that include any arbitrary
set of states. This note considers each sequencer in a general way, so that
their overall merits can be compared before starting detailed design with
the 1 or 2 most appropriate. The simplest sequencer of all, consisting of
logic gates alone, is not mentioned here; but of course if AND and OR functions by themselves can do the job, splendid.

1. TIMER SEQUENCER
Several independent K303 timers connected in cascade form a very
flexible, completely adaptable sequencer. If each timer input is driven by
the direct (non-inverted) output of the previous timer, removing logic '''1''
from the first will cause all the outputs to fall like hesitant dominoes. A
pushbutton. limit switch, etc. can then reset all timerS by restoring "1" at
the first until the next cycle is wanted. Or by connecting the timers in a
loop with an odd number of inversions a self-recycling sequencer can be
obtained. The clock circuits shown on pages 93-94 of the Industrial
Handbook are special cases of this latter technique.
The complete adjustability of timer sequencers can be a disadvantage in
some applications. When more than 3 or 4 steps are needed, the sheer
number of knobs to twiddle begins to lead toward possible confusion and
perhaps "provocative maintenance."

2. COUNTER SEQUENCER
One K2IO counter provides up to 16 sequence states, and many more
are obtainable by cascading. The counter may be stepped along by a
fixed-frequency source such as the line frequency, or by a K303 clock. It
is also possible to generate stepping pulses by completion signals from
the processes being sequenced. KI84 rate multipliers can be conveniently
used to produce such pulses. Counter sequencers recycle without external
aids.at 9 or 15 (BCD or binary connections) and may be set to recycle
at other steps as shown in K2IO specifications.
Counter sequencers offer the most discrete states for the money, and
the entire sequence can be scaled up or down in time simply by adjusting the input stepping rate. However, if many different output signals
are to be derived from a counter sequencer, the gating can become com
plex unless the signals required happen to fit those available from K161
octal decoders or from the counter directly.
3. SHIFT SEQUENCERS
K230 shift registers can be connected as ordinary ring counters or as
switchtail ring counters. Specialized shift sequencers such as Barker

286

code (pseudo-random) sequencers are also possible_ The most generally

useful type is the switch-tail (Johnson code) ring counter, in which the
last stage is fed back inverted into the first. This provides two states for
every flip-flop, or 8 states if all four flip-flops in a K230 are utilized. The
pattern achieved is the same falling-domino behavior obtained with the
non-recirculating timer sequencer,. except that the "dominoes" fall up
one-by-one after they have finished falling down. Either fixed frequency
or event-completion signals can be used to step a shift sequencer, just
as for counter sequehcers.
Shift sequencers cost more per state than counter sequencers. Their only
advantage lies in the fact that any state or any collection of contiguous
states can be detected by a simple 2input gate. Not only does this feature
simplify the derivation of many overlapping output signals, but it also
offers excellent flexibility for modifications after construction. The need
for only two connections to generate any once-per-sequence signal to
start and end at any arbitrary state even permits practical patch-panel
programming of output signals.
4.

POLYFLOP SEQUENCERS

If the state or operation in progress is to be determined in many cases

by a combination of external factors, instead of primarily by the
sequencer itself, a polyflop may be the best solution. A polyflop is simply
a mUlti-state circuit which will remember the last state into which it was
forced until the next input comes along. Polyflops can have any number
of states, though the practical limit is probably 8 or fewer. Set-reset
flip-flops are a very common special case of the polyflop, having 2 states.
If you want a name for the next six types you could call them tripflop,
quadraflop, pentaflop, hexaflop, septaflop, and octaflop.
The general polyflop is built from as many K113 inverting gates as there
are states required, each with input AND expansion sufficient to gate
together all outputs by the one that gate controls. Thus anyone low
output will force all other outputs high. Polyflops do not establish any
fixed order through the possible steps as the other three sequencers do,
and so perhaps should be called state memories rather than state seQuencers. However, there are some situations in which a polyfJop is
found to be a superior replacement for one of the ordered sequencers,
such as where several different outside signals must ~e able to force the
control into corresponding specific states immediately without passing
through the normal sequence.
SUMMARY

Sequencer Type Relative Cost per State

Modification
Flexibility

Other Features

Timer

highest

easiest

Can be self-stepping

Counter

lo,,{-med

fair

Best for many states,

few outputs

Shifter

medium

good

Suitable for patch

panel setup

Polyflop

medium

fair

States may be forced

in any order

287

APPLICATION
TIMER SEQUENCERS
The simplest and most obvious way to sequence operations or states on a
machine or in a control system is to use several timers in cascade. Below
is shown a simple threestate timers sequencer.

"SET

o-.J
A pushbutton, clock, or another sequencer can provide signal A that resets
all timers and begins the sequence. Any number of timers may be cascaded,
but if many steps are needed one of the less flexible sequencers should be
considered as a means of reducing the number of adjustments and the cost.
Outputs other than those available directly from the timers can be obtained
by a two-input gate connected to appropriate direct or inverter timer outputs.
For example, a signal true during both Tz and T3 can be obtained by.ANDing
output D with the inversion of output B. The possibility of deriving any onceper-cycle output from this type of sequencer with two-input gates only is a
virtue shared with switch-tail shifting sequencers.
The inverted output from the last timer in the chain may be used to provide
the initiate Signal resulting in self-recycling. However, sufficiently large timing
capacitors must be in use to allow the initiate signal to rise all the way to
+5 V if normal relations between timing RC and time delays are to be maintained. The Timer Control section of this Handbook shows short self-recycling
timer chains usable at high recycle rates. Three inverSions, or any odd number of inversions must be contained within a self-recycling loop.
Many variations are possible by combining timer sequencers with other types
of sequencers, branching to auxiliary sequencer chains, gating timer inputs
from external devices, etc.

288

APPLICATION

COUNTER SEQUENCERS
Counter sequencers offer the largest number of discrete steps for the money,since for N flip-flops up to 2N states are obtainable. A single K210counter,
for example, offers up to 16 ~tates for $27.
A source of timing signals, such as the "line sync" output from the K730,
K731, or a K303 clock may be used to advance a counter sequencer at uniform increments of time. In addition, event completion signals may be used
to gate, augment, or substitute for the uniform time signal. One way to sub-

EYENT COMPLETION SIGNAL

UNIFORM TIME SIGNAL

Event completion signal gates the time signal if the latter is a

normally low, relatively higher frequency signal. Event completion
signal augments the time signal if the latter is a normally high,
relatively lower frequency signal.
stitute for time signals is to use a KI84 Rate Multiplier as if it were four
separate differentiating pulse generators with ORed outputs.

GATE GATE GATE GATE

EYENT EYENT EYENT EYENT

USING KI84 TO GENERATE EVENT COMPLETION PULSES

The principal disadvantage of counter sequencers is gating complexity, if
many outputs must be derived which are not simply the flip-flop outputs
themselves. Counter sequencers are most suitable for high-resolution
sequencing of relatively few outputs whose relationship to sequencer states
is unlikely to be modified after construction_
A crosspoint matrix offers reasonably low cost and good flexibility for devel
oping counter sequencers with large numbers of states. For example, the 64
state sequencer shown here costs about $100 before any 2input state
detectors are added.

289

STEP

64 INTERSECTIONS
IDENTIFIED BY
ONE UNIQUE
XY COMBINATION

.6
32

64 STATE CROSSPOINT SEQUENCER

The desired states may be detected one-by-one using any two-input AND gate
such as those of gates K1l3, K123, or K134, or two-input gates on other
modules like K210 counters, K230 shift registers, K303 timers, K604 or K614
AC switches, K644 or K656 DC drivers, etc. Or several states may be combined by ORing the outputs of several two-input AND gates as shown below.

YO

OUTfJUT HIGH
FOR COUNTER
STEPS O. 7. AND 42.

)(0

Y7
)(0

Y2
)(5

290

APPLICATION

SHIFTER SEQUENCERS

An alternate to the Counter Sequencer for generating many outputs, especially where some of the output sequences may be revised after construction,
is the switch-tail shift ring.
STEP

SWITCH TAil SHIFT RING

--L.J,

____...-!r1

I
I

I
I

o
STATE

:
I
I

Anyone state can be detected by a single 2 input gate. For example, state
2 is true if B is high and C is low; state 4 is true if A and 0 are both high,
etc. Moreover, any contiguous array of states may be detected by a gate of
only two inputs. For example, state 2, 3, and 4 can be combined by a twoinput gate that looks for A and B both high. This convenient characteristic
not only reduces the cost and complexity of output gating, but also makes
last minute changes easy since no new gates have to be added to modify
the steps to which a given output gate responds, so long as they are contiguous. Also, notice that state 0 is on an equal footing with the others so
that "contiguous" states may include or span the zero or home state.
The two input gating rule could be exploited to permit patch-panel coding of
a general-purpose sequencer. One possible arrangement "for such a panel is
shown here, for a four flip-flop sequencer. In use, one would simply AND
start and finish signals that span the desired state or states.
START

PATCH PANEL

FINISH

STATE

A
@

Ii

ii

c-

@)

@)

B
@

ii

'0

For the special case of four states to be spanned, only one connection is
required. Observe that to span more than half the available states, it is
necessary to detect their complement and invert.
Switch-tail shift rings can be driven from all of the same sources as counter
sequencers, and may be extended to as many states as desired_ If N is the
number of shift register flip-flops, 2 N states will be obtained in the
sequencer.

291

APPLICATION
POLYFLOP SEQUENCERS

Just as a flip-flop can be set to one of two states and remember it, a logic
circuit that has three, four, or more states will remember the last of its
several states to which it has been set_
.

TRIFLOP

The fundamental principle of the polyffop is that each inverting AND gate
must have an input from all other outputs but its own.
POLYFLOP

K113

K003

MODULE
COST

TRIFLOP
QUAORAFLOP
PENTAFLOP
HEXAFLOP
SEPTAFLOP
OCTAFLOP
NONAFLOP

1
1-1/3
12/3
2
21/3
2-2/3
3

0
1-1/3
12/3
2
4-2/3
5-1/3
6

$11.00
$21.00
$27.00
$32.00
$50.00
$57.00
$63.00

The table above shows the components needed to build polyflops in the
practical range of sizes. Module cost figures refer only to module sections
actually used, and there is a significant amount of wiring required for the
larger polyflops. Nevertheless, there will be circumstances in which a polyflop is more efficient than either a more conventional sequencer or a collection of ordinary set-reset flip-flops. Through the OR-expansion capability of
K113 gates, externat signals can be readily gated into a polyflop using low
cost gate expanders. Selected output is low; all others high.

292

APPLICATION

USING K303 TIMERS FOR FREQUENCY SETPOINT

A K303 timer will reset to the start of its timing cycle when its inputs become high regardless of its previous state. This feature can be exploited
to distinguish two pulse repetition rates, to detect a missing pulse in an
otherwise continuous pulsetrain, or to close a frequency-regulating feedback
loop. (Note: Where critical requirements are placed on K303 timing consistency in the millisecond range, consider the use of a low-ripple supply such
as H710 to minimize modulation of the timing period at the ripple frequency.

INPUT

I
I
I
I

I.

~
1<303
SETTING

I ____

:
I

OUTPUT

~~--~~--~I;~.----~~-I
I
I

MISSED
PULSE

L __ _

END OF

PUlSET~AIN

Input signal can be a square wave or pulses of any width down to 0.3% of
the maximum delay available with the timing capacitor used. (Pulsewidths
down to 0.1 % or less may be used if timing consistency can be sacrificed).
Timer delay would normally be 5et 30% to 50% longer than the nominal
pulse repetition rate to detect missed pulses' in a train, or at the geometric
mean between two pulse periods which are to be distinguished.
By cascading timers, pulses as short as 300 nanoseconds may be stretched
to any length needed. However, pulses less than several microseconds in
length do not produce consistent or predictable time delays from the K303,
and are only recommended for pulse-stretching (using built-in 0.002 mf
timing capacitor).

293

APPLICATION

ESTIMATING K303 TIME JITTER

Repeat accuracy in the K303 can deviate as much as 8% of base time or
frequency or even more if sufficient ripple is present on the voltage supply line.
Jitter is related to frequency or time setting and may be estimated by the
graph showing maximum jitter from a K731 power supply at 75% of its
maximum output. (i.e. 1 ms. period @ 500 mv. supply ripple yields 8%
jitter.) Jitter at a given frequency is also proportional to supply ripple.
Reduction of ripple in applications requiring high accuracy may be accom
plished by using a separate, lightly loaded K731 or by using the H716 or
H710 Power Supply. Recovery times less than 300C will be additive to supply
jitter. When used as a clock the timer controls K371, K373, or K375 will pro
vide the proper recovery times.
If peak-to-peak ripple is held to 100 mv, 950/0 repeat accuracy may be expected from the K303 at all the settings.

10'~--------------------------------------------------~
K303
PERCENT ~ JITTER vs. F'RQUENCY
500nw ripple on . . ,

"

.01' ....._ _-'-___--1""-_ _- ' -_ _--10_ _ _....._ _ _....._ _ _ _ _ _....._ __

10...

100.,.

lOMe:

11M

294

APPLICATION

COMBINING K WITH MSERIES MODULES

There are several types of applications in which a combination of M and K
Series modules is better than either one alone, such as interfacing a K Series
system to a computer or interfacing an M Series system to electro-mechanical
devices. Here are the things to consider and recommended designs for both
pulses and levels in each direction.
TIMING
Timing considerations are important. but unfortunately are not reducible to
simple rules: as in any other logic design task, interfacing K with M Series
modules requires adherence to all timing constraints of the output device,
the input device, and the logic loops (if any) as a whole. As a minimum,
M Series signal driving K Series circuits must last long enough (at least 4
microseconds even if no propagation within the K Series is required) so that
the K Series will not reject it as if it were noise; and as a minimum, K Series
signals driving M Series circuits must be received by M Series inputs that will
not be confused by ultra-slow risetimes_
K TO M SERIES LEVELS
K SERIES

__

(~:~;~~~~~':o~NI~----

~ TO
~

AIilYM

-SERIES INPUT

MIIilIMUM OF 2 GATES

K TO MSERIES LEVEL CONVERTER

Note: Total lead length connected to input of first M Series gate should
be less than 6 inches, to minimize any tendency toward oscillation
while active region is being traversed. Do not use slowed K Series.
levels. If noise still gets through, a .001 capacitor from M Series input
pin to ground can be added.

M TO K SERIES LEVELS

1. Diode gate inputs (K113, K123, etc.) and drivers with flexprint
cables (K604, K644, K671) may be paralleled freely with M Series
inputs.
2. M Series outputs should not be paralleled (wired AND) with K Series
_
outputs.
3. K303 inputs, K220, K230 readin gate inputs, and K13S and K161
inhibit inputs require the full 5 volt K Series swing, and normally
should not be paralleled with M Series inputs. Also in this category
are clear inputs to K202, K210, K220, and K230. M Series gate out
puts will rise all the way to + SV if no M Series inputs are paralleled
with these points, except the K161 inhibit input.
4. Other K Series inputs generally may be driven directly, but in some
cases heavy capacitive loading will slow the transitions.

295

K TO M SERIES PULSES

NORMAL
1100KHz)
K SERIES RISE
(2ma LOAD)
200pt

Note: Same input restrictions as K to M Series level converter. Ml13

may be replaced by M602 circuit if desired.

M TO K SERIES PULSES

Use a type M302 delay multivibrator set for at least 5 psec (capacitor
pins H1L2 or SlS2). Observe same restrictions on K Series inputs to
be driven as listed above under "M to K Series levels."
Loading
Driving M from K Series modules, each risetime-insensitive input should
be regarded as a 2ma K Series load, and K Series inputs may be freely
mixed with M Series inputs up to the total K Series fanout of 15 milliamperes. M Series inputs could be regarded as 1.6ma each if more
complicated rules and qualifications concerning use with K303 timers
and reduction in low-output noise rejection were established, but the
2 rna equivalence is simpler and safer.'
Driving K from M Series, each milliampere of K Series load should be
regarded as one M Series unit load.
For computer interfacing and other M-Series applications where K Series is
used as a buffer to keep noise in the external environment from reaching
high-speed logic, beware of long wires between the M and K Series portions.
For full noise protection, all signal leads penetrating the noisy environment
normally must have K-series modules at both ends. EIA converters (K596,
K696) or lamp drivers may offer a helpful increase in signal amplitude or de
crease in allowable line impedance for long data links. In any case, use all the
slowdown connections or slant capacitors that the required data rates permit.

296

APPLICATION

COMBINING K WITH A SERIES MODULES

The voltage breakdown ratings of K series gate module inputs (K1l3, K123,
K134) is high enough to withstand the 10 volt output swing of an amplifier
such as A207,. with correct gate output levels. T-his fact allows the A207 to
be used not only as operational amplifier, but also as a comparator. A 12 bit
slow speed analogtodigital counter-type converter is made possible by using
the A207 output directly as a logic signal.

ANALOG INPUT

BASIC COUNTER CONVERTER FEEDBACK LOOP

In operation, the counter starts at zero and counts up until the D to A

converter output just exceeds the analog input. As the comparator inputs
reverse their polarity relationship, the comparator output switches and
inhibits the clock. The counter is left holding a number representing the
analog input voltage.
The 20 microsecond recovery time of the A207 used as a comparator
restricts operation to below 50 KHz. In the system shown here, the comparator "done" signal forces the clock output to the high state. Operation is
re-started by clearing the counter or by an increase in the analog voltage.
If a control flip-flop were added between the comparator and the gate, action
could be halted regardless of input voltage change until a new "start" signal.
Maximum conversion time is 4095 times 30 microseconds, or about 120
milliseconds. (The extra 10 microseconds allows for counter carry propagation time and the time required for the A613 output to change one small
step).

297

A faster converter may also be built using up/down counters or by buildiAg

a successive-approximation type of converter.

"-

III

en
CD

..J
CD

.,.

Q..

CD

CD

CD

CD

I-

CD

..,

CD

I'

(,J

~
N
III

.,.
CD

;:)

..J
(,J

Q..

en

I'

..

III

iO

JC

>

CD

III

Z
CD

12 BIT ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER

298

APPLICATION

COMBINING K WITH R SERIES MODULES

For conversion from R series or other zero-and-minus levels to K series
levels. the W603 (seven circuits. $23) may be used. When driving gate
module or timer inputs. and most other K series inputs as well, pins Band
V may be left open if desired (no +10 V supply). For conversion from K
series to R series levels, use W512 (seven circuits. $25). For a more complete description of these FLIP CHIP modules. ask for the DIGITAL LOGIC
HANDBOOK C-lOS.
The"re are two modules in the R series which can be used directly in the
K series: The ROOl and ROO2 gate expanders. The ROOl is convenient for
adding one extra input to a K-Series expandable AND gate, while the ROO2
can facilitate multiple inputs to several expandable AND gates from the

same logic signal.

OUTPUT

INPUT

o o'----t-!-----E

OUTPUT

INPUT

t--:o

~ :_____:i-------Jt---o

OE

F 0

OH

JO

t-!

OK

l O--It-!W---l---<>

OM

NO

II-t

M O----~M----'-

OP

RO

t-!

05

T 0

0 U

PO

__

II-t

~~ .

::___
R

t---<>

~---..,-----~

:~+--o v

ROOl DIODE NETWORK

ROO2 DIODE NETWORK

ROOl-$4
ROO2-$5
299

APPLICATION

PULSE GENERATOR FROM NAND GATES

An effective pulse generator is formed by adding a capacitor to the OR node
of a K113 inverting gate, as shown below. The circuit converts positive level
transitions to pulses for clearing flip-flops, etc. Pulse width is slightly
greater than 1000 C: 1.0 microfarad produces 1.0 to 1.5 millisecond pulses,
0.01 microfarad produces 10 to 15 microsecond pulses. The input must
remain low for several times the pulse width for reasonable pulse width
consistency.

A80UT100~

INPUT

__

--.-J -PULSE GENERATOR

Each K003 gate expander module includes a 0.01 mf capacitor from pin B
to ground, suitable for use in this circuit to obtain pulses approximately ten
microseconds - wide. This is essentially the same scheme used to obtain
one-shot behavior with K303 timers.
Inverted output pulses for clearing flipflop registers, etc. may be obtained
by substituting a K113 for the K123 gate shown.
The input low to high transition must be from an unslowed K Series output.
If a slowed risetime is used, such as from a K580, K581, or K578, the output
wi" remain low. Use a K501 Schmitt Trigger if the risetime needs to be speeded
up.

300

AP~LlCATION

K531 QUADRATURE DECODER APPLICATIONS

The K531 can be used to provide all the necessary control signals to operate
a K220 BCD up/down register for Nixie Displays or a K220 Binary up/down
register for computer interfacing.
The same encoder can be used to operate two K531 modules so that a NIXIE
display can be provided with the binary in.terface.

FIVE DECADE POSITIONAL NIXIE TUBE READ .OUT

SIGH
NIXIE MAOOUT

ZERO DlUtT

Total System Consists Of:

5
1
2

6
1
1

$52.00
$70.00
$ 8.00
$55.00
$30.00
$30.00

K220
K531
K012
K671
K741
K731

$260.00
$ 70.00
$ 16.00
$330.00
$ 30.00
$ 30.00
$736.00.

301

19 BITS PLUS THE SIGN BINARY INTERFACE

QUID

Total System Consists Of:

5
1

1
1

K220
K531
K741
K731

$52.00
$70.00
$30.00
$30.00

302

$260.00
$ 70.00
$ 30.00
$ 30.00
$390.00

APPLICATION

SENSOR CONVERTERS - OPERATION AND APPLICATIONS

Sensor Converters are basically voltage comparators that compare an unknown
variable input voltage against a fixed known internal or external reference
voltage called the threshold voltage. If the unknown voltage is higher than the
reference voltage, the comparator output will be a logic 1, and if it is less, it
will be a logic O. KSeries has two different converter modules, the K522 with a
built in + 1.8 Volt reference and the K524 with a + 2.5 V reference. In most
applications the inexpensive K522 module can be used, except where high
common mode noise rejection, sensitivity, or 120 VAC input protection are
required or where DC levels or signals are to be compared. The following
application examples cover the major uses of sensor converters.

I. Signal comparison against the internal voltage reference

Use either the K522 or K524. Twisted pair wiring should always be used
" between the transducer and sensor converter.
A. Variable Resistance Devices. (Add trim pots to K522 and K524 module in
predriJIed mounting holes.)
1. CdS photoconductive cell
2. Thermistor
3. Rheostat (Pressure Transmitter)
4. CdSe, Si, or Se photo cells
All variable resistance devices require the use of a bias supply and trimpot
in order to generate a voltage that will vary each side of the fixed internal
reference supply. Predrilled trimpot mounting holes are provided on each
circuit on both the K522 and K524 for this purpose. The K522 +3.6V bias
supply is automatically connected when the trimpot is mounted on the
board. On the K524 an external +5V bias supply must be connected to
. pin Bon the B connector. This +5 supply can be the logic supply, but it is
recommended that a separate K731 supply be used to protect ~he logic
system from accidental contact with 120 VAC. If the logic supply were
used for bias, all modules in the system would be destroyed if an accidental
short to 120 VAC did occur. Only when the resistance of the transducer
is greater than the resistance of the trim pot will the sensor converter output
be high. The transducer and trimpot should tie picked in the following
manner.
Transducer
The resistance of the transducer at the desired sensing point must be
greater than 400 ohms and less than 20K for the K522 and less than
lOOK for the K524.
Trim pot
The resistance of the trimpot must be adjustable to equal the transducer resistance at the desired sensing point.

303

_~"-_

INTERNAL
+3.6V

'TRIMPOT ADDED ON
MOOtA.E BOARD
PHOTOCELL. THERMISTOR. OR
aTHfJ'. VARYING RESISTANCE

LOGIC

LEVEL

OUT

K522 WITH NEARBY SENSOR

NOISE -FILTERING
CAPACITOR ON
CONNECTOR BOARD

PHOTO CELL. THERMISTOR. OR

OTHER VARYING RESISTANCE

,..---Y\,;rY-- BB +5 VOLTS

LOGIC
. LEVEL

OUT

SHIELDED

TWISTED
CABLE

PAIR

CHASSIS

GROUND

K524 WITH DISTANT SENSOR

B. Voltage generati'ng devices (Trim pots or bias are not required)
1. Pulse tachometer
2. Poteniometer
Some types of voltage generating devices can be sensed directly by a K522
or K524 provided that the voltage will vary each side of the fixed internal
reference voltage. If the voltage swing does not go above the internal refer
ence supply voltage of either sensor module, the K524 will have to be used
with an external reference supply. If it does not go below the internal
reference supply voltage, voltage or current level sensing will have to be
used.

LOGIC
LEVEL

OUT

CHASSIS

GROUND

304

C. Voltage or current level sensing.

(If the voltage swing at the sensor convertor + input will ever go negative,
use the K524.)
1. Voltage level sensing
To sense a voltage leve. greater than the internal reference supply
voltage, a resistor divider should be used to attenuate the signal as
follows:

+~
K524

R2 must be between 0 ohms and 20K for the K522, 0 and lOOK for K524.
R I and R2 should be chosen so that V I .(max) equal the maximum output
RI + R2
current available or R I + R2 equal the minimum allowed load resistance
and VR2 equals the internal threshold voltage of the sensor converter. (V is

R 1 +R 2
the voltage ievel to be sensed.)
voltage level to be sensed.)
2. Current level sensing R I and R2 should be chosen so that R I equals
zero ohms, and IR2 equals the internal threshold voltage of the sensor
converter. (I is the current level to be sensed.)

II. Signal comparison against an external voltage reference. Use the K524 only.

A. DC threshold comparison
When the K524 control pins are connected for DC coupling the output will
switch when the + input is within .3V of the voltage level of the minus input.
Zero crossings at the + input signal can easily be detected by grounding
the minus input. DC levels between 7.5V can be sensed by connecting
an external supply of the desired voltage level to the minus input. Since
the minus input can only accept voltage Ievel between 7.5V while the
plus input is good for 30 volts, CMR to noise spikes will be lost as the
minus input voltage approaches + or -7.5 volts. A better method to use
in sampling large voltages is with a voltage divider. To sense a positive
voltage, use the method described under voltage level sensing. To sample
a negative voltage level, use the same technique, but connect the minus
input to a negative voltage reference. The resistor divider calculations are
the same as described for positive voltage levels, except the module thresh
old voltage will now be equal to the negative voltage reference on the
minus input.
B. DC signal comparison
If the signals to be compared are between 7.5 volts the comparison can
be made directly by connecting one signal to the + input and the other one
to the - input.

305

If the signals are greater than 7.5 volts or maximum common mode
noise rejection is desired, a resistor divider should be used across each
signal output to reduce the voltage swing. The same resistor values should
be used for both dividers.
114 K524

DC
__~'~R~____4-____________~~m
.1

306

OUTPUT IS HIGH
IF SIGNAL A
IS GAEATER THAN
SIGNAL.

APPLICATION

DC DRIVERS
CURRENT PATH CONTROL
AU K-Series DC drivers sink current to ground and they all have a terminal,
connector pin, or split lug that is specified as the load supply ground. To help
segregate high D.C. currents from the logic system ground, these special
ground connections must be wired directly to the minus side of the load supply.
Where more than one load supply is being used, the minus sides should be
bussed together. Ground the minus side of the supply to the chassis ground
where they are mounted.
By providing this direct connection from the module to the load power supply,
heavy currents are forced to flow through the ground return wire and not
through the chassis ground.

t - - -......- - t +

INTERNAL DC ISOLATION
iN DC DRIVER
MODULE.-=-------.
- ... ;,JI......., . ...

LOAD
SUPPLY

LOAD SUPPLY
GROUND RETURN

-~~~.;..;.:;.;~~----_-----4~--t

CHASSIS GROUND

NOTE: If the ground return wire is not prOVided, current will have to flow
through the chassis ground.

CLAMP DIODES
All K-Series DC driver except the K681 and K683 have clamp diode protection
available if the module is being used to control inductive loads. Protection can
be obtained for the K681 and K683 if they are used with the K784 module.
These clamp diodes provide protection for the output transistors from high
voltages during turn off and must be connected to the positive side of the
load power supply. If different load supply voltages are being used on a given
module, connect the diodes to the positive side of the highest voltage supply.
For resistive loads or lamps, the diodes are not required, but as a standard
practice they should be connected as a safety precaution.

DRIVER SELECTION
The individual data sheets state the maximum voltage or current capability of
the modules. If, for example, the specification states a voltage of 125 volts at
up to 4 amps, this means that any load supply voltage between 1 volt and 125
volts may be used and that the module will conduct current when it is turned
on up to 4 amps maximum. If the load has a surge current rating of 3 amps
and a holding current of 1 amp, the driver must have at least a 3 amp rating.
For this application the K658 should be used.
307

In some applications it is desired to let the current fall rapidly in an inductive

load. If the clamp diode is returned directly to the load supply, the current will
fall slowly because it will circulate through the load until it is dissipated due to
the resistance of the inductive load in the form of heat. The current decay
rate can be increased by putting a resistor in series with the clamp diode return.
The maximum resistor value allowed is given by the formula.
R = Vmax-Vp
Il
Vmax == maximum voltage rating for module
Vp == load supply voltage
It == maximum load current
The peak power dissipated in the resistor will be Il2R . The actual watt rating of
the resistor may be smaller than this if the inductance is small or the repetition
rate is slow, but you will I:)e safer if you use the maximum watt rating. As can
be seen from the formula, the higher the voltage rating is for the module, the
larger R can be, and the faster the current will decay. The K656 is useful for
this application because of its 250 volt rating.
DRIVERS IN PARALLEL
The DC drivers may be connected in parallel to obtain greater current driving
ability, however, there are two important considerations.
1. Paralleled drivers must all be on the same module.
2.

Thecurrent handling capability increases as the square root of the number

of drivers that are connected.

Example:
1 driver

==

1 amp

2 drivers

==

1.4 amps

3 drivers

==

1.7 amps

4 drivers == 2 amps

308

APPLICATION
USING K210s FOR LONG ODD-MODULUS COUNTERS
The pulse generator shown on the previous page can be incorporated with
K210 counters to obtain counts at non-binary moduli above 16, the limit for
a single K210. Below is shown a modulus 24 counter, as would be required
for a digital clock.

INPUT
ONCE PER HOUR
(MUST DWELL HIGH
FOR SEVERAL
TIMES THE
CLEARING PULSE
WIDTH)

"

LOW WHEN
INPUT IS HIGH
IF COUNTERS
HOLD 23

\CLEAR PULSE OVERRIDES

NEGATIVE INPUT NO. 24

The basic principle involved is to detect the largest number to be permitted,

and to generate a clear pulse when it disappears due to the reception of one
more count. The same method may be extended to counters of any length.
provided the clear pulsewidth is wide enough to override any possible carry
propagation.

309

APPLICATION
PARALlEL COYNTERS
The counters shown elsewhere in this handbook are "serial" counters: that
is, the input to a counter module of high significance is the simple output
of the next less significant flip-flop, resulting in a time difference between
groups of outputs (within any K210, K220, or K230 module all outputs switch
essentially simultaneously).
If a long counter is driving a large decoder, or if flip-flop outputs from differ
ent parts of the counter are being gated together for any purpose, carry
propagation time down a serial counter can give rise to false .transients lasting several microseconds from the decoder or gating. In effect, the carry
propagation time causes the counter to pass through one or more wrong
counts on the way to the correct state.
The solution is to feed cou.nt pulses in" parallel to all modules simultaneously,
but gating the pulses to modules of high significance with the "1" outputs
from all bits of lesser significance. The diagram below shows how this is
done for an 8 bit (or two decade) K210 counter. Observe that modules of
higher significance would need input gates expanded to 9, 13, or 17 inputs
for 12, 16, and 20 flip-flop counters respectively.
Photoelectric shaft-angle transducers generate signals A and B in quadrature.
Where ma~imum resolution and/or two-way counting is desired, the scheme
below can be used to interface the amplified transducer outputs to the
counter control shown on K220 data pages.

12 BIT PARALLEL BINARY COUNTER

310

APPLICATION
ANNUNCIATORS
In the simplest type of annun~iator, a single aiarm device is triggered by
any abnormal occurrence, and a lamp is lighted by the occurrence to identify
it. An inexpensive annunciator of this type can be buil~ by taking advantage
of the four Schmitt triggers and differentiators in the K184 module as indicated below. If silver contacts are to be sensed, auxiliary load and higher
voltage must be used, preferably 120 VAC with K604K716 or K614. Any
number of inputs may be handled by ORing Kl84 outputs (wired OR if
possible for up to 5KI84s). The normal 5 #,sec K184 pulsewidth should be
stretched to 140 #,sec for use with a sloweddown alarm flipflop by putting
a 0.1 mf capacitor from each KI84 pin J to ground.
. . TO WARNING
OEVICE

SIMPLE ANNUNCIATOR fOR fOUR DRY CONTACTS

In larger systems or where an abnormal occurrence may be too brief to be
identified from a simple direct driven indicator, flip-flop memory must be
added to each line to set up this sequence of operations:
ANNUNCIATOR
LAMP STATUS

ALARM STATUS

Off

1. No Alarm
2. Alarm -

Unacknowledged

3. Aiarm -

Acknowledged

1. No Alarm -

Flashing (2Hz)
Steady

Memory Cancelled

Off

The Flash Supply is generated at a suitably low frequency by a K303 Clock

with K375 Timer Control. Thi!iO supply is available for distribution to other
similar stages in a system.
The Alarm f.F. is set with an Alarm Input at Logic 1, the K580 controls the
Alarm 0 to 1 response time. (See K580 data sheet) This allows the Lamp
to flash. The Alarm F.F. is not cancelled, should the Alarm Input return to
Logic O. The initial Alarm must first be acknowledged manually before the
Alarm F.F. is reset. Acknowledging the Alarm changes the Lamp from Flashing
to Steady, and prepares the Alarm F.F. for Reset by the Alarm Input returning to Logic O.
311

K Series Modules per Annunciator

MODULE TYPE
K003
K113
K123
Kl34
K580
K681

NUMBER REQUIRED
1
1
1
1
1
1

@
@
@
@
@
@

3
1
3
1
1
1

$ 5.00
$11.00
$12.00
$13.00
$28.00
$15.00

COST
PE LINE

NUMBERS OF
CIRCUITS USED
of
of
of
of
of
of

3
3
3
4
8
8

$ 5.00
$ 3.60
$12.00
$ 4.33
$ 3.50
$ 1.80

TOTAL

$30.23

The cost of common items, K303, K375, Power supplies etc., must be spread
equally over the number of Annunciators in a system to get the true cost
per stage.

r----------,
I
I

I
I

ALARM
ACKNOWLEDGE

TO OTHER
ANNUNCIATOR
STAGES

""

.....

ANNUNCIATOR
LAMP

312

APPLICATION
THUMBWHEELS AND MULTIPLEXING THEM WITH K581
Binary-coded decimal thumbwheel switches of many sizes and types are
available to provide convenient manual data entry into K220 and K230readin
gates via K580 switch filters. Below are listed some of the many types that
can be us~ this way:
MANUFACTURER'S TYPE

PANEL CUTOUT HEIGHT

WIDTH PER DIGIT

1.380"
2.000"
0.980"
0.980"
1.375"
0.960"

0.500"
0.500"

Digitran 315
Digitran 13015
Digitran 715
Digitran 8015
Digitran 9015
EECo 5305

0.500"

0.500"
0.60041

0.500"

-Note: Additional "zero digits" width Renerally required in pane' cutout.

The simplest hookup uses one K580 for every two decimal digits as shown
here.

11i i
I

iii

I
I

I
I

I
I

) )TW08CO

S''''.ES

KS80

Power for the unmultiplexed sy,tem can be obtained from a 10 volt DC

power supply or by using the circuit shown here with the auxiliary 12.6v
winding on the K743 transformer.

,------,

sl

L ____ ...J

EIGHT SILICON DIODES

t N400t. ETC.

GETTING +10Y FROM K743 USING A K730

313

Where more
economic to
below. This
provided for

than one or two thumbwheel registers are needed it may be

multiplex several digits through the same K581circuits as shown
scheme requires diodes to be mounted on the switches, as
by all of the types listed above. IN4001 diodes may be used.

+5v

"

683

OUTPUT
STAGES

~--------y----------~

~------- ..

z-I

Itt DIGIT

DIGIT

To sequence through the registers. it is necessary to turn on one K683

circuit at a time; this can de done by a K161 binary to octal decoder. Since
no BCD decade can draw more than 60 milliamperes. as many as four
decades can be handled on anyone K683 switch. Circuits may be paralleled
for larger registers.
Notice that K581 outputs will be one diode drop above ground i.n the "low"
state: This restricts muliplexing to use with K220 or K230 readin gates, or
to Kl13. K123. or K134 inputs at 1 milliampere only. If the diode outputs
(connector) on K683 are used, noise rejection will be reduced to levels that
would normally be unacceptable. Direct (solder lug) connections are definitely
recommended.

314

FIXED MEMORY USING 1<281

Switch registers such as those shown on the preceding page may be considered as memory devices. Very often a system that needs thumbwheel
memory (or flipflop memory) can also benefit from memory that is not
readily changed. By using a K281 board with diodes cut out where "zero"
is to be recorded, many types of sequence or character (symbol) codes may
be permanently stored in a digital system.
II t34 IMYUln"

o
M

1t.8.

'B'MAtly

TO

OCTAl..

It

DATA

OI.ITNT
M

WORD
ADORt:SS

{2 P

" "

Variations
More 4-bit words:
a) Use same K161 and K681
b)
Duplicate K281 and KI34, tying KI34 outputs together
c)
Use pin K inhibit on KI34s to select 8 words
d) Up to 40 4bit words may be obtained (fanout down to 3)
e) For more 4bit words use longer words and gate outputs
Longer Words:
a)
Use same K161 and K681
b)
Duplicate K281 and K134; two for 8 bits, three for 12 bits. etc
c) Singte K681 capable of word lengths to 28 bits
d) Get more than 8 words as in getting more 4bit words
Serial Scanout:
a) Connect word address tines to scanning counter
b) Tie together K134 outputs
c) Select word at KI34 pins N. R, T. V.
d) Second KI6t can select word at Kl34 inputs
e) Scanning and word-address K161s may be swapped
f)
This system is expandable in two dimensions also
Note: The K681 Lamp. Driver lacks the noise immunity and output slowdown deSigned
into all of the general-purpose KSeries logiC modules. For this reason it is
important to take advantage of congruent pin aSSignments by assigning adjacent
module slots to K161, K681. K281. and Kl34 modules used in memory applications.

315

...
~

BINAR"f FRACTION

Itt

..

c:

!:t
:;;

,.r-iii

KI84

112

V4

118

Vt6

1132

11'64 '1'128 V2e6

0'1

10'

0 tOt

INPUT RATE

10101

ot

OUTPUT
RATE

8 BIT RATE MULTiPliER

:.-

=I

t:

,~

....

(5
Z

APPLICATION

RATE SQUARER
This circuit shows one of the many fascinating and useful tricks possible
with rate multipliers. Here the output rate varies as the square of the input
rate. so that. for example. a flywheel rotation rate could be read out in units
of stored energy. etc.

H'UT

FMGUrNCY
fo(O TO

eo Kol

........_ _ _ LOAD
ONU

OUTI'UT
. . . - - . - - - _ FREQUNCY
foZ'S fo; fo
IS A FRACTION)

FROM UP1'R K2IO

COIIRUPONDING OUTPJTS

FROM UPPEJII K210

OOIIIfIsP<lNOING OUTPJTS

SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
O. K230 holds previous rate number; K210scleared
1. Gate fo to K210 counter for fixed period
2. Stop counter at end of internal; clear K206s and read in
3. Clear K210 and return to step 1.
MODULE COST
2 K210 @ $27.
2 K206 @ 20.
2 KI84 @ 25.

$ 54.00
$ 40.00
$ 50.00

TOTAL excluding
control

$144.. 00

NOTE: fo is regarded as a fraction, where 1.0 is that frequency which just

fills the counter during the count interval. Average output rate is the
product of current count rate times the average rate in the previous
interval. The sampling period must be short relative to the variations
in input co.unting rate.
. 317

APPLICATION

K184 AS A DIGITAL INTEGRATOR

If the fraction F, to a KI84 is derived from a Counter also incremented by

the input frequency f" fo increases, on average, in a linear fashion.

AVERAGE LINEAR
INCREASE UP TO

F'11"

As shown below, if the FRACTION K210 overflows from 1111 to 0000, fo

will fall to zero and begin again to increment as before. The result is a
Digital Sawtooth generator. fo against time t is shown here.

FRACTION COUNTER

OVERFLOW POINTS

/'

//

fo

t -

SEes

Resolution can be increased by module cascading. If the Fraction Counter

is a K220 UP/DOWN Counter connected for Binary operation, then the
slope of fo can be reversed and controlled symmetrically.
*(Pins BO, BE grounded) -

318

UP DOWN
L

CONTROLLED
DIGITAL RAMPS
+ve AND -ve
SLOPES

f1

-+---=-t

INPUT
FREQUENCY

The output of the Kl84 shown above, is on the average, a linearly increasing
frequency when the K220 counts UP, and a linearly decreasing frequency on
K220 count DOWN. This facility is of use in controlling Stepping Motor
Acceleration on K220 UP counts, and Deceleration on DOWN counts. The
Fraction Counter must not be allowed to overflow.

K220
PIN L
UP/DOWN 0

' - - - -_ _........J

L -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _x __ _

t-SECS

The response of fo shown above is average and must be smoothed digitally

to remove unacceptably large variations in pulse spacing; which would cause
for example a Stepping Motor to change velocity instantaneously during the
Acceleration period.
For more on rate multipliers, see references on Kl84 data page.
319

APPLICATION

SERIAL ADDER
When speed is not paramount, o,ne can sum the contents of two K23Q shift
registers bit-by-bit at low cost. The result can go back into one of the source
registers.
Clock output ClK; 1 to 0 transitions, shift se,rially the addend and augend
contained in K230 Shift Registers, A and B. The contents of the Registers
are serially summed with the carry In bits from the carry flip-flop.
Carry Out signals, and ClK signal 1 tg 0 transitions, cause the Carry Out
flip-flop to be Set or Reset, ie Carry or No-Carry.

A B carry in sum carry out

0

1 0

0 0

0
1

1f
KZ!O SHIFT REGISTERS
A ANI) e SHIFTED
SERIALLY

CARRY IN

TO SHIFT
REGISTER
A ANDe

320

APPLICATION

STEPPING MOTORS
INTRODUCTION

There are two fundamental parts to the design of any stepping motor drive
system: Designing the logic for correct sequencing, and electromechanical
design. Several logic designs are shown on the next few pages; here first is
a brief discussion of electromechanical aspects.
Much of the emphasis in stepping motor system design is on maximizing
stepping rates. There' are two components in maximizing stepper speed:
Maximizing the rate of motor current rise and delay, and operating within the
motor's limitations of torque, friction and stiffness during the critical acceleration - deceleration phase. Successful design results in accurate stepping
with no missed or gratuitous steps.
To optimize the response speed of any magnetically operated device, a
minimum requirement is that the ratio of circuit inductance to circuit resistance be less than the desired response time. Thus if response of 1 millisecond is required in a one henry winding, the total of winding, the total of
winding resistance and series padding resistance should be greater than
1000 ohms. If this ratio (L/R or henries-divided-by-ohms) equals or exceeds
the desired response time in seconds, electrical effects tend to be the dominant limitation on speed and override mechanical factors.

321

The design problem is complicated by the increase in winding inductance as

motion is accomplished. The inductance at turnoff may be many times the
inductance at turnon in efficient devices such as solenoids. However, many
types of stepping motors are,designed to achieve maximum performance at
the expense of efficiency, and the inductance of these motors may vary only
a negligible amount (less than 10%) as rotor position changes. Since inductance ratios are generally unpublished, the best approach may be to start
with equal resistance and then measure the actual current rise and fall
times, increasing the turnoff resistance if necessary later. (In all of this, the
driving transistors are assumed to switch in zero time, as they respond in
microseconds whereas L/R ratios are generally in the millisecond range.) The
equivalent circuits below show both equal and unequal cases.

Where
Re-External Resistance for Risetime improvement.
Rp-Padding resistor
Vs-Supply voltage
Va-Transistor collector voltage
L.c--Motor winding inductance
Rw--D.C. motor resistance.

Notice that during turnoff the switching transistor experiences a voltage equal
to the supply voltage for the equal case, but larger than the supply voltage if
additional turnoff resistance Rp is added. Since the vol~age rating of the
driver is the limiting factor on the minimum L/ R that can be achieved with a
given inductance, the ratio of drive transistor voltage rating to supply voltage
should be adjusted as indicated below for optimum electrical response:

Vs

= VT

Lw (on)
(off)

VT

Operating within the stepper's limitations of torque, friction, and stiffness

during acceleration and deceleration is trickier than it looks, especially since
some crucial constant may be omitted from published specifications for the
device. There is often the wish to avoid abrupt (full frequency) starts and
stops to achieve maximum stepping rates. Often only one or two steps need
to be slowed to achieve maximum acceleration error-free. Too gradual change
in stepping rate can actually encourage errors if inertia is moderate and
friction low, caused by an actual resonant reversal of rotation at some
particular step.
All of the logiC circuits shown on the next pages can be used with any clock
rate profile. It is best, however, to use an abrupt start-stop system unless
the need for ultimate performance warrants a full study of system dynamics,
including the use of a tachometer on the stepper shaft to observe the effect
of proposed frequency profiling.

322

70

60

50'"
40

(DATA OBTAINED WITH A SIGMA

MODEL #20-2223D200-Fl.4 )
Vs'SUPPLY YOLTAGE
RS' EXTERNAL RESISTOR IN
SERIES WITH EACH PHASE
~. MOTOR RESISTANCE
I =2.65 AMP

~ ~~

I\)

30

YS =20 VOLTS
RS=28.ll
1\1=1.4 .ll

20

10

YS'22YOLTS
RS.a 7 .ll
~".4.Q

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

1400

SIGMA AND SLO-SYN* STEPPER SEQUENCER

A K202 flip-flop module, connected as shown, forms a reversible switch-tail

ring counter. With the "direction" input logic 1, 1 to 0 transitions on the
"step input" index a bifilar stepping motor forward. With logic 0 on the
direction input, the direction is reversed.
A d.c. driver controlled by the switch-tail counter provides power for the
stepping motor.

DIRECTION
FWO"
REVO

BtFILAR MOTOR
4

+ MOTOR

SLOSYN is a trademark of Superior Electric Co.

324

SUPPLY

RESPONSYN* STEPPER SEQUENCER

This sequencer uses the same two bit shift register with inverted feedback as
the SLOSYN sequencer, but the outputs are gated to obtain the different
drive pattern required by these motors.

RESPONSYN is trademark of United Shoe Machinery Corp.

325

FUJITSU STEPPER SEQUENCER

FUJITSU Stepper motors can be driven forward and reverse, with the module
arrangement shown. The table describes the stepping seq9Jence required by
a FUJITSU 5 torquer motor (with or without hydraulic servo amplifier).

STEP

X
X

326

STEP
PULSE
INPUT

W
N

....
AHEAD"l"
BACK"O. O~_---4_-...J

C
TO DC POWER DRIVER

FUJITSU STEPPER MOTOR SEQUENCE.

Electrohydraullc Servo Motors

Stepping motors are coupled to hydraulic servos to achieve increased torque
at high stepping rates. Figure 1 describes in block form a typical open loop
eleCtrohydraulic servo. Th.e fact that a closed loop feedback path in the
electronics of this application is' not required, is one of the technical and
economic advantages of electrohydraulic stepping motors.
In applying electrohydraulic servos, the designer must consider matching the
servo to its load to prevent overloading the motor. An overloaded motor can
lose step pulses and cause a final position error. Figure 2 describes a typical
equation for calculating load inertia: it is necessary that this load inertia
never exceeds the servo rating. Also note in Figure 2 that two check valves
are indicated between the input and output lines from the hydraulic supply.
These check valves are used to prevent an extreme pressure from damaging
a valve plate located within the hydraulic servo. This high pressure can exist
from the spool valve closing over the input and output parts simultaneously
and remaining in this position. Once a valve plate is damaged in the 'above
manner, internal leaking is caused decreasing efficiency by requiring more
input power to achieve the same torque which was obtainable prior to the
plate being damaged.

FIGURE 1.
OPEN LOOP ELECTROHYDRAULIC SERVO USING STEPPING MOTORS

CHECKVALVES
(SEE TEXT)

--"1:====-t(f)---J

,- Acca.ERAT1ON Of GRAVITY
w- LOAD IN LaS.
-'1- INEImA OF GEAR Nt
.Ir INERTIA OF GEAR H2
P - LEAD OF SCREW
J. LOAD INERTIA

FIGURE 2.

328.

APPLICATION
ANALOG-TO-FREQUENCY CONVERTERS
When a relatively slow-varying or constant analog signal must be transmitted
some distance through noise, some form of current-to-frequency or voltageto-frequency conversion is appropriate. There are really two distinct sets of
benefits to be gained:
1. Analog noise will be averaged, and may be almost entirely nullifjed even
if it is comparable to the signal in amplitude. NormalJy the frequency is
sampled for an exact internal number of line-frequency cycles to ave rase
power frequency coupling to zero. High noise frequencies are mostly
averaged out by the conversion device itself.
2. Digital noise will be averaged also, since one or two extra pulses or
missed pulses represent a sma" fraction of the total number. In addition,
the digital form of the measured quantity is inherently noise resistant
since noise less than the switching threshold at the receiver has truly no
hHluence whatever.
The improved transmissibility of analog data both before and after the conversion to an equivalent frequency has to be paid for in reduced speed of
response to changes. (From the viewpoint of an information theorist, such
a transmission mode would be said to deliver high redundancy and low
information rate.) But many sensors on slowly varying processes which are
distant from an associated digital system are ideally suited for this treatment.
The diagram below shows how an operational amplifier may be utilized to
provide direct conversion from an analog voltage to an equivalent frequency
with errors in the tens of millivolts. This scheme measures how long currcmt
in the input resistor R takes to charge the capacitor C ten millivolts. Each
time this occurs, the output switches to the other state and discharges the
capacitor rapidly.
IN3606

--1U1.Jl__
VOLTAGE-TOFREQUENCY CONVERTER

ReSistance R should be about 1000 to 10,000 ohms to achieve a baiance

between error due to wide pulsewidth at high frequency and error due to
the biasing effect of amplifier input current. To minimize the effect of amplifier switching time, capacitor C sJ')uld be large enough (100 mfd with
R=l000n, for example) to limit maximum fu"-scale frequency to around one
kiloHertz. Nearly any quality silicon diode and PNP transistor with at least
30 volt ratings could be used, and the small capacitor with its associated
current limiting resistor is not critical either. Other components should be
selected carefully to minimize drift and temperature coefficient.
329

K303 clock circuits can be modified by the additional parts shown below to
achieve lower performance conversion at a saving. Basically. a current source
controlled by the input signal being converted replaces the action of the
timing resistor R shown in the Handbook diagrams. Transistors can be any
high gain Silicon NPN type such as 2N2219.

TO K303
PIN J.ETC.

CURRENT
1--f---..----4-<lINPUT POS.

NOTE

TliE SMALL VOLTAGE

DROP(t.5V MAX)
AVAILABLE LIMITS
"LINEARITY TO :t 5%
OR SO FOR THIS
CIRCUIT.

CALIBRATING
RESISTOR
'--......._ - ' (0 TOt,5V DROP)

4.7KQ

FOR POSITIVE INPUTS

If output frequencies are counted for an integral number of power-frequency .

cycles. clock filler will be compensated along with line frequency pickup on
the analog leads.
.
+5V

NOTE

TO K303
PIN J.ETC.

USE LARGEST PRACTICABLE

VOLTAGE SWING. RESISTOR R
SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY
3KQ FOR EAQi VOLT OF FULLSCALE INPUT SWING. LINEARITY
CAN BE I~D TO ABOUT1%
OF FULL SCALE BY USING
INPUT VOLTAGE SWINGS
UPWARDS OF to VOLTS.

L-..---4"""'---_ _"""O

+5V

CURRENT
INPUT NEG.

TO K303
PIN J,ETC.

L-..-_ _ _ _ _ _-oVOLTAGE

INPUT, NEG.

FOR NEGATIVE INPUTS

330

USING KI04, KI14 WITH 240 VOLTS

These isolated AC switches have semiconductors and other components rated

for 240 volt service. However, the Triac sWitches used were rated primarily
for phase control applications. The difference is that some switching applications require an "off" switch to remain substantially off in the presence of
transients and noise, without conducting for even one half of one cycle. Since
a transient voltage, larger than the breakdown voltage of these devices (400
volts) can cause them to start and remain conducting until several milliseconds later when the load current returns to zero, the K604 and K614 contain
transient-clipping devices across each circuit which go into conduction
between the peak voltage of a 120 volt line (~OO volts) and the Triac breakover voltage (400 volts).
Triac switches are not readily available at present with breakdown ratings
above 400 volts. However, K604 and K614 switches can successfully be used
in 240 volt service if two types of application are distinguished:
1. Critical loads: For example, a hydraulic solenoid valve controlling the
liquid metal on a die-casting machine, an ignition transformer on a
process boiler, a trip solenoid on a pun~h press: any use involving both
fast response and a potential safety hazard. For such applications. two
circuits should be connected in series, so that any undesired conduction
will be limited to the actual duration (usually microseconds) of a transient
or noise spike. Wiring K614 outputs in series is simple because two terminals are provided on each circuit. To put K604 outputs in series, use
K782 tetminals or see K716 data page for connector cable information.
Note indicator lamp connections in diagram below.

LAMP RETURN

SERIES CONNECTED AC SWITCHES

331

2. Uncritical loads, where spurious conduction for sever. I milliseconds

could not be damaging or hazardous. Since the other components are
rated for 240 volt service already, simply remove the transient-clipping
varistors. These are axial-lead-devices with a black body and metai endcaps, about 2 cm long and 8 mm diameter. Lamp return voltage may be
supplied from the load common (240 volts) if a rectifier diode is provided to obtain halfwave operation. In a system containing both modified
and unmodified circuits segregate and mark them. Use of unmodified
units with 240 volts directly will destroy them by grossly overheatin'g the
varistors.

332

Twenty module boards are drilled simultaneously from a computergenerated coordinate tape. Other pantograph-controlled machines
drill up to 200 boards simultaneously from a computer-generated
template.

334

Control
Products
DIGITAL has been supplying the industrial control market with logic modules
and computer products for more than 10 years. In mid1969 the corporation
formed the Control Products Group to focus attention on meeting the needs
for advanced industrial control systems. Its organization is such that it provides the most effective use of our resources in developing new products and
application techniques necessary to achieve this goal.
At present, the Control Products Group is comprised of three product lines,
and a special systems group. The product lines are: Numerical Control Products, including Quickpoint-S and our new DNC system; PDP-14 programmable controller; and Module Products, including training aids. The Control
Systems group serves the product lines primarily in a design and manufacturing capacity, and draws upon other resources in the corporation in developing specialized control systems for our customers.
The following pages describe the major products, aside from logic modules,
available from the Control Products Group. The K Series logic line is described
fully in this handbook. Our other lines of logic modules, used primarily for
computerl instrument interfacing and design, are described fuUy in the
DIGITAL Logic Handbook. The Logic Handbook is free ... send for your copy.

335

336

NUMERICAL CONTROL PRODUCTS

DEC's products for numerical control consist of two basic systems designed
primarily for builders of relatively simple two and three axis machine t90ls
and related equipment. These include: punch presses; drilling/milling machines; simple lathes; flame cutting machines; and component assembly
equipment.
The products, both computer based, are: Quickpoint-S, a system designed
for low-cost, easy, and quick preparation of punchod tape for NC machines;
and DEC's new DNC system, designed for direct computer control of basic
machines. Both products are based upon DEC's PDP-S family of small general-purpose computers.
All suppliers of general purpose NC punch presses in North Amer~a now
offer Quickpoint-S or a related system. A growing number of machine tool
builders offer a variety of DNC systems based upon PDP-S or PDP-ll computers. UNIAPT and other powerful part program preparation languages have
been written for these computers as well.
While Quickpoint-S and DEC's new DNC system are designed for the low end
of the cost/perforniance spectrum, DEC welcomes the opportunity to assist
machine builders to develop computer control capabilities at any level of
soph istication.
In addition to providing a general presentation of our NC products, the following pages should provide a basic insight into the role of the small computer in NC.

337

Quickpoint-8 is a point to point DEC language designed to make two or

three axis NC tape preparation "quick" and easy.

338

QUICKPOINT-,8
NC TAPE PREPARATION SYSTEM

CONTROL
PRODUCTS

Companies using numerically-controlled machinery must be able to produce

or obtain NC tapes quIckly and accurately in order- to realize the full ad~
vantages of NC efficiency and economy_ Without this capability, the competitive advantages of NC can dwindle rapidly. The Quickpoint-S system is
a low-cost, computer-assisted, part program compiler. Using this system, part
programs' can be prepared directly from the information supplied on conventional drawings in a fraction of the time required for manual programming, and with fewer errors. Error-prone, time consuming, manual calculations and intermediate processing are eliminated. The system is compatible
with NC point-to-point machine tools, ranging from simple two-axis drilling
machines to more complex three-axis machining centers. A perforated tape,
punched in EIA character code and machine control format, is produced
directly from the system's PDP-S computer without the aid of intermediate
conversion equipment.
The Quickpoint-S system offers the following special features and advantages:
Minimizes EIA paper tape preparation time by accepting input data directly
from a teletype keyboard.
Provides inexpensive pre-production quality control by reducing the probability of human error.
Computes absolute or incremental X and Y coordinates (depending on control specifications) from either absolute or incremental values.
Accepts decimals, fractions and mixed numbers in any combination.
Adds and subtracts absolute and incremental numerical values without
intermediate calculations or conversion.
Accel>ts all auxiliary machine functions commonly available on mUlti-axis
point-to-point machine tools.
Computes coordinates from shorthand symbols that define commonly used
geometric patterns (for example, bolt hole circles, arcs, grids, and incremental lines). Up to 4095 coordinates can be computed from a Single
command.
Stores and repeats recurring random or geometric pattern definitions for
reuse in present or future part programs.
Accepts and prints out editorial corrections, program comments and machine operator's instructiohS.
Automatically punches the completed part program," including auxiliary
machine functions, on paper tape in EIA character code and machine control format.
Accepts input data programs punched on paper tape in ASCII character
code and format.
Uses a single, easily learned language for a wide variety of machines;
339

'SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A minimum Quickpoint-8 system is comprised of: a general purpose PDP-8
computer with core memory of 4,096 12-bit words; a Quickpoint program
with postprocessor; and a teletypewriter for input/output. The teletypewriter
includes an alphanumeric keyboard, a tape reader, a tape punch and a line
printer. (Model ASR33 Teletype is suitable for light-duty use. For heavy-duty
use, a model ASR35, or a backup ASR33, is recommended.)
The operating speed of the teletypewriter is 10 characters per second. An
optional high-speed paper tape I\eader increases the reading speed to 300
characters per second for such applications as faster interchange of postprocessors.
Because the Quickpoint-8 system uses a general purpose computer, conventional data processing tasks such as machine loading and production control
can be accomplished when the system is not being used for compiling part
programs.

THE QUICKPOINT LANGUAGE

The Quickpoint language comprises a limited number of easily learned operating procedures. The main purpose of the language is to permit direct
transfer of information from part drawings to input data preparation, and to
instruct the system to run, operate in different modes, and accept changes.
The language. also allows the system to notify the parts programmer of
language or programming rule violations. Included in Quickpoint are coordinate commands, geometric pattern commands, pseudo commands, pattern
commands, auxiliary function commands, error messages, and general format
rules.
Following are a few examples of commands the system can execute. The
power of these commands is evident in that geometry can be described directly
from print data for point-to-point and as well as for some two-axis profiling
without the need for separate calculation on the part of the parts programmer.
Geometric Commands
INC INCREMENT: Allows incrementing along X or Y axis by specifying, in
order, direction (R, L, U, or D for Right, Left, Up, or Down), increment
(distance between holes), and number of holes.
INCREMENT

IE-

0)

LAA

LINE AT ANGLE: Allows incrementing along a line at an angle to the

X axis by 'specifying, in order, the increment value, angle, and number of holes.

340

BHC

IOLT HOLE CIRCLE: Allows for computation of bolt holes by speclfyinl, in order, the radius of circle, angle from X axis of first hoi', and
number of holes.

ARC

ARC: Allows for computat."n of holes along an arc by specifying, in

order, the radius of arc, angle from X axis of first hole, incremental
angle between holes, number of holes.

It

)(
)(

lit

~~~\.

~~u\.f;.

\~c"f;."'~~

ORD

GRID: Allows for computation of holes in a grid pattern by specifyina

in order, direction, increment, and number of lines of each axis.

+ +

+
1.+

INCREMENT

ut if ++

+
+
+
+

ft'-

~ x

INCREMENT

+ +

+
+

+
+

+
+

~
R

'attem Commands
Pattern commands anow the parts programmer to make up his own random
pattern consisting of both geometric commands and incremental coordinates.
By numbering these patterns, he may reuse them over and over by merely
calling them by their assigned number. Patterns may be combined to define
larger patterns.

r------------,
I ...L
P~Tl
I
I,

.0

+,

1.0 TVP.,

20
.

It+

1
.1.

++

12'0~'0
l:l
--

W
+

' + 1

-I -

2.0"':"- 2.0

341

.J

____ STARTING COORDINATES

Xl0 Vl0

For instance, to define a pattern of random holes, the operator types PAT
with an identifying number. All coordinates and geometric commands which
follow are included in the pattern definitions until and END command is
typed. for example:
.
X1~." Y1~.Qf

PAT1/
DX-2.fJ DY2.fiJ
DX2.fJ DY2.~
DX2.iJ DY1.f}
INCI D 1.iJ 3
EHD < PATl
To repeat a pattern, new starting coordinates are typed and then the
PATTERN command is retyped.
X2fiJ.8 Y1e.e

PAT1

Pattern 1 ~ will be repeated starting at X20 VIO.

~---------...,
PAT 1 REPEATED

I
I
I

+
+

I
I
I

L _________ -1

STARTING COORDINATES
X20 Vl()

Patterns may be defined within patterns and previously defined patterns may
be used to define new patterns--for instance:

PAT3/
DX2

PAT 1
END<PAT3
Pattern 3 consists of Pattern 1 which was previously defined.

Profilinl
Quickpoint-8 also allows the programmer to prepare tapes for profiling on
pOint.to-point machines using the bott hole circle, arc and line-at-angle
commands. In all geometric commands the number of holes specified may
be any. number from 1 to 4095 and any angular dimension can be as small
as .001.
By combining various arc commands and line-at-angle commands, profiles
can be generated to accommodate many shapes. In addition, contour nibbling
for NC controlled punch presses can be more effiCiently programmed.
342

, to profile a radius with a tool diameter of .5":

MOV/ X1S.S Y1S.S

(starting coordinates of ARC command)
ARC/ .75 8 l.~ 9~
The radius equals the part radius plus 1h tool diameter. Ninety (90) holes
are computed at 1 degree increments, creating the goo arc.

QUICKPOINT APPLICATION
This aluminum filter plate is typical of a two-axis point-to-point drilling job
for which Quickpoint is well suited. Manual calculations of the coordinates
for 180 of the 192 hole locations requires simple addition. The remaining
dozen, however, are in a circle, whose coordinates require some trigonometry
for solution. Manual programming is relatively simple, but it is also repetitious
and time consuming, in addition to creating 192 possibilities for errors in
calculating or punching tape.
First hole BHC
_ - - - Radius 4.5"
Start ang. =900 12 holes

"""o

Last hole BHC

+l+t+J+f+J+f~~;t+l+f+J+t+J+f+
+
+ + + + + +t+ + + + +1+ + +
+

192-Hole Drilling Application-for Quickpoint

343

Quickpoint-8 does the job in 25 statements as shown in the manuscript. A

printout of the Quickpoint input tape created from the manuscript is also
shown. A single pass through the Quickpoint system can produce an output
tape ready to be inserted in the machine tool.

OUICKPOINT

_
....TAL

~"T

COMlCItAfION

_Tille

/D

X~NAn:

,*,0

1:"'c.

1/

~,

.,,/
1/

...

+/

,,"'Co

R-

.f'

OJC-'.~

OS,,,

.-0/
~tle.C'

..

~"'I

'-UNCTIONS

"U1"

O~

h-.....

",.E, A". S.ecu SOlie I

I~., ....
how "

""D .....a

~"'C L

.1$'

hcu,e

cal.""CS Ala. s....\ nc S

ho&.lstO

til....E. MO . . . . .

h...es ...

de,....,....

D\'.;
,~

&..

AUXlLLAity

OV.1f'

DY

4-/'Jo''',

DAT[

-an.

PI.AtE

M ...... & ...~t,.."

he...,

.f'

'I.,.

Z-coo:rNATl

'I ,...4'"

DK -3.S'

OJ(

, ..Tee.

OATA "OIIII:TItIC OATA

.S

It
~~.~

%",

v-coo:,o....n

. . . .l1tIe

I_-:'-:OI'~

Dl!SCIIII'TOOOI

I'IlMoL !'I1r '" \ J( A&,IaII

efI:IIIETRIC DIf&

l(

_110 o+&,al- +

:.-~t:~t=

%he. +

OY.~

DKC..~

DY.~

'"

.~

hCNASI$

X.l,O

" ".16'

OI(f.~

O't,S'

I-

.S'

MMU DIe ~

"',.4- .e. . . ' c.c..o

IlIPI"'"

% ftC ~

rcA.. ' %11'4-

%'"''''
OJ(

-ot.S'

OY.~
.,rCA~~

os"e. 3

o .,s

-rile. 3

o".~
ft'NA,*, %1Ic. ~

"E,,,,c. %

1))(-2ef'

OY.'J"
.tI"~ %t" I

'%h' ,

IHe.

W 1I.e' SA

1<..

~.",'LI'hU ~E . . . .
oa..,. heLl( c.i"t...Lfl..

Y'f.o

AOY'

XS,D

'0

"'.

houi'J.

o,"C' SOLT ho~ CUtc.L&.

. Pl

Quickpoint Manuscript

344

'tiel.

< FILTER PLATE

< DWG. NO.~43721
< DRILL THRU ALL HOLES
~.125

DRILL

< MTL: 1/4 IN ALUMINUM

<R. LANCASTER APRIL 30. 1968
Y1.25
INC1/ R .5 4
DX2.5 DY.5
INC2/ L .5 6
DX-3.5 DY.5
INC3/ R .5 8
DX4.5 DY.5
INC4/ L .5 1
DX-5.5 DY.5
INC5/ R .5 12
DX6.5 DY.5
GRD/ U .5 5 L .5 14
X2.0 Y6.75
INC5
DX5.5 DY.5
INC4
DX-4.5 DY.5
INC3
DX3.5 DY.5
INC2
DX~2.5 DY.5
INCl
MOV/ X5.0 Y5.0
BHC/ 4.5 90 12
XI?jY0M00
X4.~

Input Tape Printout

345

A typical Quickpoint-8 system includes a PDP-8 family computer with teletypewriter, low and high speed reader and high speed punch.

346

POSTPROCESSORS
Standard Postprocessors
A number of standard postprocessors for a variety of two-axis machine tools
are available from DEC. To insure that the postprocessor meets the requirements of particular machines, customers should review specification sheets
(see sample) available for each at no cost. Among the post processors available for the QUickpoint-8 system are:
QF02-A

for Pratt & Whitney A, B, and C

QF02-B

for Wiedemann with Cutler Hammer 902

QF02-D

for Wiedemann with GE 120

QF02-E

for Cincinnati Drill & Mill with Acramatic 220

QF02-F

for Cleereman Drill & Mill with GE 120

QF02-G

for W. A. Whitney Turret Punch Press with Westinghouse

QF02-H

for Behrens Turret Punch Press with GE 120-11-500

QF02-1

for Burgmaster 2BHT6 Turret Drill with GE 120-11

QF02-J

for Wiedermann A-IS with GE Mark 1.1 Control

QF02-K

for Wiedemann #S-1528 with Warner & Swasey Control

QF02-L

for Brown & Sharpe Model A-l1l8 with GE Mark"

QF02-M

for Burgmaster 2BHTL with GE 120-11

QF02-N

for MOOG Model 83-500

QF02-0

for Wiedemann S-2540 Turret Punch Press with GE Mark

Century 100

QF02-P

for Westinghouse

QF02-Q

for Pratt & Whitney control for Pratt & Whitney 1000 NC Jigborer

QF02-R

for Sperry Rand UMAC6 control for Brown & Sharpe Hydrocutt
Machining Center

QF03-A

for Superior Electric Control

QF03-B

for CIMX-330 Machining Center

QF03-C

for Burgmaster 3BHTL Turret Drill with GE 103P

QF03-D

for Brown & Sharpe Hydrotape #234 12 Station with GE 103P

# 20

Control for a Behrens Turret Punch Press

347

DIMENSIONAL fORMAT

FORMAT
WOtrd addr., variabl. block

2.3

DIMENSIONS
Ablolute

This postproc_ was originaliy designed for an Ac:ramatlc 220 with a Cincinnati Heald A_center or a Cincinnati CIM-X machining center.

T.I.type printout and computed coordinat. for figure 4-1, User's Guid.:

XI_

DY2.,
xP8t;d~

. DY2.,

XI_

YI"-

DYI.,ii
XI_

YiS'"

I._ 3
YI.'Vl_
YI.
J

1M

output

Charocler$ are punci:ed in Ei.A

~ ruies, etc., imposed or carried out by post.,cier-ed or reeogniud by the postproc_, remain

Ap"roximate:y 18 i ~ ..
for output tap"

In

. ..on H a<ltoma;-icaiiy precede5 :-he sequence number'. Whether or not

. ' (,j( Y) ciata 0: auxii;ary function (G or M) data is entered, X data, Y data~
.... ary ianctior... are input in :nis oiock. if no auxiliary function data is Input, a Gf/J
.In ~ will De out!:lut automatically. (;f no data is entered no) data will be output, either
the fint bloCk or in any other.)

2.

Only one M or G function is output per block. Thus, if two M or G functions _ input In a
Dlock, only the last M or G function will appear on the TeI.type listing and be punched In EIA
cod. on tape.

3.

The "fBK" command may be put on a separate line or on the same line as any X, Y, G; M data.
This command causes en H to be output before the sec;uence number. On all blocks except the
first and th_ in which an liFo"" command was entered, an "N" will precede the sequence ",:,mber.

4.

Tabs are output between each sequence num~, preparaftlry function, X data, Y data, and mlsc.llaneous function (both on the Teletyp. listing and on the EIA tape).

5. An EOB (EIA cod. 2fJIJI) character is punched after each block of data on the EIA tape.
6. Auxiliary functions may be input

~Ione

on a block of data.

I have examined th.. specifications carefully to see that they meet the requirements for my machine
taol cind ~ontrol. I have not relied onth. name and roodel of my machine taol and control "-no I

.... lIz. that small but significont variations are comman.

SIgned_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Title_ _ _ _Company_ _ _ _ _ _ _Date_ _ _ _ __

Sample Postprocessor Specification Sheet

348

Custom ,Postprocessor Service

When a standard postprocessor is not available, DEC. can prepare one based
upon customer requirements. In such a case, the customer will be asked to
provide detailed input via a speCification questionnaire (see sample). He will
also be required to provide a copy of his part programming manual.
POSTPROCESSOR SPECIFICATIONS
Due to the obsence of stondardized documentation and the great number of control and machine types,
variations, and options, we must CIIk you to specify in detail the characteristics of your particular system. Please keep in mind that the computer will do exactly as it is told, whether or not its instructions
suit your need.
Camplete Type Number,--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Mfr.
All Accessories, Options _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

~:

Rotary Table NC controlled?

Other NC controlled 3rd axis? _ _ _ __
How many positions in outomatic changer or turret (if any)?__Total Trovel X ___Y_ _ Z _ _
Control: Camplete Type Number
Mfr.
EIA
ASCII 0
All Accessories, Options _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Format: Tab Sequential 0

Fixed SequentialO
Word Address 0
Variable Block 0
May Tob be used freely?_ _ _ lf not, what are the rules (check her. if separate sheed usedO)?
May leader/trailer be blank?
May leader/trailer be rubout? _ __
If neither, what must leader/trailer be? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Must first character of first block be End of Block _ _ G80 _ _0theo.?
list any other required contents of first block, in the arder in wI-'
May leading zeros be omitted? _ _ _ __
Must decimal point appear on punched tapr~
Are dimensions absolute, incremental, r,
Are minus signs used?
May dimensions that have not r~
If only part of the dimension
Under what conditions?
Auxiliary Functions:
Pi ....... :' .'

.. I

a dimension

", r, S, or T functions

\if any) which con share a block with any auxiliary

mension. If X, V, Z, R, F, S, or T functions have

prerequisites, exceptions, combining rules, etc. must be spelled out. Please be very
~t'WCITjC; ony rule not stated, will probably be violated by the postprocessor, especially when the
stored pattern capabilities of Quickpoint are utilized.

(Check here if separate sheet used 0

Signature of Customer _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Dote
So that we may check 'for requirements not covered in this specification we require that it be accompaniIJd by a copy of your port programmer's manual, together with a copy of any and all manuals, reports, .tc~ that may be referenced therein. Until we have'complete dota, we cannot quote.

Sample Postprocessor Questionnaire

349

QUICKPOINT ADVANTAGES
YS.

Time Sharing

The primary advantage of Quickpoint-8 versus time' sharing is cost_ As

shown in the accompanying graphs;*the moderate-to-heavy user of time
sharing can realize a breakeven point with a Quickpoint-8 system in two
years or less. This is achieved with as little as two hours per day use.
In addition to the cost advantage, an in-house Quickpoint-8 system offers
these distinct "advantages over time-sharing:
einstant access to the computer (no busy signals, queing, or disconnects)
eno long-distance phone line charges
esystem control and software security
ecost stability (the initial low-cost investment can be written off in fixed
regular amounts and is not subject to cost peaks and valleys based
upon usage)
2,000
1~750

_______________ _

~ 1,500

z
o

1,250

II:

1,000

:3

750

..J

----------------)
_::: :::-= -:.:::.::.::. =::.-:. .-___
=== }
QUICKPOINT

2 YR PA'tOUT

-l1U~tn.IN:L

3 YR PAYOUT

------------------

CONNECTEO TERMINAL TIME -HOURS PER MONTH

-Based upon information published in COMPUTERAIDED PART PROGRAMMING FOR

NUMERICAL CONTROL. AN INDUSTRY STUDY. by John D. McCarroll. Industrial Develop
ment Division, Institute of Science and Technology. the University of Michigan, 1969.

f n'77~""""'"'T"'r"rr 20t<

I
I

--<...L.<..LL.L.LJ-~

I
BASED ON

'15-20,000 SYSTEM

QUICKPOINT HOURS OF USE PER DAY

350

15K

vs. Manual Programming

Quickpoint-8 offers three distinct advantages over manual methods of parts
programming: accuracy, simplicity and time savings. These can mean real
cost savings over a period of time.
-ACCURACY
Manual methods can sometimes involve three or four attempts before a
correct tape is punched. This leads to wasted materials and machine time_

Trigonometric and pattern commands are performed by the computer thus

avoiding human computation error. This further minimizes first part problems.
Error commands alert the programmer to certain kinds of format mistakes,
thus preventing those errors from spoiling a part (faster proveout).
- SIMPLICITY
Quickpoint simplifies the calculations required by manual methods, and
standardizes codes and formats needed for each machine/controller combination.

The simpliCity of the language enables the part designer to learn to make
his own first-part tape, thus reducing the time between product development
and prototype production.
-TIME SAVINGS
Programming time is effectively halved.

With additional teletypewriters, several programmers can be served at less

cost than by adding flexowriters.
By using the Master Tape Duplicator program with the high speed tape
options, a fresh working tape can be generated quickly for each job run,
thus avoiding the chances of worn or obsoleted tapes spoiling the work.

351

DEC's new DNC system includes a PDP-8 family computer and interfacing
housed in a NEMA enclosure,' two operators' consoles, and three teletypewriters (not shown in this photo).

352

DIRECT NUMERICAL CONTROL

CONTROL
PRODUCTS

Until now, a broad range of standard DNC products has not been commercially available. Each machine tool builder who wanted to exploit the
potential of computer NC had to spend considerable effort in developing
specifications appropriate to his particular customers' requirements.
In response to this situafion, DEC has developed a modular DNC system
based on the popular PDP-8 family of low cost computers. To date the
largest number of dedicated general-purpose computers connected directly
to metalworking, component assembly, and measuring machines have been
supplied by DEC. An even greater number of PDP-8 family computers are in
daily use preparing part programs to run conventional NC systems.
The new POP-8 based ONe system is of the most basic design. It is modular
to meet varying needs of machine tool builders, and is planned to serve as
a basic building block for DNC applications in machine tools as well as other
manufacturing equipment.
The system is priced near the bottom of the cost spectrum to allow those
with even modest needs to obtain the advantages and power of direct numerical control.
Besides offering a basic DNC system, DEC's NC products staff will assist
machine builders in not only defining special requirements, but in developing
special hardware and software, directly or through a third party systems
company.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
The DEC DNC system comprises a 4K PDP-8/l with various interfaces, three
ASR33 Teletypes, an oil-tight enclosure with two integral oil-tight operator
consoles, and space to mount interfaces for several types of readily available
stepping motors. It is designed to be placed between two similar machines
running independent part programs, and controlled by the same or by different operators.
SOFTWARE
The DNC software package comprises a foreground/background system with
routines for linear and circular interpolation, cutter radius compensation,
part program preparation, supervisory report generation, machine slide program dimension changes, etc.
DRIVE SYSTEMS
Electro-hydraulic pulse motors or all-electric steppers may be interfaced by
selecting different hardware and software modules.
POWER SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Total power requirements for, the system: 220/230 volt; single phase, 50160 Hz.
This Power is provided to the enclosure by receptacles in a non-intercharige353

able scheme. That is, one receptacle is furnished for a regulated 115/120
volt, 3 wire, single phase input as a logic power source. The other receptacle
is a four wire device requiring 220/230 volts, single phase power for motor
and auxiliary fUnction loads.
All inputs are filtered internally in the enclosure to minimize line transients
and noise. A voltage stabilizing transformer 120/220 volt 50/60 Hz must be
supplied by the user for the regulated input. Each plug is furnished with
mating receptacle for ease of installation.
ENVIRONMENT
The main system is designed for self-cooled operation where men are comfortable, or at higher temperature with an added vortex cooler. Enclosure
and control consolettes are NEMA 12 type welded steel gasketed, with oiltight push buttons. There is no interchange of shop atmosphere, no filters
to get clogged. Teletypes are used by supervisor and part programmer but
not by machine operators, and need not be exposed to severe environments
adjacent to the machines.
REDUCED CONFIGURA1'IONS AND SUBSYSTEMS
Both hardware and software are modular. Single-machine configurations with
one operator's console and two teletypes are available, and may be upgraded
to twin systems later. Subsystems and software are available separately without field service support for those who wish to develop their own systems.

2201230V-10-60Hz 6KVA

I INPUT POWER
I

r -I

I
.1.. - - .,2 POLE SOLID NEUTRAL
:I FUSIBLE DISCONNECT
I SWITCH

Ly __ y..J

60 AMP.- 250V

1"'4 #10AWG $OJ

CABLE
r-.fL-, I
I

I
:s\~i1~fz~: I

I LINE

L _

4WIRE-PLUG

a RECEPTACLE ' "

_.J ~2OI23OV-'0-60Hz_.

p15/120-ro...BE~LATE~PWR.
L

3 #12AWG SOJ
CABLE

3 WIRE PLUG
RECEPTACLE

NOTE:
1. ALL UNITS SHOWN DOTTED
ARE USER SUPPLIED

DNC UNIT

TYPICAL SITE INSTALLATION

FOR DNC SYSTEM.

DNC POWER SUPPLY

354

Operator's interactive console of DEC's new DNC system.

A typical application of DEC's new DNC system.

355

DNe SOFlWARE

Part Program Formats

IDENTIFICATION INPUT
At the beginning of part program preparation the computer types a slash,
after which the part programmer may enter any characters he chooses to
represent identification. This input is terminated by another slash .
.!.

UlC-3701- bA-768-f<2-211

Note: Underlined characters provided bycomputer.

PART INPUT
By hitting "X," th~ programmer setects the format for specifying a new target
position. A typical interchange might be:

126 X2.75 .:!:-1.2 ): :!:23.6780 B2.25

~l

~!

The programmer in this example has:

Subtracted 1.2 from 2.75 to get X=1.55
Added 23.6780 to the previous Y location
Specified a new R plane at +3.25 inches
Left the Z dimension as it was
PATTERNS
By hitting "P," the programmer selects the format for defining a section of
the part program already completed as a pattern to be repeated:
~~~ PN6 125

The programmer in this example has specified a repeat of all the sequence
numbers starting with 6, and ending with the last sequence number before 25.
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
By hitting "M," the format for specifying auxiliary functions is obtained:
.!~~ Ml~

154 ~1.R

The part programmer in this example has provided CW spindle power and
coolant # 1, called for a tool change, and specified a new canned cycle
(drilling). He has rejected the opportunity to specify a second M function.
(He could have rejected G and/or T as wen, of course.)
If one of the circular arc functions (G02, G03, G06, G07) is specified then
an opportunity to specify the radius of the arc is presented.

1 ~~

120

202 .8..75

In this example the part programmer has specified:

No new M function.
A change to tool 20. The nominal diameter of this tool has been stored
in the tool table previously, and will be modified by the machine op
erator if necessary at run time.
CW arc with cutter on the righthand side of the cutting path. Cutting
path (not the center of the tool) begins at the current position and ends
at the position specified in the next dimension command. '

356

Radius of the workpiece surface to be 0.750".

TOOL DATA
Tools may be numbered in any order. Format will vary somewhat for some
types of machines, "but a typical format for a milling/drilling machine would
look like this:

I "~. se J.~. 5 fZ <4e De. 670S f~Y2S f~ S

The part programmer has specified the following:
Spindle speed 150 (RPM)
Tool length 4.5000"
Plunging feed rate 40 inches per minute
Tool diameter .6705"
Milling feed rate, roughing: 25 inches per minute
Milling feedrate, finishing: 5 inches per minute.
PART REPORT FORMATS

HEADING
heading is typed out on the supervisory Teletype at the time the part
program is read into the computer. The first line of the report consists of
up to sixty alphanumeric characters representing part number and other part
and program identification data. The last four characters of programmer data
show the number of memory cells needed to store the program preceded by
the letter "N" so that only fifty-five characters may be entered at the head of
the part program completely at the volition of the part programmer.

The

IDEC-3701- 6B-768-R2-2.1NJf29I
I
i

part identification, etc.

entered by programmer

memory
cells
used

TROUBLE REPORT

Trouble reports are preceded and followed by an extra linefeed, to set them
apart.

,121<42IB1Jf2)01202lQ0100,w0.0Jf.e.0S.0.08,Fe.S2.e.60.I.S01121

time

II

step
where
tool
broke

tool
no.
and
life

quan.

min., ave., max. min., ave., max.

load time
floor-to-floor
time

spindle
utilization

SUMMARY REPORT

The other type of line on the report is the normal data format, called for
either the supervisor's call button or by the machine operator giving the "job
end" command.

time

set
up

job
time

quan..

min., ave., max.

load time

357

min., ave., max.

floor-to-floor
time

A typical application of DEC's new ONC system

358

DEC's Module Assembly inserts rivets and eyelets into printed circuit boards before beginning component insertion production_

359

PDP-14 Solid State Industrial Control System (in NEMA enclosure)

360

PDP14 ~ND PDP-14fL

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

CONTROL

PRODUCTS

Digital Equipment Corporation's PDp14 is a programmable solid state con

troller which is well suited to a variety of applications. The PDP14 combines
the advantages of solid state- with the relay characteristics of simplicity and
ease of use. It offers solid state logic in an easily programmed system which
will op~rate in an industrial environment.
The basic PDP14 Controller resembles a computer in that it contains input
output interfaces, a control unit and a memory. However, there are several
important differences. First, the control unit is simplified and may be pro
grammed using a few simple instructions. This allows a control engineer who
has had no prior computer training to program the PDp14. Second, the input
output interfaces are designed to accept 120 Vac line inputs, such as are
fieldwired from limit switches, and the outputs are similarly 120 Vac with
sufficient capacity (500 Va) to drive solenoids or motor contractors. Third, the
PDp14 memory is nonvolatile; it is a hardwired, readonly memory which
contains the programmed instruction to control a specific application.
Although the memory cannot be destroyed electrically, it can be altered by
the insertion of a new set of wires.
The software and hardware of the PDp-14 offer a ready means of computer
monitoring a control system. The PDp14 serves as the AC interface to the
controlled equipment. A computer interface between a PDp14 and a PDP-8/1
or 8/l general purpose computer is available. This computer interface permits
the monitoring computer to interrogate inputs and outputs through the PDP-14
on a "cycle-stealing" basis. Using this technique, the monitoring computer
~].,ay isolate component failure bringing downtime for repa!rs to a minimum.
wnen necessary, the PDp-14 and the monitoring computer may communicat~
through 12 bit registers contained within the PDP-14. The monitoring computer may supply information to the PDP-14 which will affect its operation or it
may supply actual instructions to be executed by the PDP-14.
The PDP-14 is designed to be more reliable, more flexible and, in most cases,
less expensive than any other electrical system now available for control of
machines and systems utilizing two state devices such as limit switches;
push buttons, motor contactors and solenoids.

361

CONTROL
SWITCHES
ONIOH

]~
OPEN PIN
HINGES
(21

I j
-t-j!:

;cz,

STARTISTOP

" ~ <1'1
II5VAC
CONVENIENCE
OUTLET

TOP

CONTINUE

.~
NO 2
CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY
5 VOC,7 AMPS
(OPTIONAL!

NO 1
CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY
5 VOC ,7 AMPS

CD

~
BANK
1

UNI(

BANK

BANI(
4

I~

CONTROL
OPT IONS
AND
MAINTEN"'NCE
PANEL

~
MEMORY UNIT SOCKETS -

CONTROL
LOtil C

0000
TO
1777

2000

4000

6000

TO
5777

TO
5777

TO

I--

LOCK PIN

10-

I~

7777

(~

6-

lUG
HOLES

I - BASE

F!AME

H1NGEO
~~
M""NFRAME

BOTTOM

PDp14 Mainframe
362

The PDp14 system is all solidstate, and inherently reliable because of two
key factors.
a. The K Series industrial control modules. For several years, the K Series
has been widely accepted by industry as the most reliable solid-state module
series available at reasonable cost. The rugged and flexible K Series has
been designed into many types of custom control systems where speed and
reliability are demanded. It is now available to serve the control needs of
the mass-production industry as part of the PDP-14 system.
b. DEC experience as leader of the small-c:omputer field. Switching circuits in
a computer must function reliably hundreds of thousands of times a second.
We have ~pplied our knowledge of solid-state design and programming tech
niques to the PDp14.
The PDP-14 system was designed specifically for industrial control. It is an
integrated group of plugin modular components. This allows the user to buy
only the equipment actually needed for his control function. The modular
approach also allows components to be easily replaced if necessary.
The "memory" used is a matrix of wires, inserted in the PDp14 Control unit.
This matrix is directly analogous to the wiring used in relay panels - but
much smaller. It directs the entire operation of the PDP-14, and is designed
by each user for his specific control needs, using a flexible computer program.
This memory is so inexpensive that if changes in your manufacturing dictate
new control operations, you can simply discard the memory and design a
new one.
large industrial relay control panels have a normal service life of two to five
years, and then must be replaced entirely. During this period, individual relays
and contacts must constantly be replaced. In contrast, the PDP-14 has no
moving parts, and its components have a normal life expectancy of over ten
years.
The PDP14 system initial cost is about the same as relay systems, and for
large control applications, is even less. In ten years of manufacturing, you
could wear out three relay systems, and the PDp14 should still ~e functioning
reliably. Maintenance costs are reduced. And if the machinery is ever refitted
for a new task, you don't have to start from scratch; just replace the PDP14
memory.
As added bonuses, the PDp14 system requires far less power and as little
as onetenth the space of conventional systems.

363

,----------

I
I

1"0'-14
COOT_ "

r---'
I

lO

l_~.:.J

______

r---'
_____ _~I I:
......
J
I

... ---:..

POp14 System 0.agram

364

PDP-14 System Components

The PDP-14 Control System is a unified assembly of three basic units:
a. Input Interface Boxes ("I" Boxes)
b_ The PDP-14 Programmed Control unit
c. Output Interface Boxes ("0" Boxes)
All system inputs and outputs are designed for 120 volts AC, 60 Hz, single'
phase, compatible with the present industry standard.

INPUT BOXES
The "I" boxes are signal-conditioning devices; they accept 120 VAC inputs
from two-state sensing devices such as limit switches, push buttons, proximity
switches, pressure switches, and photocells. These inputs are converted into
signals which are proper for our solidstate equipment. They then pass along
control cables to the PDP14 Control unit. Each Ibox contains 32 inputs. A
maximum of eight Iboxes, providing a total of 256 inputs is permitted in one
POP-14 system.
Input boxes may be substituted for output boxes to expand the input
capabilities '(in increments of 32) to a maximum of 512 inputs.

PDP14 CONTROL UNIT

The control contains a wire matrix or "braid", which is the memory of the
entire unit. It is called a "readonly memory," or "ROM" because it cannot be
altered electrically (that is, "written on"). The ROM is actually a list of permanently wired electrical instructions which are "read" by the control to determine its operation.
The control operates in a way analogous to scanning a relay ladder diagram
r,uilgby rung. Each rung of the ladder represents a specific group of sensed
input conditions which must be satisfied to cause a change in the condition of
an output. The ROM contains instructions in small groups, each corresponding
<to a single rung in the ladder. The ROM directs the control to select each input
specified in a group and test whether it is on or off. (This is the action per
formed by the "Test" unit shown.) Finally, the specified output is selected and
set on or off, based on the test results. (This is the function of the "Set"
blocks.) The control now continues to the next group of inputs and outputs,
and repeats the process. This action proceeds one instruction at a time, but so
fast that all inputs are checked and outputs properly changed in thousandths
of a second; in fact, usually faster than one or two control relays could respond.

365

,;;

/iki'-":J1,' Ii,

PDp14 Input and Output Boxes

366

OUTPUT BOXES

Control signals sent from the control are accepted by the "0" boxes to
activate selected 120 VAC outputs. Each output is a triac, the solid-state
equivalent of a remotely controlled switch. Once set on, each output remains
on and supplying power until it is set off by a ~ew control signal.
. Output boxes have an additional system function; they can be interrogated by
the control unit to determine whether their outputs are on or off. In this mode,
they can be considered as control inputs.
Each output of an output .box can be connected to its own source voltage and
to loads, such as solenoids, motor contactors, small motors, lamps and
signalling devices.
Each output box contains 16 outputs. A total of 16 Oboxes providing 256
outputs may be incorporated in one PDp14 system.

READ-ONLY MEMORYThe heart of the control operation is the readonly memory (ROM). The ROM
contains all the instructions whiCh allow the Control to sample specific groups
of inputs and then select a specified output and turn it on or off. The ROM is
provided in one to four separate plugin sections, each of which has over
1,000 "locations" in which control instructions are stored. The number of
sections required is determined by the size of the control "problem" - the
~umber of inputs and outputs, and the number of control decisions which
must be made.
The ROM is an actual physical matrix or "braid" of solid wires permanently
embedded in a potting compound and surrounded by electronic sampling
circuits (96 transformer cores) in a "sandwich" packaging. The arrangement
of the braid wires is determined in a series of computer-aided steps, which
result in a punched paper tape. This tape is used to operate an automatic
wire placing machine, or "loom," which forms a wire braid. This braid, returned to be installed in the Control unit, represents the specific solution to
the individual control problem. Whenever this element is changed, the PDP-14
System behaves as though it were rewired, allowing you complete flexibility
in changing machine operations and retrofit.
In operation, the ROM acts like a series of wires strung through and around
small current transformers. Each wire represents eight individual control instructions, which are read by sending a current pulse through it. The read out
is in groups of eight instructions. The single desired instruction is selected
from these eight. Only the transformers with wires running through their cores
will be energized. The pattern of energized transformers is then read as an
electronic instruction code. The code is the 12-bit binary instructions which
are understood by the PDP-14 control unit.
It is possible to change as many as 20 wires (approx. 15%) of the ROM
by cutting out wires and manually replacing them with new ones.

367

FERRITE CORE

~ER;t______________~

POWER RET

PULSE

-TRANSFORMER CORE
SENSE WINDING

ON

Ul

Schematic Of ThreePDP-14 ROM Transformer Cores

ACCESSORIES
In addition to normal outputs, the PDP-14 system may be equipped with
solid state timers, retentive memories, and storage outputs. The timers and
retentive memories are provided in an accessories box (A-box). The storage
outputs are provided in a storage module consisting of 16 storage outputs.
The solid state timers may be adjusted to provide timing functions from frac
tions of a second to thirty seconds. The retentive memories are mercurywetted relays which provide I-bit of storage information after a power failure.
The storage outputs provide temporary storage of intermediate processing
results, status information, and are sometimes used for communication between the PDP-14 and the monitoring computer.
Also supplied as an accessory is an auxiliary power supply which is required
for large PDp14 systems.

368

PROGRAMMING THE PDP14

Programming in the PDPI4 system is simply the procedure used to generate
the readonly memory (ROM) to control a process or machine. PDpI4 pro
gramming does not require previous computer experience; it does require
experience in machine control.
PDPI4 programs provide relationships between inputs (limit switches, -{)ush
buttons, selector switches, etc.) and outputs (solenoids, motor contactors,
indicator lights, etc.). These relationships, or control functions, may be ex
pressed as Boolean equations which, when solved for particular input values,
specify the state (ON or OFF) of an output.
Machine inputs and outputs must be assigned to the PDpI4 input (I) and
output (0) boxes before a PDp14 control program can be written. These
assignments permit the PDp14 instructions to test the state of specific inputs
and outputs. Once these assignments are made, the inputs and outputs are
referred to by unique numbers preceeded by an "X" for an input, or a "Y"
fQr an output. For programming purposes, these X and Y numbers represent
specific input and output devices.

BOOLEAN REPRESENTATIONS OF MACHINE CONTROL

Programming a PDp14 requires familiarity with simple Boolean representa
tions of control functions. These representations are comprised of "operators"
and "variables". The variables of PDP14 control equations are inputs (X's)
and outputs (V's). The variables have two "states", namely, ON and OFF. The
operators in these equations are (AND), + (OR) and / (NOT). Parentheses
may be used within equations to group variables.
For example, the equation:
YIO

= X23 + X21 Y7

is read "output 10 is set ON when input 23 is ON, or when both output 7 and
input 21 are ON." This equation instructs the PDp14 to test input 23; if it is
ON, set output 10 ON. In input 23 is OFF, test output 7 and input 21'; if they
are both ON, set output 10 ON. If neither set of conditions is satisfied, set
output 10 OFF.
The above equation could be represented by the following familiar ladder
diagram:

SOLF

where SOL F corresponds to YIO; 2LS corresponds to X23; 7CR corresponds

to Y7; and 3LS corresponds to X21.
369

A set of control functions similar to the preceding example comprise a PDP14

program. A series of equations corresponding to these functions and written
in terms of X's and V's are then translated into the PDP-14 machine code
program using BOOL14.
BOOL14

BOOL14 is a translator program for control equations. It operates on a PDp8

family computer and translates the equations into the PDp14 machine code
instructions needed to solve these equations. The machine code instructicns
will later be woven to form the ROM for the PDP-14. Before this happens however, the program should be rigorously tested and debugged. This is done with
SIM-14. The translation for two equations is:

Y10 =X23+X2"1 *Y7

0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007

2423
5407
2021
1007
5007
3010
0344
3410

TXN
JFN
TXF
TYF
JFF
SYF
SKP
SYN

023
007
021
007
007
010
010

YI7=X2+X51+X3*Y7+X4*Y21
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0020
0021
0022
0023

2402
2451
5423
2003
1007
5023
2004
1021
5023
301 7
0344
34.1 7

370

TXN
TXN
JFN
TXF
TYF
JFF
TXF
TYF
JFF
SYF
SKP
SYN

002.
051
023
003
007
023
004
021
023
017
017

The reSultant PDP-14 program is a "closed loop" of disjoint instructions

groups. Each group of instructions solves an equation for one output, setting it
on or off. For example, if a machine control requires twenty outputs, there are
twenty equations and instruction groups in the control program. The last
instruction group is terminated with a "jump" to the first instruction group.
The following diagram illustrates the construction of the program.

SOLVE
FOR
OUTPUT
1

OFF
SET Yl
ON

SOLVE
FOR
OUTPUT
2

OFF
SET Y2
ON

OFF

SOLVE

FOR

OUTPl/T
20

SET Y20
ON

371

,SIM14
SIM-14 is a PDP-S based program which simulates PDP-14 operation in two
modes. The user may operate in an offline or "local" mode to debug or modify
his program completely within the PDP-S. When relatively certain that the
program is correct, the user may switch to on-line mode where the program is
executed to control the machine's operation.
Local mode debugging offers three features for testing programs.

1. The user supplies input states for a given equation and SIM-14 reports the
resultant state of the output. This proceeds equation by equation.
2. The user generates a complete truth table, or binary array, which com~
pletely defines the state of an output for all possible input states. This is
also done for each equation.
3. The user tests the complete program using simulated execution. He tests
the complete program in sequence by specifying input states. Changing
output states are reported by SIM-14. The user continues to vary input
values to test all segments of the program.
The following are sample truth tables as generated by SIM-14- for the two
equations which were translated by BOOL-14.

YIO

= X23 + X2I Y7
.TA10
.X23
.X21
.Y7

.SeJ
A XI023
B X021

C Y0107

ABC
0010=10
001 =10
10110 =0
1011'=1

1010 =1
H2Jl=l
1110

111

=1
=1

372

H?J0000 = 1
100001 = 1
100010=1
10001 1 = 1
100100=1
10010 1 = 1
100 1 10 = 1
100111=1
101000=1
101001 = 1
101010 = 1
10 10 1 1 1
101100=1
10 110 1 = 1
10 1 1 10 = 1
10 1 1 1 1 1
110000=1
11001211=1
110010=1
1100 1 1 = 1
110100=1
110101=1
110110=1
110111=1
111000=1
111001=1
111010=1
111011=1
111100=1
111101=1
111110=1
111111=1

A X002
8 X051
C X003
o Y007
E X004
F' Y021

ABCDEF'
000000 =0
000001 =0
000010 =0
000011=1
000100 =0.
000101 =0
0001 1 eJ =0

0001 1 1.= 1
001000 =0 .
001001 =0
001010 =0
1?J01011=1
001100=1
001101 = 1
001110=1

iJ'Jlll1=1
01i~000

3U~Qj01

=1
=1

010010=1
010011=1
010100=1
010101=1
010110=1
010111=1
011000=1
eJ11001~1

011010=1
011011=1
011100=1
011101=1
011110=1
011111=1
373

44' VAC
ac
3.
OUTPUT LEADS

AC.
INPUT LUOS

~
~

910 VAC
'ILTER
I' REO'D)

,'-['...

l'-

TERMINAL

AC WI ..

I
lOX

A
80X

~'-..

il

0~

0
lOX

I
lOX

1'""\
~

~c=

0
80X
,

t:=~~ V
V

"

AC WI"IN& DUCT

_----1':>

~"c"A~t.:g~

;.

.:1

::~
'/-

~~'
~

POP-'4
CONTROL UNIT

<"

~~l,PtJno~
~'LES

......

.....

~;
:(/.

P::

"""" V~ """"
"
V
"" V-"

1ID.14'-'

V'-...

0
lOX

e;

{'-

~C
~

0
lOX

./ ~

~'-..

~ '::::::".
./

V
~'-..

-V

1.,---V

~j.

~.'

-----

1 ~~ ~

I--"

~UCT

I
lOX

~'-..

CIRCUIT
IREAICER

"- .--- V
e:: "~ "~
V "V
V

[\.....

~z,

-\,L

OTHER DEVIC E S

.I".

'-

~TRIPS,

~(>

.' :<:'

CONTROL
TRANSFORMER
115 VAC 11/)
OUTPUT

TERMINATIONS

11

#//;/; .;Jf /'$,. '/::/.:W~'l~~;'

PDP-14 System Layout Example

374

NEMA 12
ENCLOSURE

PDp14 SYSTEM EXAMPLE

What are the procedures involved in designing and maintaining a PDP-14
system?

Configuring the sy~tem and selecting hardware

Developing the control program
Installing the ,hardware
Debugging the system
Installing the ROM
Maintaining the system

All-except the first of the above steps are assisted by software provided by
DEC.
Configuring the System
How do you decide what PDP-14 hardware you will need to solve your control
program? You must answer the following questions.
1. How many real outputs (motor contactors, solenoids, lights, etc.) are
required?
2.

How many timers are needed?

3.

Must the PDP-14 record information with storage outputs or retentive

memories?

4.

How many inputs (limit switches, push buttons, selector switches, pres-'
sure switches, etc.) are in the system?

5. Will the PDP-14 be monitored by an external computer?

6.

How many variables are in an equation to control a typical output?

Question 1 determines the number of output boxes required. let's assume

there are 72 outputs. (If a relay system is being changed over to PDP-14,
control relays should be excluded from this count.) These 72 Outputs require
5 output boxes and leaves 8 spare outputs~
Question 2 concerns the selection of accessory boxes. An "A-box" can contain
16 timers. let's assume there are 12 operations which must be timed. You
need one A-box and 6 timer cards (each provides 2 timers).
Question 3 also concerns the A-box, if retentive memories are needed. Retentive memories are available as one mercury-wetted relay per card. Only 4
retentive memories may be used in one A-box, and each uses two output
slots. let's assume no retentive memories are needed. However, there are 7
status conditions which must be recorded (similar to the old control relay),
and 5 push buttons, the activation of which the PDP-14 must remember after
the input is no longer present. These require 12 storage outputs or one
storage module with 4 spares.

375

Question 4 is a straight forward count of two state inputs. Each position of a

selector switch is considered as a single input. Let's assume there are 91
inputs. Thus 3 input boxes are required, providing 96 input slots, five of
which are spares.
Question 5 has several implications. The obvious need is a computer interface.
Howev.er if the PDP-14 is to be monitored, several other considerations are
also needed. Storage outputs may be required for communication between
the PDp14 and the monitor. More memory may be needed to handle monitor
ing information. Let's assume that the monitor will simply check inputs and
outputs on a cycle-stealing basis and that there will be 5 status words sent
from the PDP-14 to the monitor. The requirement is for approximately 25
extra PDP-14 locations.
Question 6 is probably the toughest to answer. It is 'aimed at an estimate of
the amount of PDP14 memory required for the system. If equations on the
(X2 + X3 + X4) X5), or more, a
average contain 5 variables (e.g. Y1
good estimate is that it will require 2N PDP-14 memory 10cationS'to solve the
equation, where N is the number of variables. For less than 5 variables, 2N + 2
is the suggested estimating rule.

Let us assume there are on the average 7 variables in an equation (N = 7).

We have 72 output equations, 12 timer equations, 12 storage output equa
tions, a total of 96 equations each requiring approximately 14 PDp14 (2N)
locations. Thus, the memory requirement is 1344 locations (96 x 14). We also
needed 25 locations to handle the monitoring needs. Thus a 2K (2000 location) memory is ne-eded.
There are several trade-offs which may be made when configuring a system.
Unused outputs may be used as storage outputs; programming (subroutines)
may replace other storage outputs; monitoring systems may adjust the amount
of processing done in the PDP-14 with the amount done in the monitor to
vary the amount of memory required; excess memory may be used to diag
nose equipment failures by turning on signal lights when inputs are found to
be in the wrong state.
Developing the Control Program

The PDpS computer is used to run BOOL-14 and SIM14 to write the PDP14
control program. If the PDp14 program will require greater than lK of memory
(1000 locations), an SK PDpS is needed to develop the program. For programs
of 1K or less, a 4K PDp8 is sufficient.
The steps involved are:

1. Assign each input and output to a specific PDp14 I or Obox and obtain
the X and Y number.

2. Write the Boolean equations for each output using the X and Y numbers
for inputs and outputs.
3. Type the equations on the Teletype.
4.

Use BOOL14 to generate the machine code program.

5. Read the machine code program into SIM14.

6. Use local mode of SIM14 to verify the instructions for each equation,
by varying the, input and recording the resultant output value; genera.te
376

truth tables for each equation; use simulated execution to test the whole
program without attaching the PDP-14. SIM-14 will later be used to debug
the complete hardware/software system.
'nstalling the PDP14 Hardware
The PDp-14 hardware is installed within a standard NEMA 12 enclosure. The
PDP-14 control unit is mounted near the bottom of the enclosure with the
cables connecting it to the input, output, accessory and storage boxes. These
boxes are usually mounted above the PDp-14 but still within the NEMA
enclosure.
The required 110 VAC power is supplied to the processor directly. The I and
aboxes must be supplied independently with 110 VAC at each terminal either
from an input, (e.g. limit switch) or to be switched to an output (e.g. a
solenoid). The field wiring to the input and output boxes may be direct or
via terminal strips within the NEMA 12.
The PDp-14 system when installed may be thoroughly checked to ascertain
that no damage to the circuitry was received during shipment using TEST-14,
a PDP-8 based diagnostic program. This program operates on a 4K PDP.g
and exercises all of the internal PDP-14 logic and contains options for testing
the I and aboxes. Failures cause message typeouts on the teletype console
indicating which test the PDp-14 failed. The documentation provided indicates
which module or modules may be defective, and the priority in which they
should be checked. A defective module may be replaced in seconds.
If the I and abox circuitry is to be tested, the field wires to the a-boxes should
not be connected. Field wiring to inputs which directly turn on other devices
should also be disconnected.
Once the PDp-14 has been thoroughly tested (one pas~ through the test takes
approximately 3 minutes), the field wiring, if not already in place, is completed
to the I and aboxes and the complete system is debugged.
Debugging the System
When the program has been written and debugged aqd the hardware is installed, the system is debugged using online mode of S.IM-14. In online mode,
the PDp14 program, which has been thoroughly debugged in local mode of
SIM-14, is supplied to the PDP-14 and executed. The machinery will operate
under SIM-14 as it will when the ROM is installed except that the PDp14 will
check inputs and set outpu.ts at a significantly faster rate when its program is
stored in the ROM. (This difference in processing speed between online mode
and the ROM will not be a factor in most applications and can be counteracted, if necessary, through use of software subroutines.)
Bringing up a system that is to be controlled by a PDP-14 is considerably
easier than a relay controlled system, because of the features of online mode
and the terminal lights of the I and Oboxes. Wiring errors are easily detected
by looking at indicator lights. If an operation does not occur, a glance at the
lights indicates which input or inputs is not present. Using SIM-14, ~he state
of storage outputs, timers, and retentive memories may be determined. Quick
patches may be made to the program if problems are discovered. Check out
progresses at a considerably improved pace because of the PDP-14 hardware
and software.

377

The PDP14 program may be executed in online mode in sections, using

strategically placed "program stops" at which point execution of the PDp14
program halts and control returns to SIM14. Shutdown sequences or "stop
equations" that are executed before control returns to SIM14 may also be
used in online mode. Thus the PDP-14 program may be run in total, or if
desired, in parts thereby lesting each individual programmed operation.
Installing the ROM
Once the system has been checkedout and the program is correct, a paper
tape is punched from which DEC will weave a ROM. The ROM will be returned
to you in two to three weeks. During that time the PDP-14 may continue to
operate in online mode of SIM-14 and thus the controlled equipment may still
be operated.
Once the ROM (or ROM's, if a greater than lK program is used) has returned,
it is plugged into the PDP-14 mainframe. The PDP-8 interface cables for SIM14
online mode are removed, and the PDP-14 system is complete.
Field rewiring can change any instruction in the program after it is woven in
the ROM. The procedure is simply to clip the lead from 'the old wire, and
solder a new wire in its place. The new wire is then placed through, or
around, the series of transformer cores to represent the correct instructions.
If more than 15% of the programmed instructions must be altered; the
rewiring may become cumbersome and a completely rewoven ROM should
be considered.
A PDP-8 based program, VER-14 may be used to verify that the memory contains the same instructions as contained on a paper tape. Thus a program
change should be made using SIM-14 and a new tape generated. (The change
should, of course, be tested in local and online modes of SIM-14 first.) The
wires may then be replaced in the ROM. When the ROM is re-installed in the
PDP-14, VER-14 may be used to verify that the changes were properly made.
Maintaining the System
Once a system has been installed it may be maintained in several ways. When
a failure occurs, it must be diagnosed to be in one of three areas:
(1) the controlled machine
(2) the input, output accessory boxes or The Storage Module
(3) the PDp14 control unit
Assume that the failure may be characterized as, "this should happen now,
but it doesn't!" Examining the input and output lights, it can easily be determined if the output to start the operation is present and if the inputs
required to activate this output are present. If the output is on, the problem
is in the machine; if the output is off and an input required for that output is
missing, the problem is in the machine. If all inputs are present and the output
is' missing, the fault can be either in the PDP-14'\ and O-boxes or in the PDP-14
control unit.
Once it has been determined that the failure is in the PDp14 part of the
system, the isolation of the failure to either the I and a-boxes or the PDP-14
processor itself is achieved by assuming that the I or a-box is at fault. The I
and Oboxes may be checked out by swapping the modules concerned with
the faulty input or output. Spare part kits are available for this purpose. If

378

module swapping in the interface boxes does not resolve the problem, the
PDP-14 processor must be considered at fault_
The processor may be cheeked out with TEST-14, the PDP-S based diagnostic
program to ascertain that the PDP-14 circuitry operates properly. If TEST-14
does not point out any electronic failure, the ROM memory may be tested '
with VER-14 against the paper tape record of the program. If no problem
has been discovered in either the memory or the processor, it must be in
the circuitry of the I and a-boxes. These may be tested using TEST14 and a
special box tester fixture. To perform this test, the field wires are first reo
moved from the a-boxes.
If a PDP-8 is not available for testing the PDP-14, the central processor may
be maintained by using the detailed maintenance manuals supplied wit.h
the PDP-14, or by module swapping using the spare parts kit which can be
purchased separately.
The maintenance procedure described above may be performed by the end
user or by the wide network of well trained DEC Field Service Specialists.
Service contracts beyond the normal warranty for the PDP-14 are available.

PDP14/L
The PDP-14/L has all the features and advantages of the PDP-14 but is a
smaller version, limited in expandability. The PDP-14/ L Can be expanded
only to 64 inputs and 64 outputs (or 128 inputs only). Memory expansion
is limited to 1,024 words. The 14/ L is programmed in the same manner as
the PDP-14 with_identical software and diagnostics. In fact, they are so
similar that their control units are interchangeable.

379

CONTROL SYSTEMS

CONTROL
PRODUCTS

The Control Systems Group of Digital Equipment Corporation offers to its

customers a complete design and manufacturing service in the area of module
systems and PDP14 special systems. The Control Systems Grou-p maintains a
qualified staff of experienced design engineers together with their manufactur
ing counterparts to provide these services with a high level of technica~
competence and at a reasonable cost saving to the customer.
In order to clarify and est!3blish the policies and services offered by each of
the two divisions of Control Systems: Modules Systems and PDp14 Special
Systems will be defined separately.

A. Module Systems
Digital Equipment Corporation offers to its customers the capability of designing and building special purpose digital logic systems. The ultimate aim of this
group is to establish a limited production quick turn around capability.
To make this feasible, a minimum initial order of ten identical units must be
ordered. After the initial committments, orders for single units will be accepted. It should be understood that this group can take an existing system
and produce it without going through the prototype stage. However, if there is
any question concer'Ming the operation of the system, a prototype will be
required.
With respect to the prototype, prior to acceptance of the purchase order, all
specifications must be defined and agreed upon between the Control Systems
Group and the customer. All testing of the unit will be performed to this set of
specifications. Acceptance will be based upon a successful demonstration to
the customer that the specifications have been met. Digital Equipment Corpora.'
tion will not warrant the system beyond the date of acceptance but will honor
all existing module warranties.
The engineering and technician labor which a customer pays for at this time
should be considered as his investment in product development and as such
must be written off over the expected life of the product. The customer's
decision at this point must be to decide how many systems are necessary to
economically cover his investment.
Digital Equipment Corporation will, in effect. act as consultant engineers to
these customers and the charges which are assessed must be viewed in this
light. Unlike consultants, however, a maximum charge for engineering is
specified which Iimitsthe amount which will be charged for these services.
The Control Systems Group also provides full documentation (engineering
prints, module layouts, and, if deemed necessary, an operational write-up of
the system) ..Should the need arise for training of the customer's personnel
in the operation of the equipment, the Control Systems Group will also provide
this service.

380

B. PDp14 Special Systems

The primary function of the PDp14 Special Systems group is to offer to the
customer Digital Equipment Corporation's experience and talent in designing
tailor made control systems based upon a PDp14 central processor. In order
to accomplish this, each system will be developed by working as closely with the
customer as possible. An emphasis will be placed on utilizing as many PDp14
standard options as possible and specialized designs will be kept to a minimum.
In addition, the PDp14 Special Systems Group can provide computer based
PDp14 systems as well as stand alone PDp14 systems. This approach offers
the lowest possible cost and speediest delivery.
When it is determined that all of the customer's requirements have been
decided, a system will be designed implementing these functions. At that
time, a firm quote will be developed to cover the cost of the equipment. In
addition to the hardware, the quote will cover labor, documentation, diagnostic
programming and testing costs. Each system will be warranteed to meet all
of the electric specifications as agreed upon between the customer and Digital
Equipment Corporation.
Acceptance testing will be performed at Digital Equipment Corporation and the
customer will be notified sufficiently in advance should he care to be present at
the time of the test. The warrantee of the system will be identical to that of
the PDp14 upon which it is installed.

381

382

TRAINING AND DESIGN AIDS

. CONTROL
PRODUCTS

K-SERIES LOGIC LAB

INTRODUCTION
The K Series Logic Laboratory is designed for use with" K Series Modules. It
is a device for building prototype systems for experimentation and proof of
logic design as well as an effective tool for learning solid state control logic.
It is excellent for training users in digital logic techniques by enabling an
individual to construct logical networks,' with a "hands on approach" to
learning control systems for Industrial Applications.
" The K Series Logic Lab is a completely self contained system consisting of a
power supply, photo cell, pulse generator, switch controls, indicators, mounting hardware and a recommended basic complement of logic modules necessary to construct a working system. The system is expandable and can
accommodate additional K901 patchboard panels for mounting additional
logic modules.

EDUCATION AND TRAINING

As a training device the K Series Logic Lab offers the engineer, technician,
and user. a step by step approach to building an understanding of various
digital logic functions, such as, AND, OR and the operations of NAND and
NOR etc. The user has the option of using NEMA or Mil spec symbology
when making logic connections. Symbology cards on basic logic modules for
use with the K901 patchboard panel are printed with NEMA on one side and
MIL SPEC 806 on the reverse side.

BREADBOARDING AND TESTING

The logic .laboratory power supply is capable of supplying 5V-OC for about
100 modules. There is no restriction on the size of a system which can be
. implemented, since additional patchboard panels can be ordered and "K"
Logic Laboratories interconnected directly.
There is no substitute for actually building the system and verifying the logic.
Some common uses of the Logic Laboratory are listed below. Many of these
are described in detail in the Control Handbook and part III in the 1969
Positive Edition Logic Handbook:
Timer Sequencers
Shifter Sequencers
Parallel Counters
Pulse Rate Multiplier

Serial Adder
Stepping Motors Control
Pulse Generator
Annunciator

383

,CONTROL PANEL -

POWER SUPPLY

K900

The K900 is a combination power supply and input control panel. The input
devices include a photocell, three push button pulsers and timing components
for a K303 clock mounted in a K901 panel. C,lock timing components are provided for frequency steps in ranges of 2Hz to 60Hz and 200Hz to 6K Hz. Wiring diagrams for properly connecting the clock are shown in the logic and
control handbooks (reference K303). The power supply can drive approximately ten type K901 panels of K series FLIP CHIP:!9 logic. Pulsers consist of
a K501 schmitt trigger with a K581 switch filter. Power is supplied by K731,
K743 and K732 power supply modules.

Electrical Cha racteristics

Input voltage: Power supply: 115V 50-60 cps
Output voltage: +5 VDC 10%
Output current: 3 amp

Mechanicai Characteristics
Panel width: 19"
Power Output connection: Hayman Tab
Panel height: 5~/'
terminals which fit AMP "Faston" re-/
Depth: 12"
ceptacle series 250, part 41774 or
Finish: black
Type 914 Power Jumpers.
Power Unit connection: 18/3 AC power cord
K9QO-$185
384

PATCH BOARD PANEL

K901, 911

K901 PATCHCORD MOUNTING PANEL

. This panel provides up to ten FLIP CHIP modules with power and patch connections. Space between patching sockets allows insertion of logic diagrams.
Logic diagrams are printed on all FLIP CHIP Module data sheets. More permanent plastic diagrams are available for -those modules listed.
PANEL WIDTH 19 in
PANEL HEIGHT: 53<6 in.
DEPTH: 61f2 in. with FLIP CHIP modules inserted
FINISH: B1ack
POWER INPUT CONNECTIONS: Tabs which fit
AMP "Faston" receptacle
series 250, part 41774.

911 PATCHCORDS
DEC Type 911 Banana-Jack Patchcords are supplied in color-coded lengths of
2 in. (brown), 4 in. (red), 8 in. (orange), 16 in. (yellow), 32 in. (green), and
64 in. (blue). Patchcords may be stacked to permit multiple connections at
any circuit point on the graphic panels of the DEC K901 Mounting Panel. The
cords are supplied in snap-lid plastic boxes of ten for handy storage.

H901-$125
911-$9/ pkg. of 10

385

INDICATOR SWITCH PANEL

K902

,.
I
(r
1)
I

:8

~.~

E F..
#

(~

I,
t

\
1

\'fl

<f!

(~

(~

\
!

I
I

,l

-:

(1)

:3

:3

~D~DDmD

The K902 Panel provides facilities for control and observation of the Logic
Laboratory. It contains eight indicator lights and a lamp driver module, eight
toggle switches and four potentiometers. Connections to these devices are
made with Type 911 Stacking Banana-Jack Patchcords.
INDICATORS: Indicators inputs accepts signals of +5V and ground. An open
circuit input will light the indicator.. If the input is returned to ground, the
indicator will not light. The load is 1 mao
TOGGte' SWITCHES: The toggle switches are single pole, single throw with
a logic diagram to show the open and closed positions.
POTENTIOMETERS: The potentiometers are 250,000 ohms. They may'be used
to control the frequency of delay one-shots or clock circuits in the K901
Mounting Panel.

MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PANEL WIDTH: 19 in.
PANEL HEIGHT: 53{6 in.
DEPTH: 6 1/ 2 in.

FINISH: Black
POWER INPUT CONNECTIONS: Tabs which fit
AMP "Faston" receptacle series 250, part 41774.

K902-$145

386

PATCH PANEL BOARD

K903

This patch panel provides logic power and patch connections for four doubleheight or eight single height FLIP-CHIP@ modules. The panel was designed
particularly for K Series double height modules including the interfacing
modules (K5xx and K6xx). Two K903 panels cannot however be mounted
together on a mounting rack due to socket overhang at the bottom of each
K903 panel. Space between patching sockets allows insertion of logic diagrams. Logic diagrams are printed on all FLIP-CHIP@) module data sheetsMore permanent plastic diagrams are available for those modules listed.
PANEL WIDTH: 19 in.
PANEL HEIGHT: 5K6 in.
DEPTH:. 6 112 in. with FLIP-CHIP@) modules inserted.
FINISH: Black
POWER INPUT CONNECTIONS: Tabs which fit
AMP "Faston" receptacle series 250, part 41774

I-

387

K903-$155

MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
4913, 914

4913 MOUNTING RACK

The 4913 Mounting Rack provides support for a and up to four K901 Patch
cord Mounting Panels, for a total of up to 40 FLIP CHIP:ID modules ready to
be patched" together for experiments. It may also be used to mount general
purpose mounting panels such as the K943. The power supply must be
mounted at the bottom for stability.
Height: 26 1,4 in.
Threads for mounting panels: 10-32

914 POWER JUMPERS

For interconnections between power supplies, mounting panels, and logic lab
panels, these jumpers use AMP "Faston" receptacles series 250. Specify
914-7 for interconnecting adjacent mounting panels, or 914-19 for other
runs of up to 19 inches. 914-7 contains 10 jumpers; 914-19 contains 5.

4913K-$25
914-7-$ 4
914-19-$ 4
388

BASIC EQUIPMENT LISTS

BASIC LOGIC LABORATORY
1-K901
l-K902

Patchboard panel
Indicator Switch Panel
(complete with K683 module)
Power Supply and 'Control Panel
(complete with Power modules)
Mounting Rack

1-K900
1 pair-4913

125.00
145.00
185.00
25.00

RECOMMENDED LOGIC MODULES AND PATCHCORDS

FOR USE WITH THE LOGIC LABORATORY

4-K003
2-K012
3-Kl13
3-K123
2-K134
1-K161
l-K174

l-KI84
2-K202
l-K206
2-K210
1-K220
l-K230
1-K303
l-K323
l-K376~:

l-K378';:
l-K373';'
l-K522

Expander
Expander
Gate
Gate
Inverter
Decoder
Comparator
Rate Multiplier
Flip-flop
Flip-flop
Counter
Up-down Counter
Shift Register
Timer
One shot delay
Timer Control (0.1-3.0 sec)
Timer Control (1.0-30 sec)
Timer Control (20 Hz-600 Hz clock)
Sensor Converter

4 pks. of 10 patchcords
5 pks_ of 10 patchcords
2 pks. of 10 patchcords
1 pkg. of 10 patchcords
26 symbology cards

(911-2")
(911-4")
(911-16")
(911-16")

UNIT PRICE
5.00
8.00
11.00
12_00
13.00
25_00
24.00
25_00
27_00
20.00
27.00
55.00
40.00
27.00
35.00
15.00
15.00
11.00
25.00

9.00
9.00
9.00
9.00
.25 ea.

Complete K-Series logic lab with workbook

and modules listed - H510

TOTAL PRICE
20.00
16.00
33.00
36.00
26.00
25.00
24.00
25.00
54.00
20.00
54.00
55.00
40.00
27.00
35.00
15.00
15.00
11.00
25.00

36.00
45.00
9.00
9.00
6.50

$995.00-

Asterisk'" denotes symbology cards unavailable. Symbology cards for use with K901
patchboard panel, .25 ea., minimum purchase of $5.00 applies ..

IF ADDITIONAL K901 PATCHBOARDS ARE ORDERED:

1-911-4"
1-911-8"
1.911-16"
1-911-32"

pkg.
pkg.
pkg.
pkg.

of
of
of
of

10
10
10
10

patchcords
patchcords
patchcords
patchcords

9.00
9.00
9.00
9.00

389

KSERIES INTERFACE MODULES

Recommended logic modules for input/ output functions.

AC InputlOutput
1K578
1K614

120 VAC Input converter

120 VAC Isolated AC switch

SO. 00

88.00

DC InputlOutput
1K5SO

28.00

Dry Contact Filter

Listed below are a number of DC output drivers that may be used:

lK644
1K656

1K658

DC output Driver
or
DC output Driver
or

66.00
80.00

DC output Driver

128.00

Each additional K series workbook

5.00

Note: only 3 out of 4 circuits are available when using above 3 modules with the K901
mounting panel.
Reference logic or control handbook for additional module information and selection.

390

A rear view of the K Series Logic Lab shows how modules are plugged into
mounting panels.

391

TRAINING AND DESIGN AIDS

CONTROL
PRODUCTS

COMPUTER LAB
The COMPUTER LAB is a high performance low-cost dig;tal logic trainer.
It uses the same monolithic integrated transistor-transistor logic circuitry
used in DIGITAL's latest computers.
The digital logic fundamentals presented by the COMPUTER LAB can foster
a . basic understanding of computer technology for the computer career
oriented user, or for a user applying computers for the first time. The COMPUTER LAB will also help the math-oriented user understand "new math"
concepts, as computer logic operates with binary numbers according to
Boolean algebraic laws.
Wiring is easy because of the standard logic symbology used on the front
panel and the color coded Patchcords which are easily ,inserted and removed.
An improper circuit will not damage the COMPUTER LAB. The faulty circuit
merely "waits" for correction.
Features:
Transistor-Transistor logic circuitry as used in DIGITAL's PDP computers
Teaches modern computer l~giC
Easy to use: MIL-STD 806 logic symbology on front panel
Portable: Dimensions of 12112" x 17" x 3 1/4", weighing only llibs.
Comprehensive Workbook provides:
-Ten detailed chapters
-More than 30 experiments
-Over 200 hours of laboratory study
-Dozens of tables and diagrams
-An extensive appendix of supplementary information
Instructor's Guide with answers, additional text, extra problems, course
plans, at only $5.00
Low cost: COMPUTER LAB, Workbook and Patchcord set, ready to use

$445.00

393

DEC has more than 1.5 million square feet of manufacturing space. This view
shows a portion of a module assembly area.

394

About
Digital
Equipment
Corporation
In a little over a decade, Digital Equipment Corporation has grown from three
employees and one floor of production space in a converted woolen mill, to
a major international corporation. DEC now employs more than 5500. Our
products are manufactured in several plants, and are sold and serviced from
customer support centers in the United States, Canada, Japan, Australia
and seven European countries.
We produce a wide variety of computer and control products ranging from
logic modules to large time sharing computer systems. In addition to the
control logic modules detailed in this handbook, DEC also manufactures
lines of computer design and interface modules; 12-, 16-, 18- and 36-bit
computers, peripheral devices; special systems; accessories; and a wide
variety of software.
DEC first began manufacturing computer-related equipment in 1957 when
we introduced a line of solid state logic modules. These were initially used.
to test and build other manufacturers' electronic equipment. The logic module
product lines have been continually broadened, and DEC now ranks as the
world's largest manufacturing supplier of digital logic modules, producing
more than three million per year.

395

Our "first computer, the PDP1 was introduced a decade ago, selling for
$120,000 while competitive machines were priced over $1 million. Ever
since the PDP1, DEC has specialized in online, realtime cOl1)puters.
The PDP5, introduced.Jn 1963, was the first truly small computer. The PDp8
series, the PDP-5 successor announced in 1965, is one of the most popular
and successful families of computers ever produced. More than 7500 are now
installed.
DEC is a leading force in small computers, but it also has been a pacesetter
in other parts of the industry. For example, one of the first time sharing
systems ever built incorporated a PDP-I. DEC introduced the first largescale,
commercially available time sharing system in 1965-the PDP6. Its successor, the PDP-10, can do more at a price well under $1 million than competitive systems costing several times as much.
With more than 9,000 computers now installed, DEC is the third largest
manufacturer in terms of installations.
In industry, DEC computers provide engineers with a powerful control and
testing tool. They control blast furnaces and open hearths, monitor slab mills
and finishing mills, and control and monitor a variety of machine tools,
transfer. and material handling equipment. DEC computers assisted in the
analysis of lunar rock samples, guided the SS MANHATTAN as she sailed
the Northwest Passage, and are being used in testing the Boeing 747 jumbo
jet, and the Anglo-French Concorde supersonic airplane.
In science, our computers have cut the researchers experiment time with
direct, on-line data reduction. DEC computers control and monitor powerful
nuclear reactors, control Xray diffractometers, and analyze nuclear spectroscopy data. They are used extensively in environmental research and
pollution control.
In virtually all DEC computer installations, DEC solid state logic is used for
interfacing or control application.

GENERAL INFORMATION
FINANCIAL RESULTS
Net Income (in millions)

Total Sales (in millions)

1970
1969
1968
1967
1966

$ 135.4
$ 91.?
$ 57.3
$

1970
1969
1968
1967
1966

38.8
22.7

MAIN PLANT & CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS:

146 Main Street, Maynarg, Massachusetts
(617) 897-5111
1,000,000 square feet

396

$ 14.4

$ 9.4
$ 6.8
$ 4.5
$ 1.9

OTHER MANUFACTURING FACILITIES

Carleton Place, Ont., Canada

40,000 square feet

Leomirn:;ter, Mass.

60,000 square feet

Reading, England

25,000 square feet

San German, Puerto Rico

58,000 square feet

Westfield, Mass. .

............................ ..

260,000 square feet

Westminster, Mass.

260,000 square feet

TOTAL EMPLOYEES

5,900

Sales, Service and Support

1,400

Manufacturing ......................... ..

2,700

Engineering, Marketing, Programming.

General and Administrative

.............. .

DEC's new PDP-8! E

397

600
1,200

GENERAL DESCRIPTIONS OF DEC PRODUCTS

(Excluding those discussed in this Handbook)

COMPUTERS
PDP-8/E The all new, lower cost successor to the PDP-811 and PDP-S/L It is
the outgrowth of the largest concentration of minicomputer engineering, programming and user expertise in the world. Among the PDP-8f E features are:
a unique internal bus system called OMNIBUSTM, which allows the user to
plug memory ,and processor options into any available slot location; the
availability of 256 words of read only or read/write memory; a 1.2 microsecond memory cycle time; the use of TTL integrated circuitry with medium
scale integration; expansion to 32,768 12-bit words; low cost mass storage
expansion with DECdisk or DECtape.

PDP-II An expandable general purpose computer with 4,096 basic words of

standard core memory, each word 16 bits in length. Memory cycle time is
1.2 microseconds. Machine uses integrated circuitry and has some mediumscale integration in central processor.
PDP-12 Laboratory computer system capable of executing PDP-8 and L1NC-S
programs. It has basic 4,096-word core memory_ Each word is 12 bits in
length. Bas-ic laboratory system includes interactive graphics capability,
magnetic tape storage, AI D converter, and pre-wired, real-time clock.

PDP-IS A medium-scale ser;es with an 18-bit word length. Four basic versions: PDP-15/l0, PDP-15/20, PDP-15/30, and PDP-15/40.
PDP-lO General purpose large computer with basic memory of 8,192 (36bit)
words, expandable to 262,144. Will handle up to 63 time-sharing users
simultaneously with batch and real-time jobs at the same time.

COMPUTER-BASED SYSTEMS
The following describes a sample of some ,of the hardware/ software application systems available from DEC.

INDAC-8 Small computer-based system for industrial data acquisition, process

control, data logging, process monitoring and quality testing, uses simplifie'd
language designed for engineers, not programmers.
680/1 Small computer-based data communications system built around PDP-S
family computers. It concentrates up to 128 teleprinter grade lines into one
or more medium speed channels, drastically reducing the charges for telephone lines.

LAB-8 Small computer-based data signal averaging system, used in biomedical, chemistry, and physics laboratories. Includes software for other
functions.

TSS-8 Small computer-based general purpose time-sharing system designed

to accommodate up to 16 users with a variety of software for many tasks_
TYPESET-8 Small computer-based system for setting type, producing punched
tape containing all hyphenation, justification and format commands needed
to set 12,000 lines of copy per hour.

GlC-8 Small coniputer-based gas liquid chromatography system that will

service 20 or more gas chromatographs simultaneously. It reduces and
analyzes data accurately, repetitively and economically.
398

CLiNICAlLAB12 Real-time, on-line multiterminal small computer system

designed to provide the clinical laboratory witI'). an economical means of data
collection, data reduction, and analysis_
EDUCATIONAL SYSTEMS These systems include computer and a variety of
applications software. In the group are single language time-sharing systems
and hardware/ software calculator replacements.
DISPLAYS A variety of displays are available for all applications where the
speed and flexibility of graphic communications increase system efficiency.
SPECIAL SYSTEMS
DEC's special systems group custom builds hardware and software systems
for special applications.
SOFTWARE
A comprehensive line of software is available with DEC's hardware. Assemblers, debugging routines, editors, monitors, floating point packages and
mathematical routines, diagnostic programs, are made available.
DEC has also developed such conversational, interpretive languages as:
FOCAL, an on-line language used as a tool by students, engineers and
scientists in solving a wide variety of numerical problems; and DIBOL, a
business-oriented computer language designed to bring the speed and power
of PDP-8 family computers to small- and medium-size business establishments.
OPTIONS & PERIPHERALS
Analogi Digital converters, displ'ay and plotting equipment, drums and disks,
magnetic tape equipment, card equipment, line printers, and many others.
SUPPLIES
Power supplies, cabinetry, mounting hardware, tape, tape reels, storage racks,
teletype ribbon and paper.

DEC's large PDP-10 computer, a portion of which is shown here, is used in

application ranging from financial management to commercial timesharing
to plant monitoring.
399

WARRANTY
WARRANTY I-B, R, W, M, K, AND A MODULES - All S, R, W, M, K, and A
modules as shown in the Logic Handbook and Control Handbook, as revised
from time to time, are warranted against defects in workmanship and material
under normal use and service for a period of ten years from date of shipment providing parts are available. DEC will repair or replace, at DEC's option,
any S, R, W, M, K, or A module found to be defective in workmanship or material within ten years of shipment for a handling charge of $5.00 or 10 per
cent of list price per unit, whichever is higher. Handling charges will be applicable from one year after delivery.
WARRANTY 2-SYSTEM MODULES, LABORATORY MODULES, HIGH CUR
RENT PULSE EQUIPMENT, G, S, H, AND NONCATALOG FLlpCHIP MODULES
- All items referenced are warranted against defects in workmanship and
material under normal use and service for a period of one year from date of
shipment. DEC will repair or replace, at DEC's option, any of the above items
found to be defective in workmanship or material within one year of shipment. Repair charges will be applicable from one year after delivery with
repair charges varying depending on the complexity of the circuit.
The Module Warranty outside the continental U.S.A. is limited to repair of the
module and excludes shipping, customer's clearance or any other charges.
Modules must be returned prepaid to DEC. Transportation charges covering
the return of the repaired modules shall be paid by DEC except as indicated
in previous paragraph, and will be made on a UPS basis, where available,
or Parcel Post insured. Premium methods of shipment are available at customer's expense and will be used only when requested. If DEC selects the
carrier, DEC will not thereby assume any liability in connection with the
shipment nor shall the carrier be in any way construed to be the agent of
DEC. Please ship all units to:
Digital Equipment Corporation
Module Marketing Services
Repair Division
146 Main Street
Maynard, Mass. 01754
No module will be accepted for credit or exchange without the prior written
approval of DEC, plus proper Return Authorization Number (RA#).
All shipments are F.O.B. Maynard, Massachusetts, and prices do not include state or local
taxes. Prices and specifications are subject to change without notice.
DISCOUNT SCHEDULE
Aggregate List Price
$
5,000 - 9,999

10,000 - 19,999
20,000 - 49,999
50,000 - 99,999
100,000 - 249,999
250,000 - 499,999
500,000 - 999,999
1,000,000 - AND OVER

Applicable Discount
3%

5%
10%
15%
18%
20%
22%
25%

Discounts apply to any combination of FLIP CHIP Modules. Cabinets listed in catalog are discountable.

400

PRICE LIST AND NUMERICAL INDEX

A123
*A160
*A161
*AI62
*A163
*A164
*A165
*AI66
*A167
A207
*A260
A404
*A460
A461
A613
A6I8
A619
A620
A621

*A660
A702
A704

A811
*A860
*A861

*A862
H001
H002
H020
H021
H022
H704
H707
H710
H800
H802
H808

HalO
H811
H812
H813
H814
H820
H821
H825
H826
H913
H914
H920
H921
H923

PRICE
Positive Logic Multiplexer.................. ................. $ 58.00
8 Channel FET High Impedance Mux ..
250.00
8 Channel FET High Impedance Mux w/amp ...
375.00
8 Channel FET High' Impedance Mux w/decoder 270.00
8 Channel FET High Impedance Mux w/decoder
& amp. ........
. .................................. .
395.00
8 Channel Constant Impedance Mux ............. .
350.00
8 Channel Constant Impedance Mux w/amp.
475.00
8 Channel Constant Impedance Mux wi decoder 365.00
8 Channel Constant Impedance Mux wldecoder
& amp. -.............. ..
490.00
Operational Amplifier ..
45.00
Dual Amplifier Card
300.00
Sample and Hold
130.00
400.00
Sample. and Hold w/o Input Buffer
Sample and Hold with Input Buffer.
525.00
12-8it DAC
200.00
10-Bit 01 A Converter Single Buffered
300.00
325.00
10-Bit DJ A Converter Single Buffered
300.00
10-Bit 0/ A Converter Double Buffered
375.00
10-Bit 0/ A Converter Double Buffered
Utility 12-8it Multiplying DAC wi Register.
500.00
Reference Supply
................ .
58.00
Reference Supply ....
175.00
10~Bit AI D Converter ..
350.00
12-Bit Industrial Converter-Double Ramp.
395.00
Unipolar High Speed AI D Converter.
595.00
595.00
Bipolar High Speed AID Converter ...
Bracket .... .
8.00
Bracket ... .
8.00
Frame Casting
15.00
End Plates .....
7.00
End Plate Assembly
20.00
Dual Power Supply .
200.00
Dual Power Supply .
400.00
Power Supply ..... .
200..00
Connector Block ............. .
8.00
Connector Block ... ..
4.00
Connector Block .. .
10.00
Pistol Grip Wire-wrapping Tool ..
99.00
Hand Wrapping Tool .......
2l.50
Hand Unwrapping Tool.
10.50
Hand Unwrapping Tool.
30.00
Hand Unwrapping Tool .
2l.00
Grip Clip
48.00
Grip Clip ................ .
75.00
Hand Crimping Tool
146.00
Hand Crimping Tool .
210.00
Mounting Panel.
270.00
Mounting Panel ..
125.00
Module Drawer
170.00
Front Panel
10.00
Slide Trac'ks
75.00
401

PAGE

184
186
188
190
192
194
196
198
200
202
204
208
210
210
212
214
214
216
216
218
220
220
222
224
226
226
236
236
236
236
236
230
230
159
237
238
239
241
242
242
240
240.
242
242
242
242
176
176
244
244
244

PRICE LIST AND NUMERICAL INDEX

H925
H941AA
H950AA
K003
K012
K026
K028
K080
*K112
K113
*K122
K123
K124
K134
.K135
*K138
K161
*K171
*K174
K184
K201
K202
K206
K210
K211
K220
K230
K271
K273
K281
K282
K301
K303
K323
K333
K371
K373
K374
K375
K376
K378
K410
*K415
K420
K422
K424
K432
K501
K508
K522
K524
K531
K578

PRICE
250.00
175.00
152.00
5.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
3.00
12.00
11.00
13.00
12.00
14.00
13.00
13.00
24.00
25.00
13.00
24.00
25.00
39.00
27.00
20.00
.27.00
20.00
55.00
40.00
40.00
85.00
10.00
40.00
15.00
27.00
35.00
23.00
11.00
11.00
15.00
11.00
15.00
15.00
18.00
46.00
33.00
27.00
27.00
33.00
25.00
44.00
25.00
98.00
70.00
80.00

Module Drawer .
Mounting Panel 19"
Cabinet
Gate Expander
Gate Expander
Gate Expander
Gate Expander
Cable Connector .
Logic Gate.
Logic Gate
Logic Gate.
Logic Gate.
Logic Gate
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Binary to Octal Decoder'
Equality Comperator .
Digital Comparator
Rate Multiplier
FlipFlop
FlipFlop
FlipFlop Register
Counter
Programmable Divider
Up/ Down Counter.
Shift Register
Retentive Memory .
Retentive Memory .
Fixed Memory .
Diode Matrix .
Basic Timer
Timer.
One Shot
Pulser
Timer Control, Clock .
Timer Control, Clock.
Calibrated Timer Control
Timer Control Clock
Calibrated Timer Control
Calibrated Timer Control ..
Indicator Lights
Nixie Display
Switches
Thumbwheel Encoder.
Thumbwheel Decoder
Timer Control
Schmitt Trigger.
AC Input Converter
Sensor Converter
Sensor Converter
Quadrature Decoder
120 VAC Input Converter
402

PAGE
245
246
248
28
28
28
28
31
32
32

32
32

32
43

44
45
46
49

50
52
55
56
58
59
62
64
68
70
72
74
76
77
80
82
84
86
86
86
86
86
86
92
93
95
96
98
100
103
104
107
109
114
117

PRICE LIST AND NUMERICAL INDEX

K580
K581
K596
K604
K614
K615

K644

*K650
*K652
K656
K658
K671
K681
K683
K696
K716
K724
K730
K731
1<732
K741
K743
K771
K782
K784
K791
K900
K901
K902
K903
K940
K941
K943
K950
K980
K982
K990
~91l

913
914
915
932
933
934
935
936
1907
4913
>:<

Dry Contact Filter ..

Dry Contact Filter ..
EIA Input Converter .
Isolated AC Switch
Isolated AC Switch
Isolated AC Switch
DC Driver
DC Driver
DC Driver
DC Driver
DC D~ver ..
. ............... .
Decimal Decoder & Nixie Display .. .
Lamp Driver
Lamp Driver ............ .
EIA Output Converter.
Interface Block ..
Interface Shell ............. .
Source and Control Module .
Source Module
Slave Regulator
Power Transformer ..
Power Transformer ..
Display Supply
Terminal ... .
Terminal .. .
Test Probe ...
Control Panel-Power Supply
Patch Board Panel.
Indicator Switch Panel
Patch Board Panel
Mounting Hardware
Mounting Hardware
Mounting Panel ....
Modular Mounting Hardware
End Plates.
Mounting Panel .
Timer Component Board.
Patchcords
Patchcords
Power Jumper.
Patchcords
Bus Strip
Bus Strip
Wire-Wrapping Wire
Wire-Wrapping Wire
Conductor Ribbon Cable
Cover ....
Mounting Rack

New Modules

403

PRICE

PAGE

28.00
20.00
20.00
110.00
88.00
92.00
66.00
40.00
50.00
80.00
128.00
55.00
15.00
30.00
44.00
75.00
55.00
19.09
30.00
27.00
30.00
45.00
35.00
12.00
17.00
40.00
185.00
125.00
145.00
155.00
4.00
6.00
96.00
39.00
6.00
10.00
4.00
9.00
18.00
4.00
33.00
0.60
1.00
50.00
60.00
0.60
9.00
25.00

120
120
123
124
127
130
133
136
138
139
141
143
144
146
148
150
154
155
157
160
168
168
170
171
171
170
384
385
386
387
173
173
175
177
178
179
180
385
242
243
242
.240
240
240
241
241
178
388

INDEX
104, 107

AC Input Converter
Adder, Serial
Amplifier Card
Amplifier, Differential
Amplifier, Operational
Amplifier, Transducer.
Analog-to-Digital Converters
Analog-to Frequency Converters
Annunciators
BCD
Binary-to-Octal Decoding
Blank Modules
Brake Drivers

320
204
107-113,202,204,303
202, 204
107-113, 202, 303
222, 2,26, 297
329
311

46, 59, 62, 92, 94, 96, 98, 114, 143, 190, 191
46-48
259
139, 141
31
256
248-255
63, 88, 89
133-142
109, 202, 204
49-51
392
237-239
173, 236
262-267
120
. 380
104, ~07
222, 226
212, 214, 216, 218
.... 295, 296
295, 296
268-285
59, 62, 64
310
324
64, 301, 319
162-167

Cable Connector
Cables
Cabinets
Clocks ...
Clutch Drivers .
Comparator, Analog .
Comparator, Digital
Computer Lab.
Connector Blocks
Connector Mounting Bars
Construction Recommendations
Contact Filters
Contro," Systems .
Conversion, AC Input
Conversion, Analog-to-Digital
Conversion, Digital-to-Analog .
Conversion, K-to-M Series
Conversion, M-to-K Series.
Conversion, Relay-to-K Series
Counters, Binary-coded Decimal
Counters, Parallel
Counters, Switch-tail Ring
Counters, Up-Down
Current Requirements-Modules

59, 62, 64
Decimal Counters
99, 143
Decimal Decoders .
92, 94, 143
Decimal Indicators
46,98, 143
Decod i ng- Digita I
35, 77, 80, 82, 84, 100, 180, 190, 286, 293, 300
Delay ....
202, 204
Differential Amplifier-Fixed Gain
55, 56, 59, 62, 64, 68
Digital Divider
........ 8
Digital Inputs
352
Direct Numerical Control
293
Discriminator, Frequency.
107-113, 303, 306
Discriminator, Voltage
94, 143
Displays
170
Display Su ppl ies
405

INDEX
Divider
Drivers,
Drivers,
Drivers,
Drivers,
Drivers,
Drivers,

..... .
Clutch/ Brake .
Indicator ....
Motor Starter.
Relay I Solenoid .,.
Stepper Motor .
Using

................................................... 62
............. 133-142
.......................... 144, 147
124, 126, 130, 133-142
124, 126, 130, 133-142
.......... 133-142
... ..................... 307
........ 123, 148

EIA Converters .............. .

Encoding-Digital
End Plates .......................... .
Equality- see Comparators
Exclusive-OR .....
Expande~

Chann~

. .. :............... 96
............... 178
.................. 40
..................... 194
186, 194

......... .

Expander, Multiplexer ... .. .

Flip-Flops ............ .

42, 55-58

Gate Expanders ...

logic

...................... ,.. .. ....... 28-30, 36-39

.................. 32, 34

G~tes,

133-142
.............................. 13

Hydraulic Valve Drivers ..

Hysteresis ........ .

Indicators ......
....... .... .....
................................. 92
Indicator Drivers
........................................................ ......... 144-147
Industrial Converter ........
. . ... ........ .. .......................................... 224
Inp.l Converters. .............
103, 104, 107, 109, 114, 117. 120, 123
Input loading .
........................ ...................... ..... 11
Integrator ................................................................................................ 318
Interface Shells .. .
... ........... ..... 150. ,154
Interface, Transducer .... ....................
. ........................ 107. 109
Inverters .....................
...................
. ............................. 43. 45
Isolated AC Switches... .
.... ..... ...... .
124. 12,1. 130. 331
lamp Drivers ....... .
limit Switch Inputs
loading ................... .
logic lab-KSeries
logic Symbols . .......................................... .

......................... 144. 147

.................... 104. 107. 120
................................ 11
...................... 383
.......................... 18

MSeries Modules-inqu!re at nearest sales office

Manual Controls.
. ........ 91-101
Memories ...............................................................
70,-76, 315
Module Characteristics .. ~........ .....
....... ........
.............. 162-167
Module Drawers ................................................................................ 244, 245
Module Extenders....................................
............................. 257, 258
Module Summary....................................................................... ....... 162, 167
Monostable Multivibrator ............................................................................ 82
Motors, Servo ......................................... ................ ..... ........................... 328
Motor Starts ......... ................................... 124, 127, 130
. Motor, Stepper .............................................................................. 321-327
406

173, 177, 236

246, 388

Mounting Hardware
Mounting Panel Frame
Mounting Panels
Multiplexer Digital
Multiplexer, High Impedance
Multiplexer, Positive Logic;
Multiplexer, Constant Impedance
Multiplier, Pulse Rate

179
52-54
187, 190, 192
184
196, 198, 200
52, 316, 317
40

NAND
Nixies
Noise (electrical)
Nor
Numerical Control
Numerical Control Tape Preparation

94, 143
12
40
352
338
77, 80

Off-Delay
On-Delay.
One-Shot
Operamn,el Amplifiers
Output Converters
Output Loading.

77
77, 82
202, 204
124, 127, 130, 148

11

Panel, Control .
Patch Cords
PDP-14/ PDP-14L
Photocell Inputs.
Pneumatic Valve Drivers
Power Supplies
Power Transformers
Pulse Amplifiers
Pulse Generators
Pulsers
Programmable Controller
Programmable Divider

384
385
360
107, 113
133-142
159, 230
168
77,82
84, 300
84
360
62

Quadrature Decoders
Quickpoint

114, 301
338
52-54, 316, 317
5"9, 63
220
268-285
124, 127, 130, 133-142
70, 72

Rate Multiplier
Real-time Clock
Reference Supplies.
Relay to K Series Conversion
Relay Drivers
Retentive Memory

208, 210
103
107-113, 303, 306
286-292
328
293
55, 58, 68, 324-326

Sample and Hold

Schmitt Triggers
Sensor Converters
Sequencers.
Servo Motors
Stepoint Control
,Shift Registers .

407

INDEX
....................... 324

Shift Registers, Bi-directional .

Slave Regulator
Slowdown, Module
Source and Supply Modules
Starters, Motor
Stepper Motors
Switches and Filters

................. 160

................. 14,35
155, 157
124, 127, 130
321-327
95, 120
........ 11
.......... 171

Temperature Requirements
Terminals
Thermistor lnputs
Thumbwheel Swithes
Timer Controls .
Timers
Timing Requirements
Training and Design Aides .
Transducer Interfaces
Trimpots .

107~113

96, 98, 313

84, 100, 180
77-81
12, 294
'"
.............. 382
107-113
.. .. .. ......
107-113

133, 142
........... 400

Valve Drivers
Warranty
Wire
Wired AND
Wire-wrap
Wiring Accessories

240, 242
.... 15,41
........ 233
240,244

408

FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 33
MAYNARD, MASS.
BUSINESS REPLY MAil
NO POSTAGE STAMP NECESSARY
IF MAilED IN THE UNITED STATES
Postage will be paid by:

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION

DEPT. A.
MAYNARD, MASSACHUSETTS 01754

(staple- here)

READER SURVEY AND INFORMATION REQUEST

We want to assure that future editions of this handbook and other information we prepare for you is as useful and informative as possible.
We ask your assistance by completing and mailing this card to us. You
may use this card also to request additional information.
Thank you for your interest in DEC.
Your primary job function IS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Your firm's principle product is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Did you get this book as a result of:
D Attending a trade show? Which one? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Advertising inquiry? 0 Editorial inquiry?

Which publication? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
D From another person?

Have you ever used a previous edition of the Control Handbook?

DYes 0 No Logic Handbook? DYes D No
In this Control Handbook, did you read:
Introduction? 0 Application Section? 0 Hardware Description?
D Control Products Description? 0 Company Information?

Did you find the material:

D Too difficult? D Understandable?

0 Too basic?

0 Useful?

- - - - - - - - - - - - (please fold here) - - - - - - - - - - - - -

What application do you or might you have for solid state control?

If you would like additional information on any DEC product please check
the appropriate items:
Control Products:
Computer Products:
o Logic Modules
o PDP-8/E
o PDP-14
PDP-l1
D Quickpoint-8
o PDP-I5
PDP-IO
D DNC
Other __________
PDP-12
Other ______________

o
o

PLEASE CHECK HERE IF YOU WOULD LIKE TO BE PLACED ON OUR

CONTROL PRODUCTS MAILING LIST.

Name
Title
Company

Division

Street
City

State

Zip
I

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION

mamaomo

WORLD-WIDE SALES AND SERVICE

MAIN OFFICE AND PLANT

, .. M.'n Sueet. Maynard. MauachuseUs. U.S.A. 01154 re/ephon,: From Metropolitan Boslon: 846-8600 EIHW"".: ("7)-1t7-51"

UNITED STATES
NOIITHEAST

MID.ATLANTIC -

IIfGIONAL OFFICE
,. Lunda Street. W.ttham, M....chu tt.02154
Toleph_, (l17}881-1030
TW't 111).324-0819
WALTHAM
15 lurid. Str.et. W.,tham. Mchutt. 02154
To'opllo. . , (117)-8111-41310/8315
TWX, 711).324-0919
CAMSIIIOGE/BOSTON
_
Main Street, Cembt'ldgta. Mellachua.ttl 02139
T.,.",,_, (817)-<491-t130
TWX, 111).321).1167

HUNTSVILLE
Suite 41 - HolidlY Offlce Center
3322 Memorial Parkway S.W,. Huntaville. Ala. 35801
Tolophone, (205)-981-7730
TWX,811).126-2122

DAYTON
3101 K.tterlng Blvd . Dayton. OhiO 45438
Tolophone, (513}-211IP371
TWX, 810-458-1178

ORLANDO
Suite 232. 11990 Loko Ellenor Drl.e. Orlendo. Fl . 32809
Tolophone, (305)-95I-44&l
TWX, 810-850-Ci180

885S North Stemmonl Freeway. Suite 204

ATlANTA

HOUSTON
34t7 Milam Stre.t. Suite A. HOUlton. T 17002
Telophono, (713}-524-2981
TWX, 910-IIII11851

ROCHESTER
130 AUenl Creek Road. Rochetter, New York 14618
T pIIo.. , (118)-481-1100
TWX, 711).599-3211
CONNECTICUT

, Prellige Drive. Meriden, Connecticut 08450

Te'"",_, (203)-237-8441

MIDATLANTIC -

TWX, 711).481-oos.!

SOUTHEAST

REGIONAL OFFICE,
U.S. Rout. I, Princeton, New l.rHY 08540
T.,.",,-, (1IOII~-9150
TWX, 510-e85-2338

NEW YORK
lIS Ceder lane. Englewood. New J.raey 07631
T.Ie""-, (201}-071_. (212}-~. (212)736-04-17
TWX,110-991-9721

NEW JERSEY

SOUTHEAST (COnL)

Suite 118, 1700 Commerce Drive, N.W.

Atl,nta. Georgia 30318
Tolophone, (404)-351-2622
TWX, 811).751-3251
KNOXVILLE
5731 Lyon. Vi.w Pike. S W., Kno:ll.vllle. Tenn. 37919
Telephono, (615)-588-8511
TWX, 811).5IB0123

CENTRAL

CENTRAL (COnL)

DALLAS
Oall,., Texea 75247
Tolophone. (214}-638-3II6t)

TWX, 810-IIII1-4000

WEST
REGIONAl OFFICE
Sen AntoniO Rued. Palo Alto. Californl.94308
rolo""onl, (415)-326-S640
TWX, 811).313-12118

sao

ANAHEIM

REGIONAL OFFICE'
1850 frontage Road. Northbrook. IIlInola 80082
Tolephone, (312}-498-2580
TWX, 81~

80' E. Ball Road. Anaheim. Callfornll 92805

PITTSBURGH
400 Penn Cenler Boulevard
Pittsburgh. Penn8ylvania 15235
Tolephone, (412}-243-35OD
TWX, 711).797-3657

WEST LOS ANGELES

2002 Cotner Avenue. Loa Angel . Callfornll 10025
Tolophone, (213}-479-3791
TWX 811).342_

CHICAGO
1850 Frontage Road. Northbrook. IIlInoia 8IXI82
relephone: (312).498-2500
TWX: 91~
ANN ARBOR
230 Huron View Boulev.rd. Ann Arbor. Michigan 48103
Tolophone, (313)-7611150
TWX, 611).~

Tolephone. (114}716-8932 or (213)-82S-711119

TWX, 811).591-1189

SAN FRANCISCO
S60 San Antonio Roed. Palo Alto. California 9(DJ
Tolephone' (415}326-S640
TWX, 810-373-1.
OAKLAND
Dlgita' Equipment Corporation
7850 Edgewater Drive
Oaidand. California 94821
rolephone' (415)-835.5453. (415)-835.7830
TWX. 911).366-7238

I . Route 48. Parol_ny. New I".ey OlO54

T.,,,,,,-, (201}-_3300
TWX, 710-987-11319
PRINCETON
Route One end Emmons Orl".
Princeton, New Jefley 08S40
T.,..",o"" (IIlII}-452-2940
TWX, 511).685-2337
LONG ISLAND
1119 Mlddlo Country Roed
c.m.reoch. L.I . Now York 117211
T.,.",,_, (518}-58S-5410
TWX, 511).22U505
PHILADELPHIA
1100 We .. Valley Road. Wayne. Penneylven 19087
Tolopllo. . , (215)-987-115
TWX, 51~1
WASHINGTON
E_utl.o Building
7100 Beltlmoro Avo . Collego Pork. M.rylond 20140
T.'e""-, (J01}-779-IIOD
TWX, 110-926-_
DURHAM/CHAPEL /tILL
2lO4 Ch_' Hili Boule.OI'd
Durtlom. Notth Corollnl 27707
Telop/lono, (819}-&3347
TWX, 511).92H1912

ST. LOUIS
Sulta 110. 115 Progre'8 Pky .. Maryland Helghta,
Mi ourl 63043
Teloph""o (314)-872-7520
TWX, 811).764-01131

CANADA

GERMANY (cont.)

SWITZERLAND

MUNICH
8000 Muenchen 19. L.onrod.tr.... 58
T.I.pho"e: 51630 54
Telex: 52G26
HANOVER
Dlgilal Equipment Corporation GmBH
3 Hanover. Podblel.klatra.H 102
Telephone 0511--697-095
Telex: 922952

Digital Equipment Corporation S."'.

GENEVA
81 Route De LA.re
1227 C .... oug. I Oeneva. Switzerland
Tel.phone: 42 79 50
T.I.x: 22 883

INDIANAPOLIS
21 Beechway Drive - Suite G
Indl.napoli . Ind.. na 48224
Telophone, (317}-243-8341
TWX, 811).34t-3436
MINNEAPOLIS
15018 Minnetonka Indult,lal Road
Minnetonka. Minna.ota S5343
Tolephone, (612}-935-1744
TWX,911).5762618
CLEVELAND
Pari< HIli Bldg .. 35104 Euclid Ave
W,lIoughby. Ohio _
Tolephono (216}-946-1I484
TWX 811).427-2806

ALBUQUERQUE

b3 Indian School Road. N.E

Albuquerque, N.M. 87110
Tolophono (505)2811-5411

TWX, 911)._,.

DENVER
2315 South Colorado Blvd., Suite #5
Denver, Colorado 80222
Telophone, 303-757-3332
TWX, 911).931-2650
SEATTLE
1521 130th N.E .. Bell.vue. Wa.hlngton S8)04
Telephone' (208}-_
TWX, 910-443-2308
SALT LAKE CITY
431 South Jrd Eo.t. Soil LIke City. Utah 841"
Telephone, (801}-32JI.9838
TWX, 911).925-51134

INTERNATIONAL
OIgl..1 Equl_nt

01 Conedo. ltd.

CANADIAN HEADQUARTERS
150 Aournond Street, Carleton Piece. Ontario
T",,-, (l13}-257-aI5
TWX, 811).581-1651

OTTAWA
, . Hollind Strt. Ottawa 3. Ontario
T.Ieph.... , (813)-725-2193
TWX, 811).582-8907

ENGLAND
TORONTO

2:!D LekooIIoro Rood Et. Port Credit. Ontorlo

T",,-, (,'8)-27UII I

TWX, 610-4112-4306

MONTREAL

1175 COlo do LI .... Rood

0 .....,. Quebec. Conodo 7S)
T.,opllone, 514-l13li-9393

TWX, 01(1-422-4124

EDMONTON

_-103 Stroot
Edmonton. Albena. Clnada
T.I.""OIIO' (403)-434-9333

TWX, 811).831-2248

VANCotNER
01 ..... Equipment 01 Conodo. LId
22'0 We. 12th Aven,,'
Vencower. Brltl.h Col"mbla. Canede
T.Iop/Iono, (104)-736-5818

EUROPAN HEADQUARTERS
D"ltel Equtpment Corporation Internatlonel-Europe
81 lIouto Do LAI,.
.227 Cerouge I Geneva. Swltzerlend
T.I~, 42 79 50
Tol", 2211113

Dlgltol Equipment Co. lid.

READING
Arkwright Road, Reading. Berkahlre. England
Telex: 84327
Telephone: Reading 85131
MANCHESTER
5 Upper PreCinct, Wo,..tey
Manche.ter. England m28 Saz
relephone: OfSl7IO-8411
Telex' 688686
LONDON
Bilton HOUle. Uxbridge Road, Eallng. London W.5
Telephone: 01579-2781
Telex: 22371

FRANCE
Equipment Dlgllal S.A.R.L
PARIS
233 Rue de Charenton. Pari. 12, France
Tolophone, 344-~7
T.lo" 21339

BENELUX
Dlglte' Equipment N.V.
(IfI'rvlng Belgium, luxembourg. end The Netherlendl)
THE HAGUE
Konlnolnnegfecl\t $S, Tke Hagua. Netherland.
Telephone: 635880
Telex. 32533

GERMANY

SWEDEN

Olglte' Equipment GmbH

Digital Equipment Aktlebolag

STOCKHOLM
,
Vretenvagen 2. S171 54 Solna. Sweden
Telex: 170 50
Telephon . 0198 1390
Coblo, Dlglt.1 Stockholm

COLOGNE

5 Koeln, Bllm8rckltr 7. W.at aermany

Tolepllone, 52 21 81
Tolo" _2269
T.,...... , Flip Chip Koeln

ITALY
Dlgita' Equipment S. p. A
MILAN
Coroo Gorlboldl. 411. 20121 Mllono. It..y
Telephone, 872 748. 872 894. 872 394
Tole" 331115

AUSTRALIA
019"01 Equipment Auotroll. Ply. Ltd.
SYDNEY
75 Ale.ander St.. Crow. Ne.t, N.S.W. 2015. Au,'r.lI.
Telephone: 439-2588
Tete:ll.: 20740
Cable: Digital. Sydney
MELBOURNE
60 Park Street. South Melbourne. Victoria. 320S
Telephone: 89-8142
Tele:ll.: 30'700
WESTERN AUSTRALIA
843 Murray Strt
Weat Perth. Weatern Aua.ral. fJOO5
Telephon. 21-4993
Telex: 92140
BRISBANE
139 Merlvale Street. South Btl,bene
Queen.land. Auatralla 4101
Telephone: 44047
Telex: 40818

JAPAN
TOKYO
Rlkol Trodlng Co . ltd. (,. . only)
KozatoKalkan Bldg
No. 18-14. Nlehlahlmbeehl l-chome
Minato-Ku. Tokyo. Japln
Telephone' 5915248
Tele.: 781420)
Olglta' Equipment Corporillon 'ntemetlOftliI
Kowa Building No. 17, Second Floor
27 NiahlAzabu l-Chome
MlhatoKu. Tokyo. Japan
rel.""one, _ _ /8
T.I , TK-e4211